Home

68340 Emulator/Analyzer Graphical User Interface

1. Softkey Interface Memory mnemonic file main module main c address data O0000FCO 4E560000 LINK W A6 50000 OOOOOFC4 4EB9000014 JSR 000014E8 OOOOOFCA 4EB900001A JSR 00001A3E QOOOOFDO 4E71 NOP 0 FD2 4EB9000015 JSR 00001592 00000F 5289000076 ADDQ L 1 000076F2 OOOOOFDE 4 00076 PEA 000076F2 OOOOOFE4 4EB9000010 JSR 00001014 OOOOOFEA 588F ADDQ L 4 A7 OOOOOFEC 4A39000076 TST B 000076FE 00000FF2 6708 BEQ B 00000FFC OOOOOFF4 4EB9000019 JSR 0000197E OOOOOFFA 4E71 NOP 00000FFC 4EB900001A JSR 00001A62 00001002 4E71 NOP 00001004 60cc BRA B 00000FD2 STATUS cws main main c EN PEES isplay memory main mnemonic run trace step display modify break end ETc Display area Can show memory data values analyzer traces registers breakpoints status simulated I O global symbols local symbols pod commands the emulator s underlying Terminal Interface error log or display log You can use the UP ARROW DOWN ARROW PAGE UP and PAGE DOWN cursor keys to scroll or pag
2. 7 525 Chapter 15 Installation Installing Hardware 15 Install the top cover in reverse order of its removal but make sure that the side panels of the top cover are attached to the side clips on the frame 64700E09 SIDE CLIP 526 Chapter 15 Installation Installing Hardware Step 3 Install emulation memory modules on emulator probe 1 Remove plastic rivets that secure the plastic cover on the top of the emulator probe and remove the cover TO INSTALL RIVET PUSH DOWN ON RIVET HEAD TQ REMOVE RIVET PUSH UP ON CENTER SHAFT ADD PLASTIC WASHERS TO THESE TWO POSITIONS ONLY 527 Chapter 15 Installation Installing Hardware 2 Determine the placement of the emulation memory modules Three types of modules may be installed 256 Kbyte HP 64171A or HP 64172A 1 Mbyte HP 64171B or HP 64172B and 4 Mbyte HP 64173A Any type of module may be installed in either bank Memory in bank 0 is divided into 4 equal blocks that can be allocated by the memory mapper Memory in bank 1 is divided into 2 equal blocks If you have only one emulation memory module place it in bank 0 to give yourself greater flexibility when mapping address ranges to emulation memory If you have two memory modules and one i
3. Channel Logical Processor Remainder of Information for the Channel Type Type IP address for LAN connections 4 lan em68340 m68340 2E 49 s 43 serial em68340 m68340 myhost dev emcom23 OFF 9600 NONE XON 2 8 If you re currently running the X Window System the Graphical User Interface starts otherwise the Softkey Interface starts The status message shows that the default configuration file has been loaded If the command is not successful you will be given an error message and returned to the UNIX prompt Error messages are described in the Error Messages chapter To start the interface using the default configuration Use the emul700 d lt emul_name gt command In the emul700 d lt emul_name gt command the d option says to use the default configuration The d option is ignored if the interface is already running in another window or on another terminal 66 Chapter 3 Starting and Exiting HP 64700 Interfaces Starting the Emulator Analyzer Interface To run a command file on interface startup e Use the emul700 c lt cmd_file gt lt emul_name gt command You can cause command files to be run upon starting the interface by using the c lt cmd_file gt option to the emul700 command Refer to the Using Command Files section in the Entering Commands chapter for information on creating c
4. ie lt LINE gt disassemble_from_line_number D lt LINE gt K R lt LINE gt N all_cycles instructions_only dequeue mnemonic absolute mnemonic c t relative offset_by X EXPR lt RETURN gt on o DISPLAY diagram This command displays the contents of the trace buffer 360 Chapter 11 Emulator Analyzer Interface Commands display trace Captured information can be presented as absolute hexadecimal values or in mnemonic form The processor status values captured by the analyzer can be listed mnemonically or in hexadecimal or binary form Addresses captured by the analyzer are physical addresses The offset_by option subtracts the specified offset from the addresses of the executed instructions before listing the trace With an appropriate entry for offset each instruction in the listed trace will appear as it does in the assembled or compiled program listing The count parameter lists the current trace of time or state either relative to the previous event in the trace list or as an absolute count measured from the trigger event If time counts are currently selected the count parameter causes an absolute or relative time count to be listed If the current trace contains state counts a relative or absolute state count results The so
5. This command causes the emulator to leave user program execution and begin executing in the monitor The behavior of break depends on the state of the emulator running Break diverts the processor from execution of your program to the emulation monitor reset Break releases the processor from reset and diverts execution to the monitor running in monitor The break command does not perform any operation while the emulator is executing in the monitor See Also The reset run and step commands 341 Chapter 11 Emulator Analyzer Interface Commands cmb_execute See Also cmb_ execute LA cmb execute lt RETURN gt The cmb_execute command causes the emulator to emit an EXECUTE pulse on its rear panel Coordinated Measurement Bus CMB connector All emulators connected to the CMB including the one sending the CMB EXECUTE pulse and configured to respond to this signal will take part in the measurement The specify run and specify trace commands 342 Chapter 11 Emulator Analyzer Interface Commands copy copy EE noappend status lt RETURN gt HELP _ _ gt software_breakpoints Galobal_symbols local_symbols_in oe SYMB registers lt CLASS gt lt REGISTER gt trace F from_tine_number lt LINE gt thru_ti
6. stop_trace lt RETURN gt When the stop_trace command is entered the message Emulation trace halted is displayed 227 Chapter 7 Using the Emulation Analyzer The Basics of Starting Stopping and Displaying Traces Examples To display the trace Choose Trace Display or Display Trace Using the command line enter the display trace command You can display captured trace data with the display trace command The available options to the display trace command are described in the Modifying the Trace Display section later in this chapter To display the trace display trace lt RETURN gt Label Address Opcode or Status w Source Lines Base _ se symbols strepy8 8a9aa8 12 strcepys 88aGae 14 stropy8 000000 16 stropys 448aaa 18 stropyS 884aaa 1A strcocpy8 000000 18 streopys 4Gaaad 12 strcepys HGaae 14 stropy8 000000 16 stropys 4G8aaa 18 strepyo G4aaaa 1A strcocpy8 000000 14 strepys h4aaaG 12 strepys 844aae 14 stropy8 000000 16 stroepys 844aaa 18 1 03 zoo 04 03 prog strepy8 aa 18 or rc 1 03 Zzoooonr 04 03 prog strepy8 aa 18 or D rc 1 03 ZPoooonr AVVOVVAVDVOVNVGVAWVNVGS 04 03 prog strepyS aa 18 A N C B N N A N Cl B N N A N Cl B m The first column in the trace list contains the line number The trigger is always on line 0 The second column contains the address information associated with the trace states
7. dirSelect textColumns The default number of text dirSelect listVisibleItemCount columns in the popup is 50 dirSelectSub entries The default number of visible File Context Symbols symSelect textColumns lines in the popup is 12 symSelect listVisibleItemCount symSelectSub entries The entices wecounsene defined as a list of strings see Trace Trace Spec modtrace textColumns the following example modtrace listVisibleItemCount modtraceSub entries Up to 40 unique values are Entry Buffer recall textColumns saved in each of the recall recall listVisibleItemCount buffers as specified by the recallSub entries resource settings XcRecall maxDepth 40 and Command Line command recallCmd textColumns XcRecall onlyUnique True recall recallCmd list VisibleltemCount recallCmdSub entries Command Line pod simio recallKbd textColumns recall recallKbd listVisibleItemCount recallKbdSub entries 323 Chapter 10 Setting X Resources To set initial recall buffer values Examples To set the initial values for the directory selection dialog box when the Graphical User Interface is used with 68340 emulators modify the m68340 dirSelectSub entries resource m68340 dirSelectSub entries SHOME users projecti users project2 68340 Refer to the previous To modify the Graphical User Interface resources section fo
8. 537 Chapter 15 Installation Installing HP 9000 Software Installing HP 9000 Software This section shows you how to install the Graphical User Interface on HP 9000 workstations These instruction also tell you how not to install the Graphical User Interface if you want to use just the conventional Softkey Interface This section shows you how to 1 Install the software from the media 2 Verify the software installation 3 Start the X server and the Motif Window Manager mwm or start HP VUE 4 Set the necessary environment variables Step 1 Install the software from the media The tape that contains the Graphical User Interface software may contain several products Usually you will want to install all of the products on the tape However to save disk space or for other reasons you can choose to install selected filesets If you plan on using the Softkey Interface instead of the Graphical User Interface you can save about 3 5 megabytes of disk space by not installing the XUI suffixed filesets in the 64700 Operating Environment and lt processor type gt Emulation Tools partitions Also if you choose not to install the Graphical User Interface you will not have to use a special command line option to start the Softkey Interface Refer to the information on updating HP UX in your HP UX documentation for instructions on viewing partitions and filesets and marking filesets that should not be loaded The follo
9. int port_one main int port_value port_ptr port_one port_value 10 process_port port_ptr port_value end main File system projectl porthand c include utils c void process_port int port_num int port_data static int i static int i2 for i 0 i lt 64 i i2 Sh 23 port_num port_data i2 delay static int i i 3 port_data port_data i end of process_port File system project1 utils c delay int ipa int waste_time for i 0 i lt 256000 i for j 0 j lt 256000 j waste_time 0 end delay 415 Chapter 11 Emulator Analyzer Interface Commands SYMB The symbol tree as built by SRU might appear as follows depending on the object module format and compiler used users dave control c filename system project1 porthand c filename process port procedure system project1 utils c filename TEX TRANGE procspecial EXIT procspecial ENTRY TEXTRANGE procspecial procspecial ENTRY procspeciaol EXIT procspecial BLOCK _1 procedure i Note that SRU does not build tree nodes for variables that are dynamically allocated on the stack at run time such as i and j within the delay procedure 416 Chapter 11 Emulator Analyzer Interface Commands SYMB SRU has no way of knowing where these
10. 8 Making Software Performance Measurements Activity Performance Measurements 269 To set up the trace command for activity measurements 271 To initialize activity performance measurements 272 To interpret activity measurement reports 276 Duration Performance Measurements 284 To set up the trace command for duration measurements 285 To initialize duration performance measurements 287 To interpret duration measurement reports 289 Running Measurements and Creating Reports 293 To run performance measurements 293 To end performance measurements 294 To create a performance measurement report 295 9 Making Coordinated Measurements Setting Up for Coordinated Measurements 301 To connect the Coordinated Measurement Bus CMB 301 To connect to the rear panel BNC 303 Starting Stopping Multiple Emulators 305 To enable synchronous measurements 305 To start synchronous measurements 306 To disable synchronous measurements 306 Using Trigger Signals 307 To drive the emulation analyzer trigger signal to the CMB 309 To drive the emulation analyzer trigger signal to the BNC connector 310 To break emulator execution on signal from CMB 310 To break emulator execution on signal from BNC 311 To arm the emulation analyzer on signal from CMB 311 To arm the emulation analyzer on signal from BNC 312 15 Contents 10 Part 3 11 Setting X Resources To modify the Graphical User Interface resources 316 To use customized scheme f
11. A one glance overview of the product and a few task instructions to help you get comfortable 21 Part 1 22 Getting Started Chapter 1 Getting Started Display area Status line Command line The Emulator Analyzer Interface At a Glance When an X Window System that supports OSF Motif interfaces is running on the host computer the emulator analyzer interface is the Graphical User Interface which provides pull down and pop up menus point and click setting of breakpoints cut and paste on line help customizable action keys and pop up recall buffers etc The emulator analyzer interface can also be the Softkey Interface which is provided for several types of terminals terminal emulators and bitmapped displays When using the Softkey Interface commands are entered from the keyboard The Softkey Interface
12. Step 2 Verify the software installation A number of new filesets were installed on your system during the software installation process This and following steps assume that you chose to load the Graphical User Interface filesets You can use this step to further verify that the filesets necessary to successfully start the Graphical User Interface have been loaded and that customize scripts have run correctly Of course the update process gives you mechanisms for verifying installation but these checks can help to double check the install process Verify the existence of the HP64_Softkey file in the usr lib X11 app defaults subdirectory by entering ls usr lib X11 app defaults HP64_Softkey at the HP UX prompt Finding this file verifies that you loaded the correct fileset and also verifies that the customize scripts executed because this file is created from other files during the customize process Examine usr lib X11 app defaults HP64_Softkey near the end of the file to confirm that there are resources specific to your emulator Near the end of the file there will be resource strings that contain references to specific emulators For example if you installed the Graphical User Interface for the 68340 emulator resource name strings will have m68340 embedded in them After you have verified the software installation you must start the X server and an X window manager if you are not currently running an X server If you plan to
13. Step 3 Run from the transfer address The transfer address is the entry address defined by the software development tools and included with the program s symbol information e Click on the Run Xfer til action key Or using the command line enter run from transfer_address until main lt RETURN gt Memory sp imnemonic file main module main c address label data 31 extern void update_system update system variables 92 extern void interrupt_sim simulate an interrupt extern void do_sort sets up ascii array and calls maint init_system proc_spec_init while true update_system num_checkst interrupt_sim amp num_checks if graph graph_data proc_specific STATUS N68340 Running in monitor Software break 900000f cOEsp Notice the message Software break lt address gt is displayed on the status line and that the emulator is Running in monitor you may have to click the select mouse button to remove temporary messages from the status line When you run until an address a breakpoint is set at the address before the program is run Notice the highlighted bar on the screen it shows the current program counter 34 Chapter 1 Getting Started Step 4 Step high level source lines Step 4 Step high level source lines You can step through the program by high level source lines The emulator executes as many instructions as are associated with the high le
14. Step 4 Plug the 68340 PGA emulator probe into the target system CAUTION Possible Damage to the Emulator Probe The emulator probe is provided with a pin extender Do not use the probe without a pin extender installed Replacing a broken pin extender is much less expensive than replacing the emulator probe The use of more than one pin extender is discouraged unless it is necessary for mechanical clearance reasons because pin extenders cause signal quality degradation 1 Install the emulator probe into the target system socket Make sure that pin 1 of the connector aligns with pin of the socket Damage to the emulator will result if the probe is incorrectly installed 68340 EMULATOR PROBE TARGET SYSTEM PIN A1 PGA SOCKET 60 Chapter 2 Plugging into a Target System Step 5 Turn ON power Step 5 Turn ON power 1 Turn emulator power ON n 2 Turn target system power ON 61 62 Starting and Exiting HP 64700 Interfaces Starting and Exiting HP 64700 Interfaces You can use several types of interfaces to the same emulator at the same time to give yourself different views into the target system The strength of the emulator analyzer interface is that it lets you perform the real time analysis measurements that are helpful when integrating hardware and software The C debugger interface which is a s
15. To display the trace with addresses offset e Use the offset_by option to the display trace command The offset_by trace display option allows you to cause the address information in the trace display to be offset by the amount specified The offset value is subtracted from the instruction s physical address to yield the address that is displayed If code gets relocated and therefore makes symbolic information obsolete you can use the offset_by option to change the address information so that it again agrees with the symbolic information You can also specify an offset to cause the listed addresses to match the addresses in compiler or assembler listings Examples To display the trace with addresses offset by 154EH display trace offset_by 154eh lt RETURN gt race List Of Ffset 154E Label Address Opcode or Status time count Base __hex o mnemonic O_o ite 466 e 8080 LINK W AB 000 47 28 067 Gaaegea2e2 0008 supr prgm word rd ds16 47 96 668 G G11A36 8881 supr data long wr ds16 48 68 069 BB11A35 2F8C supr data word wr ds16 49 40 476 Gaaaaeea4 MOVEA L 00007156 AB 58 12 071 BG886886 4808 supr prgm word rd ds16 54 84 072 Gbeabeas 8 7156 supr prgm word rd ds16 51 56 473 G aaeaGaGA MOVEQ agaaaaaa 01 474 aaaaaeac NOP 475 G 8G8GE MOVE L 01 08 076 880016 ADD L 04 08 47 B l ADO L 01 08 478 614 LSL L 2 08 479 BOBBIE MOVE W 900841 00 AB DA L 060 8888815 8841 supr prgm
16. e HP 64173A 4 Mbyte Memory Modules 0 wait state emulation memory through 22 MHz wait state above 22 MHz The 68340 processor is programmed for the correct number of wait states by user code If memory modules are mixed the performance characteristics of the slower module should be used Emulation memory is made available to the mapper in blocks When you map an address range to emulation memory at least one block is assigned to the range When a block of emulation memory is assigned to a range it is no longer available even though part of the block may be unused Emulation memory in bank 0 of the emulator probe is divided into 4 equal blocks and memory in bank 1 is divided into 2 equal blocks The 4 Kbyte block of dual port emulation memory is 1 block When you map ranges of emulation memory blocks are allocated so as to leave the greatest amount of emulation memory available For example if you map the range 0 through OFFH as emulation memory the 4 Kbyte block of dual port memory is used if possible if that block has already been used the next smallest available block is used 133 Chapter 5 Configuring the Emulator Mapping Memory You should map all memory ranges used by your programs before loading programs into memory Using Emulation Memory to Substitute for 8 Bit Memory Emulation memory is 16 bit wide memory However you can use emulation memory to substitute for 8 bit memory by using one of the chip se
17. f lt file gt Produce a report based on the information contained in lt file gt instead of the information contained in perf out For example the following commands save the current performance measurement information in a file called perf1 out and produce a histogram showing only the program activity occupied by the functions and variables mv perf out perfl out lt RETURN gt perf32 hpf perfl out lt RETURN gt Options h s p and m affect the contents of reports generated for activity measurements These options have no effect on the contents of reports generated for duration time interval measurements 295 Chapter 8 Making Software Performance Measurements Running Measurements and Creating Reports Examples Now to generate a report from the perf out file type the following on the command line to fork a shell and run the perf32 utility perf32 more 296 Making Coordinated Measurements 297 Making Coordinated Measurements When HP 64700 Card Cages are connected together via the Coordinated Measurement Bus CMB you can start and stop up to 32 emulators at the same time You can use the analyzer in one HP 64700 to arm that is activate the analyzers in other HP 64700 Card Cages or to cause emulator execution in other HP 64700 Card Cages to break into the monitor You can use the HP 64700 s BNC connector labeled TRIGGER IN OUT on the lower left corner of the HP 64700 r
18. lt type gt Display Trace display trace Display Registers display registers Display Breakpoints display software_breakpoints Display Status display status Display Simulated IO display simulated_io Display Global Symbols display global_symbols Display Local Symbols display local_symbols_in S YMB Display Pod Commands display pod_command Display Error Log display error_log Display Event Log display event_log Modify Emulator Config modify configuration Modify Memory modify memory Modify Memory at modify memory EXPR Modify Register modify register 334 Chapter 11 Emulator Analyzer Interface Commands Pulldown Command Line Execution Run from PC Execution Run from Execution Run from Transfer Address Execution Run from Reset Execution Run until Execution Step Source from PC Execution Step Source from Execution Step Source from Transfer Address Execution Step Instruction from PC Execution Step Instruction from Execution Step Instruction from Transfer Address run run from EXPR run from transfer_address run from reset run until EXPR step source step source from EXPR step source from transfer_address step step from EXPR step from transfer_address Execution Break break Execution Reset reset Breakpoints Display display software_breakpoints Breakpoints Enable modify software_br
19. BNC lt lt gt gt CMBT lt lt gt gt CMBT lt lt gt gt Emulator lt lt Emulator lt lt Analyzer Analyzer lt lt gt gt NOTES 1 The connections marked are set up here in configuration 2 drive gt gt receive lt lt The display won t change however This display illustrates the possible connections between the internal lines trig and trig2 and the emulator analyzer and external devices Notice that the analyzer always drives trig and the emulator always receives trig This provides for the break_on_trigger syntax of the trace command You can use the trig or trig2 line to make a connection between the analyzer and the CMB connector or BNC connector so that when the analyzer finds its trigger condition a trigger signal is driven on the HP 64700 s Coordinated Measurement Bus CMB or BNC connector You can use the trig or trig2 line to make a connection between the emulator break input and the CMB connector BNC connector or analyzer so that program 307 Chapter 9 Making Coordinated Measurements Using Trigger Signals execution can break when a trigger signal is received from the CMB BNC or analyzer You can use the trig2 line to make a connection between the analyzer and the CMB connector or BNC connector so that the analyzer can be armed that is enabled when a trigger signal is received from the CMB or BNC connector You c
20. EXPR The value following this softkey is searched for on the lines that monitor emulation processor signals other than the address and data lines This prompts you to enter a status value in the command line Status values can be entered from softkeys or typed into the keyboard Numeric values may be entered using symbols operators and parentheses to specify a status value See the EXPR syntax diagram Refer to the Qualifying Trigger and Store Conditions section in the Using the Emulation Analyzer chapter for a list of the predefined values that can be assigned as status state qualifiers This indicates that the following address expression is the upper address in a range trace only address mod_name read_input lt RETURN gt trace only address range mod_name read_input thru output lt RETURN gt trace only address range mod_name clear thru read_input lt RETURN gt 392 Chapter 11 Emulator Analyzer Interface Commands QUALIFIER trace before status write lt RETURN gt trace about address 1000H status write lt RETURN gt See Also The trace command 393 Chapter 11 Emulator Analyzer Interface Commands reset See Also reset This command suspends target system operation and reestablishes initial emulator operating parameters such as reloading control registers The reset signal is latched when the reset command is executed and released by either the run or break
21. OE40H lt RETURN gt modify software_breakpoints clear lt RETURN gt modify software_breakpoints set lt RETURN gt See Also The copy display load store commands 383 Chapter 11 Emulator Analyzer Interface Commands performance_measurement_end Examples See Also performance_measurement_end 1 performance_measurement_end lt RETURN gt This command stores data previously generated by the performance_measurement_run command current working directory The file named perf out is overwritten each in a file named perf out in the time this command is executed Current measurement data existing in the emulation system is not altered by this command performance_measurement_end lt R ETURN gt The performance_measurement_initialize and performance_measurement_run commands Refer to the Making Software Performance Measurements chapter for examples of performance measurement specification an d use 384 Chapter 11 Emulator Analyzer Interface Commands performance_measurement_initialize performance_measurement_initialize performance_measurement_initialize 7 lt RETURN gt ae restore N lt FILED giobal_symbols local symbols_ in SYMB HC activity This command sets up performance measurements The emulation system will verify whet
22. Step count must be 1 through 999 Cause You tried to use a step count greater than 999 Action Use a step count less than 1000 Symbols not accessible symbol database not loaded Cause You specified a trace list with values expressed using symbols defined in the source code modules such as source on and the database file has not been loaded into emulation Example display trace symbols on Timeout in emul700dmn communication Cause The host system could not start the emulation session because the HP 64700 emulator process ran out of time before the emulator could start Action You must press end_release_system to exit this emulation session completely then start a new session Make sure the host system is operating properly that all Softkey Interface software has been loaded correctly and the data communication switch settings on the emulator rear panel match the settings in the usr hp64000 etc 64700tab net or 64700tab file Trace file not found Cause You tried to load trace data file that does not exist Action Find the correct name and path of the trace data file and try again 448 Chapter 12 Error Messages Graphical Softkey Interface Messages Unnumbered Unexpected message from emul700dmn Cause The host system could not start the emulation session because of an unexpected message from the HP 64700 emulator process command Action You must press end_release_system to exit this emulation session compl
23. When you count states the counter is incremented each time the state is captured not necessarily stored by the analyzer When a state is counted up to 512 states can be stored in the trace When you turn OFF counting up to 1024 states can be stored in the trace Suppose you want to know how many loops of the program occur between calls of the do_sort function To change the count qualifier to count a state that occurs once for each loop of the program enter trace only do_sort counting state main main c line 102 lt RETURN gt set source off lt RETURN gt Opcode or Status state count symbols mnemonic w symbols relative write_h aaa22 CMP L AG D4 pro main do_sort incomplete instr 4E56 pro main do_sort incomplete instr 4E56 pro main do_sort incomplete instr 4E56 pro main do_sort incomplete instr 4E56 pro main do_sort incomplete instr 4E56 pro main do_sort incomplete instr 4E56 pro main do_sort incomplete instr 4E56 pro main do_sort incomplete instr 4E56 pro main do_sort incomplete instr 4E56 pro main do_sort incomplete instr 4E56 7 pro main do_sort incomplete instr 4E56 7 pro main do_sort incomplete instr 4E56 7 pro main do_sort incomplete instr 4E56 7 7 pro main do_sort incomplete instr 4E56 pro main do_sort incomplete instr 4E56 AAAHAAAAAADAAADAAe 24
24. call your HP 64000 representative File could not be opened Cause You tried to store or load trace data to a file with incorrect permission Or the analyzer could not find the file you specified or else there were already too many files open when you entered your command Action Check the directory and file for correct read and write permission Specify a file that is accessible to the analyzer Close the other files that are presently open File perf out does not exist Cause You tried to execute the restore command to continue a previous software performance measurement and the SPMT software found that no performance_measurement_end command was previously executed to create a file from which restore could be performed Action Execute anew SPMT measurement 438 Chapter 12 Error Messages Graphical Softkey Interface Messages Unnumbered File perf out not generated by measurement software Cause The file named perf out exists in the current directory but it was not created by the performance_measurement_end command Action Rename the old perf out file or move it to another directory HP64700 I O channel semaphore failure lt string gt Cause Semaphore ipc facility not installed Action Reconfigure the kernel to add ipc facility HP 64700 I O error communications timeout Cause This is a communication failure Action Check power to the emulator and check that all cables are connected properly
25. of the socket The target system MUST drive MODCK low during reset to enable the 68340 to use the EXTAL signal as the clock source Pin 1 of Clock Jumper Socket 64751E01 57 Chapter 2 Plugging into a Target System Step 3 Select the emulator clock source 3 Replace the plastic cover and insert new plastic rivets supplied with the emulator to secure the cover TO INSTALL RIVET PUSH DOWN ON RIVET HEAD TO REMOVE RIVET PUSH UP ON CENTER SHAFT ADD PLASTIC WASHERS TO THESE TWO POSITIONS ONLY 58 Chapter 2 Plugging into a Target System Step 3 Select the emulator clock source You can also replace the jumper with a prototyping socket on which a crystal and any capacitors or tank circuitry are assembled One such prototyping socket is part number 20314 36 455 from Electronic Molding Corp 96 Mill Street Woonsocket RI The figure below shows the connections that are made to the socket W Emulat sy Do Not Connect Anything aN se jee 5 to This Pin EXTAL Side of Emulator _ 7 ai XTAL Side of Emulator 32 768 KHz Crystal 32768 KHz Crystal 68340 EXTAL 3 2 m 68340 XTAL Target EXTAL 4 1 F Target XTAL NC 5 am NC NC 6 9 NC NC 7 8 Emulator 5v 6475801 59 Chapter 2 Plugging into a Target System Step 4 Plug the 68340 PGA emulator probe into the target system
26. run This option specifies that the emulator will run from either an expression or from the transfer address when a CMB EXECUTE signal is received TRACE This option specifies that a trace measurement will be taken when a CMB EXECUTE signal is received until Specifies an address where program execution is to stop The emulator will set a software breakpoint at this address and stop execution of your program when it reaches this address and enter the monitor Examples specify run from START lt RETURN gt specify trace after address 1234H lt RETURN gt See Also The cmb_execute command 405 Chapter 11 Emulator Analyzer Interface Commands step step C step lt RETURN gt silently lt NUMBER gt tei A source from 4 EXPR G FCODE transfer_address The step command allows sequential analysis of program instructions by causing the emulation processor to execute a specified number of assembly instructions or source lines You can display the contents of the processor registers trace memory and emulation or target memory after each step command Source line stepping is implemented by single stepping assembly instructions until the next PC is beyond the address range of the current source line When attempting source line stepping on assembly code with no associated source line stepping will complete when a source line is found Therefore steppi
27. 25 Time Percent Rel 5 update_system Address Range 1592H thru Memory Activity State Percent Rel 6 Mean 25 Time Percent Rel 6 Program Activity State Percent Rel Ds Mean 25 Time Percent Rel Se combsort Address Range 1244H thru Memory Activity State Percent Rel 2 Mean 8 Time Percent Rel 2 Program Activity State Percent Rel 3 Mean 16 Time Percent Rel Si do_sort Address Range 1442H thru Memory Activity State Percent Rel 0 Mean 2 Time Percent Rel 0 Program Activity State Percent Rel 0 Mean 3 Time Percent Rel 0 gen_ascii_data Address Range 1108H thru Memory Activity State Percent Rel 0 Mean 1 Time Percent Rel 0 Program Activity State Percent Rel 0 Mean 2 Time Percent Rel 0 60 Sdv 26 Abs 72 Abs 60 Sdv 71 Abs 164CH 26 A 60 Sdv 26 Abs 73 Abs 65 Sdv 73 Abs 143AH 08 A 50 Sdv 08 Abs 59 Abs 05 Sdv 58 Abs 14E0H 62 Abs 55 Sdv 63 Abs 77 Abs 45 Sdv 78 Abs 123CH 39 Abs 60 Sdv 40 Abs 58 Abs 60 Sdv 59 Abs OS DS ono oOo owo owo 249 VII 00 49 99 00 92 01 48 ROO 66 92 66 L3 whe 50 23 50 wet 68 fetal 18 32 zol 52 oA 280 Chapter 8 Making Software Performance Measurements Activity Performance Measurements graph_data Address Range 197EH thru 1A36H Memory Activity State Percent Rel 0 00 Abs 0 00 Mean 0 00 Sdv 0 00 Time Percent
28. 88881562 0010111111611181 720 8888 1564 0010111111811181 720 88081566 0010111111811181 720 44861568 0010111111011181 720 255 Chapter 7 Using the Emulation Analyzer Modifying the Trace Display To display the trace in mnemonic format e Use the mnemonic option to the display trace command The mnemonic trace display option allows you to display the trace information in mnemonic format that is opcodes and status The default trace display is in mnemonic format Examples To display the trace in mnemonic format display trace mnemonic lt RETURN gt Label Address Opcode or Status time count 154E LINK W AB aa08 724 84861556 4848 supr pram word rd ds16 680 4612F84 4881 supr data long wr ds16 720 6612F86 2F8C supr data word wr ds16 720 g1552 MOVEA L 8 007156 AG 720 00001554 8888 supr prgm word rd ds16 720 8 1556 7156 supr prgm word rd ds16 720 00001558 MOVEQ gaaaGaa 01 724 155A NOP 720 agiss MOVE L 01 08 720 g155E ADD L 04 08 720 9 156 ADD L 01 08 680 1562 LSL L 2 DO 720 861564 MOVE W 0041 00 AB DA L 720 G881566 0041 supr prgm word ds16 720 G 61566 4688 supr prgm word ds16 720 256 Chapter 7 Using the Emulation Analyzer Modifying the Trace Display To display the trace with high level source lines e Use the set source command To include high level source lines in the trace display you must use the set co
29. Additionally the graphical interface makes the softkey labels pushbuttons so commands may be entered using the mouse If you are using the Softkey Interface using the command line with the keyboard is the only way to enter commands This section describes how to e Turn the command line off on e Enter commands e Edit commands e Recall commands e Display the help window To turn the command line on or off To turn the command line on or off using the pulldown menu choose Settings gt Command Line To turn the command line on or off using the status line popup menu position the mouse pointer within the status line area press and hold the select mouse button and choose Command Line Off from the menu To turn the command line off using the command line entry area popup menu position the mouse pointer within the entry area press and hold the select mouse button and choose Command Line Off from the menu Turns display of the command line area on or off On means that the command line is displayed and you can use the softkey label pushbuttons the command return and recall pushbuttons and the cursor pushbuttons for command line editing 90 Chapter 4 Entering Commands Using the Command Line with the Mouse Off means the command line is not displayed and you use only the pulldown menus and the action keys to control the interface The command line area begins just below the status line and continues to th
30. CF_CSIMASK Address Mask CS1 CF_CS1ADDR Base Address CS1 CF_CS2MASK Address Mask CS2 CF_CS2ADDR Base Address CS2 CF_CS3MASK Address Mask CS3 CF_CS3ADDR Base Address CS3 195 Chapter 6 Using the Emulator Displaying and Modifying Registers Examples To display register contents Choose Display Registers Using the command line enter the display registers command When displaying registers you can display classes of registers and individual registers The least significant bit of the emulation processor s MBAR register must be a 1 which means the MBAR contents are valid before you can display or modify registers in the SIM DMA1 DMA2 SERIAL TIMER1 or TIMER2 register classes The contents of write only registers cannot be displayed To display the basic register contents display registers lt RETURN gt To display the SIM module configuration register modify register SIM MBAR to 100001h lt RETURN gt display registers SIM SIM_MCR lt RETURN gt To display the contents of the emulator configuration registers CF_SIM class display registers CF_SIM lt RETURN gt 196 Chapter 6 Using the Emulator Displaying and Modifying Registers To modify register contents e Choose Modify Registers and use the dialog box to name the register and specify its value Clicking the Recall pushbutton lets you select register names and values from predefined or pre
31. Cause An activity other than a step command caused the emulator to break This could include any of the break conditions or a lt CTRL gt c break Trace error during CMB execute Cause System failure Action Run performance verification Terminal Interface py command CMB execute run started Cause This status message is displayed when you are making coordinated measurements The CMB EXECUTE pulse has been received the emulation processor started running at the address specified by the specify run command Action None information only Run failed during CMB execute Cause System failure or target condition Action Run performance verification Terminal Interface py command and check target system Target memory access failed Cause This message is displayed if the emulator was unable to perform the requested operation on memory mapped to the target system 472 Chapter 12 Error Messages Terminal Interface Messages Action In most cases the problem results from the emulator s inability to break to the monitor to perform the operation See message 608 702 Emulation memory access failed Cause System failure Action Run performance verification Terminal Interface py command 707 Request access to guarded memory s Cause The address or address range specified in the command included addresses within a range mapped as guarded memory When the emulator attempts to access these during command process
32. Chapter 11 Emulator Analyzer Interface Commands modify modify C modify D Contiguration This command allows you to observe or change information specific to the emulator Ckeyboard_to_simio FCODE EXPR bytes words to lt EXPR gt L to lt REAL gt 2 d string lt to lt STRING gt pCa yy eet to EXPR lt CLASS gt Goftware_breakpoinis lt set lt EXPR gt FCODE yy lt EXPR gt O FCODE clear i MHC enable Eeg disable lt RETURN gt 378 bytes lt CLASS gt clear configuration disable enable EXPR Chapter 11 Emulator Analyzer Interface Commands modify The modify command is used to e Modify contents of memory as integers strings or real numbers e Modify the contents of the processor registers e View or edit the current emulation configuration e Modify the software breakpoints table The following pages contain detailed information about the various modify syntax diagrams The parameters are as follows Modify memory in byte values Specifies a particular class of the emulator registers Refer to the Accessing Registers section in the Using the Emulator chapter for a list of the register nam
33. FC SIZE tCHAZx 0 40 0 40 ns RMC High Impedance 8 CLKOUT High to Address FC SIZE RMC tcuazn 0 0 ns Invalid 9 CLKOUT Low to AS DS tcrsa 3 20 0 23 ns CS IACK 3 20 3 20 ns IFETCH IPIPE Asserted 3 2208 ns 9A AS to DS or CS Asserted Read tstsa 6 6 8 8 ns 11 Address FC SIZE RMC Valid to AS CS tavsa 10 10 ns and DS Read Asserted 12 CLKOUT Low to AS DS tets 3 20 0 23 ns CS IACK 3 20 3 20 ns IFETCH IPIPE Negated 3 20 ns 13 AS DS CS IACK Negated to Address FC tSNAI 10 10 ns SIZE Invalid Address Hold 14 AS CS and DS Read Width Asserted twa 70 70 ns 14A DS Width Asserted Write tswaw 30 30 ns 14B AS CS IACK and DS READ Width tswow 30 30 ns Asserted Sync Cycle 15 AS DS CS Width Negated tsN 30 30 ns 481 Chapter 13 Specifications and Characteristics Emulator Specifications and Characteristics AC Electrical Specifications 64751 66508 and higher active probe board numbers Read and Write Cycles Vcc 5 0 Vdc 5 GND 0 Vdc Ta TL to Tp MC68340 25 16 MHz HP 64751 Num Characteristic Symbol Min Max Min Max Unit 16 CLKOUT High to AS DS tcusz 60 O 5teyct30 ns R W High Impedance 60 40 ns 17 AS DS CS Negated to R W High t
34. KKK KKK get_targets G2 Gg AAT update_system 6 26 combsort 2 08 Graph of Program Activity relative state percents gt 1 set_outputs 28 61 KKKKKKKKKKKKKKK strcpy8 26 39 RRR RR RR KK interrupt_sim 17 17 RRR RRR KKK write_hdwr 11 44 kk KKKK get_targets 5 72 update_system 5 73 kk combsort SO AK Graph of Program Activity relative time percents gt 1 set_outputs 28 57 RR KK KK KK strcpy8 26 47 RRR RR KK interrupt_sim 17 14 KR RK KK KKK write_hdwr 11 43 x x get_targets Be PLS i Ae update_system 5313S EEX combsort S208 AS 282 Chapter 8 Making Software Performance Measurements Activity Performance Measurements Summary Information for 20 traces Memory Activity State count Relative count 8177 Mean sample 31 45 Mean Standard Dv 75 74 95 Confidence 112 76 Error tolerance Time count Relative Time Us 5838 56 Program Activity State count Relative count 8948 Mean sample 34 42 Mean Standard Dv 80 7 95 Confidence 109 90 Error tolerance Time count Relative Time Us 6396 40 Absolute Totals Absolute count state 10240 Absolute count time Us 7325 88 The measurements for each label are printed in descending order according to the amount of activity You can see that the set_outputs function has the most activity Also you can see that no activity is recorded for several of the functions The histogram portion of the report compares the activity in the functions that a
35. Or using the command line enter run until main main c line 98 lt RETURN gt After the command has executed notice the highlighted bar indicates the program counter has moved to the specified source line 37 Chapter 1 Getting Started Step 7 Display data values Step 7 Display data values 1 Position the mouse pointer over num_checks in the source line that reads num_checks and click the paste mouse button notice num_checks is cut and pasted into the entry buffer 2 Click on the Disp Var action key Or using the command line enter display data num_checks int32 lt RETURN gt Data update address label type BA0AFEF2 _num_checks int32 The num_checks variable is added to the data values display and its value is displayed as a 32 bit integer 38 Chapter 1 Getting Started Step 8 Display registers Step 8 Display registers You can display the contents of the processor registers e Choose Display Registers gt BASIC Or using the command line enter display registers lt RETURN gt Registers Next PC 88GFCARsp PC FCA STATUS 2744 lt s z gt USP a 88G SSP aaal2ra4 08 0 888808208 Gageedes Baeese2es Gaeae71C BaeGG146 Baaa2AFS Beee46Fs aaaa 7a6 AG A 6007156 FFFFFFFF 00007726 G a as 28 Bae8877ES GAGeF 156 Baeler34 aaalerg4 VBR aaeeeeea SFC A DFC 48 39 Chapter 1 Getting Started Step 9 Step assembly level instruc
36. The following general safety precautions must be observed during all phases of operation service and repair of this instrument Failure to comply with these precautions or with specific warnings elsewhere in this manual violates safety standards of design manufacture and intended use of the instrument Hewlett Packard Company assumes no liability for the customer s failure to comply with these requirements Ground The Instrument To minimize shock hazard the instrument chassis and cabinet must be connected to an electrical ground The instrument is equipped with a three conductor ac power cable The power cable must either be plugged into an approved three contact electrical outlet or used with a three contact to two contact adapter with the grounding wire green firmly connected to an electrical ground safety ground at the power outlet The power jack and mating plug of the power cable meet International Electrotechnical Commission IEC safety standards Do Not Operate In An Explosive Atmosphere Do not operate the instrument in the presence of flammable gases or fumes Operation of any electrical instrument in such an environment constitutes a definite safety hazard Keep Away From Live Circuits Operating personnel must not remove instrument covers Component replacement and internal adjustments must be made by qualified maintenance personnel Do not replace components with the power cable connected Under certain conditions dan
37. This represents an algebraic or logical operand and may be any of the following in order of precedence mod modulo x multiplication division amp logical AND addition subtraction logical OR SYMB This allows you to define symbolic information for an address range of addresses or a file See the SYMB syntax pages and the Symbolic Retrieval Utilities User s Guide for more information on symbols end This displays the last location where the symbol information may be located For example if a particular symbol is associated with a range of addresses end will represent the last address in that range start This displays first memory location where the symbol you specify may be located For example if a particular symbol is associated with a range of addresses start will represent the first address in that range lt UNARY gt This defines either the algebraic negation minus sign or the logical negation NOT sign Parentheses may be used in expressions to enclose numbers For every opening parenthesis a closing parenthesis must exist Note that when C appears on the right side of the status line a valid expression exists The NORMAL key can be accessed at any time but is only valid when C is on the command line Note that when a thru softkey has been entered a lt EXPR gt prompt appears This saves you from tedious repeated entry of long symbols and expressions For example disp_b
38. View the local Procedure name Address range __ Segment bol iated B88 2CA6 BAAAZCDE libe symbols associate i OBBBABSB BOABABID env with the highlighted update_system annn prog wait_for_io env symbol by choosing irite _ ee env this menu it ni write _hdwr Display Local Symbols ica Display Parent Symbols Static symbols Symbol name Cut Full Symbol Name Segment AS eens stack JSR_ENTRY Edit File Defining Symbol L_1_I0_check_loop 8888883E L_2_10_exit_loop a88884A MONI TOR_MESSAGE agasi74 00081 TopOf Heap 440 16FFE TopOf Stack 44613088 STATUS M68340 Running in monitor Emulation trace complete 166 Chapter 6 Using the Emulator Using Symbols Using the command line To display local symbols in a module display local_symbols_in update_sys lt RETURN gt Symbols in update_sys module Procedure symbols Procedure name Address range Segment get_targets 46661654 G G G1600 prog graph_data 00001197E GBBG1A37 prog read_conditions 4G16E4 84801773 prog save_points 968016892 88801977 prog set_outputs 60177A GB88188B prog update_system 86661592 8881640 prog write_hdwr 44401812 44801886 prog Filename symbols Fi lename update_sys c To display local symbols in a procedure display local_symbols_in update_sys save_points lt RETURN gt Symbols in update_sys module save_points procedure Procedure special symbols Procedure special name Address range __
39. When using a foreground monitor the supervisor stack pointer must be set to an address in emulation or target system RAM in order for the emulator to transition into the run state to step or to perform other functions after emulation reset The Reset value configuration questions set the initial SSP and PC values after emulation reset Upon the transition from emulation reset into the emulation monitor the supervisor stack pointer register and the program counter are set to the values specified which must be 32 bit hexadecimal even addresses If arun from reset command is given this configuration item has no affect and the initial supervisor stack pointer and program counter will be retrieved from reset vector in the vector table When using the background monitor the initial values set in response to the Reset value configuration questions are also used to set up the SSP and PC after emulation reset however this is not necessary for proper emulator operation If a target system reset occurs while running in the background monitor the supervisor stack pointer and program counter are unaffected 148 Chapter 5 Configuring the Emulator Configuring the Emulator Pod To specify the user memory access size Answer the User memory access size question When accessing target system memory locations or single port emulation memory locations the access mode specifies the type of microprocessor cycles that are use
40. for the monitor program You must re map other memory ranges before loading user programs Modifying the TRACE Exception Vector In order for single stepping to operate with the foreground monitor the trace vector in the target system s exception table VBR plus 24H must point to the TRACE_ENTRY address in the monitor This address is equal to the monitor s base address plus 800H in the default foreground monitor 128 10 11 12 13 14 Chapter 5 Configuring the Emulator Selecting the Emulation Monitor To use a custom foreground monitor program Edit the monitor program source file to define its base address Assemble and link the monitor program Access the configuration questions Answer yes to the Modify memory configuration question Answer user_foreground to the Monitor type question Answer yes to the Reset map change of monitor type requires map reset question Enter the name of the monitor program absolute file in response to the Monitor filename question Enter the base address of the monitor in response to the Monitor s base address question Answer the Enable DSACK interlocking on monitor addresses question Re map memory see the following section on Mapping Memory Answer yes to the Modify emulator pod configuration question Answer the Reset value for Supervisor Stack Pointer question Answer the Reset value for Program Counter questi
41. line popup menu To clear the command line position the mouse pointer within the Command Line entry area press and hold the select mouse button until the Command Line popup menu appears choose Clear Entire Line from the menu To clear the command line from the cursor position to the end of the line position the mouse pointer at the place where you want the clear to end to start press and hold the select mouse button until the Command Line popup menu appears choose Clear to End of Line from the menu To position the cursor and insert characters at the cursor location position the mouse pointer in a non text area of the command line entry area press and hold the select mouse button to display the Command Line popup menu choose Position Cursor Insert Mode from the menu type the characters to be inserted To replace characters at the current cursor location position the mouse pointer in a non text area of the command line entry area press and hold the select mouse button to display the Command Line popup menu choose Position Cursor Replace Mode from the menu type the characters to be inserted To position the cursor and replace characters at the cursor location position the mouse pointer in a non text area of the command line entry area press and hold the select mouse button to display the Command Line popup menu choose Position Cursor Replace Mode from the menu type the characters to be inserted When the cursor arrives at th
42. lt RETURN gt set source off lt RETURN gt 247 Chapter 7 Using the Emulation Analyzer Using the Sequencer race List Opcode or Status time count upda set_outputs supr prgm word ds16 149 updat write_hdwr supr prgm word ds16 47 upda save_points supr prgm word ds16 18 ma interrupt_sim supr prgm word ds16 pr proc_specific supr prgm word ds16 66 up update_system incomplete instr 4E56 upda get_targets incomplete instr 4E56 7 read_conditions incomplete instr 4E56 upda set_outputs incomplete instr 4E56 updat write_hdwr incomplete instr 4E56 upda save_points incomplete instr 4E56 7 sq adv ma interrupt_sim incomplete instr 4E56 pro main do_sort incomplete instr 4E56 7 081 pro main strepy8 incomplete instr 4E56 7 002 pro main strepy8 incomplete instr 4E56 003 pro main strepy8 incomplete instr 4E56 7 7 Notice in the preceding trace you may have to press lt PREV gt in order to see the states captured prior to the trigger that in addition to states captured in the sequence sq adv is also shown next to states which cause a sequencer restart To trace windows of program execution Use the enable and disable options to the trace command Windowing refers to the analyzer feature that allows you to turn on or enable the capturing of states after some state occurs then to turn off or disable the cap
43. mean Average number of states in the range per trace Ssumq Sum of squares of states in the range per trace Symbols Within Range Names of other symbols that identify addresses or ranges of addresses within the range of this symbol Additional Symbols for Address Names of other symbols that also identify this address Note that some compilers emit more than one symbol for certain addresses For example a compiler may emit interrupt_sim and _interrupt_sim for the first address in a routine named interrupt_sim The analyzer will show the first symbol it finds to represent a range of addresses or a single address point and it will show the other symbols under either Symbols within range or Additional symbols for address as applicable In the interrupt_sim example it may show either interrupt_sim or _interrupt_sim to represent the range depending on which symbol it finds first The other symbol will be shown below Symbols within range in the report These conditions appear particularly in default measurements that include all global and local symbols Relative and Absolute Counts Relative count is the total number of states associated with the address ranges in the performance measurement Relative time is the total amount of time associated with the address ranges in the performance measurement The absolute counts are the number of states or amount of time associated with all the states in all the traces 277 Chapt
44. open on the file 267 if curr_loc gt NUM_OF_OLD curr_loc BUG where the sarai Choose Action for de a Line highlighted source for i i lt NUM_OF_OLD i Set Clear Software Breakpoint temp_tot old_data i Edit Source old_data curr_loc ave_ten Run Until line exists humid_tot Trace After for i i lt NUM_OF_OLO i humid_tot old_datal Trace About Trace Before STATUS N68340 Running in monitor Trace Until 214 Chapter 6 Using the Emulator Using System Commands To copy information to a file or printer Choose File gt Copy select the type of information from the cascade menu and use the dialog box to select the file or printer Using the command line enter the copy command ASCII characters are copied to the file or printer If you copy information to an existing file it will be appended to the file Refer to the following paragraphs for details about the different copy options Display Copies information currently in the display area This option is useful for restricting the number of lines that are copied Also this option is useful for copying the contents of register classes other than BASIC Memory Copies the contents of a range of memory The format is the same as specified in the last display memory command For example if you copy memory after displaying a range of memory in mnemonic format the file would contain the mnemonic memory
45. system does not generate a DSACK the emulator will be unable to break into the monitor and a CPU in wait state status will result When interlocking is disabled accesses to emulation memory will be terminated by a DSACK signal generated by the emulator Any cycle termination signals generated by the target system during emulation memory accesses including BERR will be ignored Use 68340 chip select 0 The cs0 attribute allows you to emulate the 68340 s global chip select operation One memory range either target or emulation can be given this attribute Refer to the To emulate global chip select operation task description at the end of this section Combination of the dp and dsi attributes Combination of the dp and cs0 attributes 136 Chapter 5 Configuring the Emulator Mapping Memory dsi_cs0 Combination of the dsi and cs0 attributes dp_dsi_cs0 Combination of the dp dsi and cs0 attributes Examples Consider the following section summary from the linker load map output listing SECTION SUMMARY SECTION ATTRIBUTE START END LENGTH ALIGN ABSOLUTE DATA 00000000 0000002F 00000030 0 BYTE 0 NORMAL 00000030 00000030 00000000 2 WORD env NORMAL CODE 00000400 O00000FB8 00000BB9 2 WORD prog NORMAL CODE 00000FBA 00001A83 00000ACA 2 WORD const NORMAL ROM 00001A84 00001AC9 00000046 2 WORD lib NORMAL CODE 00001ACA 0000265D 00000B94 2 WORD libe NORMAL CODE 0000265E 0000487B 0000221E 2 WORD libm 0000
46. then choose Trace After Trace About or Trace Before When displaying memory in mnemonic format position the mouse pointer over the source line where you want to set the trace trigger press and hold the select mouse button and choose Trace After Trace Before or Trace About from the popup menu Using the command line enter the trace after trace about or trace before commands Tracing after the trigger state says states that occur after the trigger state should be saved in other words the trigger is positioned at the top of the trace Tracing before the trigger state says states that occur before the trigger state should be saved in other words the trigger is positioned at the bottom of the trace Tracing about the trigger state says states that occur before and after the trigger state should be saved in other words the trigger is positioned at the center of the trace When the analyzer counts time or states the actual trigger position is within 1 state of the number specified When counts are turned OFF the actual trigger position is within 3 states of the number specified Usually when you enter a trace about command the trigger state line 0 is labeled about However if there are three or fewer states before the trigger the trigger state is labeled after Likewise if there are 3 or fewer states after the trigger the trigger state is labeled before The state you define after trace af
47. 227 To display the trace 228 To position the trace display on screen 229 To change the trace depth 230 To modify the last trace command entered 230 13 Contents Qualifying Trigger and Store Conditions 231 To qualify the trigger state and position 237 To trigger on a number of occurrences of some state 239 To qualify states stored in the trace 240 To prestore states before qualified store states 241 To change the count qualifier 242 To trace until the analyzer is halted 243 To break emulator execution on the analyzer trigger 244 Using the Sequencer 245 To trigger after a sequence of states 245 To specify a global restart state 247 To trace windows of program execution 248 Modifying the Trace Display 250 To display a dequeued trace 251 To display the trace about a line number 252 To display the trace disassembling from a line number 253 To display instruction cycles only 254 To display the trace in absolute format 255 To display the trace in mnemonic format 256 To display the trace with high level source lines 257 To display the trace with symbol information 259 To change column widths in the trace display 260 To display time counts in absolute or relative format 261 To display the trace with addresses offset 262 To return to the default trace display 263 Saving and Restoring Traces 264 To save trace commands 264 To restore trace commands 265 To save traces 265 To restore traces 266 Contents
48. 64751 66506 and lower active probe board numbers Read and Write Cycles Vcc 5 0 Vdc 5 GND 0 Vdc Ta TL to Tp MC68340 16 78 MHz HP 64751 Num Characteristic Symbol Min Max Min Max Unit 56 RESET Pulse Width Reset Instruction turpw 512 512 clks 57 BERR Negated to HALT Negated Rerun tBNHN 0 0 ns 70 CLKOUT Low to Data Bus Driven Show tscLpbp 0 30 ns Cycle 71 Data Setup Time to CLKOUT Low Show tSCLDS 15 Sy as ns Cycle 72 Data Hold from CLKOUT Low Show Cycle tSCLDH 10 es HEE ns MC68340 NOTES 1 All AC timing is shown with respect to 0 8 V and 2 0 V levels unless otherwise noted 2 This number can be reduced to 5 ns if strobes have equal loads 3 If multiple chip selects are used the CS width negated 15 applies to the time from the negation of a heavily loaded chip select to the assertion of a lightly loaded chip select 4 These hold times are specified with respect to DS on asychronous reads and with respect to CLKOUT on synchronous reads The user is free to use either hold time 5 If the asychronous setup time 47 requirements are satisfied the DSACKx low to data setup time 31 and DSACKx low to BERR low setup time 48 can be ignored The data must only satisfy the data in to CLKOUT low setup time 27 for the following clock cycle BERR must only satisfy the late BERR low to CLKOUT low setup time 27
49. A jack on the rear panel of the HP 64700 Card Cage is provided for this purpose GROUND STRAP PLUG J inet wae ue Y 64700E07 s 515 Chapter 15 Installation Installing Hardware 2 Turn the thumb screw and remove the top cover by sliding the cover toward the rear and up LOOSEN THUMB SCREW AND SLIDE COVER TO REMOVE ty B 64700E08 Pa ly 516 Chapter 15 Installation Installing Hardware 3 Remove the side cover by unsnapping the two latches and lifting off EMULATOR SIDE COVER LATCHES ON BOTTOM PANEL TAB SLOTS 7 4 Remove the card supports NUMBER HERE INDICATES SLOT 64700E01 517 Chapter 15 Installation Installing Hardware 5 First completely loosen the four egress thumb screws To remove emulator cards insert a flat
50. AC Characteristics The AC characteristics of the HP 64751 emulator s active probe are listed in the following tables 479 Chapter 13 Specifications and Characteristics Emulator Specifications and Characteristics AC Electrical Specifications 64751 66508 and higher active probe board numbers Clock Timing MC68340 25 16 MHz HP 64751 Num Characteristic Symbol Min Max Min Max Unit System Frequency See Note fsys dc 25 16 dc 25 16 MHz Crystal Frequency fXTAL 25 50 25 50 kHz On Chip VCO System Frequency fsys 0 13 25 16 0 13 25 16 MHz On Chip VCO Frequency Range fyco 0 1 50 3 0 1 50 3 MHz Crystal Oscillator Startup Time tre 20 20 ms 1 CLKOUT Period teyc 40 40 ns 2 3 CLKOUT Pulse Width tcw 19 19 ns 4 5 CLKOUT Rise and Fall Times tert 4 4 ns NOTE All internal registers retain data at 0 Hz 480 Chapter 13 Specifications and Characteristics Emulator Specifications and Characteristics AC Electrical Specifications 64751 66508 and higher active probe board numbers Read and Write Cycles Vcc 5 0 Vdc 5 GND 0 Vdc Ta TL to Tp MC68340 25 16 MHz HP 64751 Num Characteristic Symbol Min Max Min Max Unit 6 CLKOUT High to Address FC SIZE RMC tCHAV 0 20 0 20 ns Valid 7 CLKOUT High to Address Data
51. ASCII characters can be passed Spaces separate the parameters Formal Parameters These are symbols preceded by an ampersand amp which are the variables of the command file The ASCII string passed passed parameter will be substituted for the formal parameter when the command file is executed The only way to pass a parameter containing a space is to enclose the parameter in double quotes or single quotes Thus to pass the parameter HP 9000 to a command file you can use either HP 9000 or HP 9000 The special parameter amp ArG_IEfT gets set to all the remaining parameters specified when the command file was invoked This lets you use variable size parameter lists If no parameters are left amp ArG_IEfT gets set to NULL Consider the command file example named CMDFILE shown below PARMS amp ADDR amp VALUE1 modify a location or list of locations in memory and display the result modify memory amp ADDR words to amp VALUE1 amp ArG_lEfT display memory amp ADDR blocked words 99 Chapter 4 Entering Commands Using Command Files When you execute CMDFILE you will be prompted with Define command file parameter amp ADDR To pass the parameter enter the address of the first memory location to be modified You will then be prompted for amp VALUE1 If you enter for example 0 1 20 Offffh 44 5 4 the first parameter 0 1 20 is passed to amp VALUE1 and the remaining par
52. Addresses in this column may be locations of instruction opcodes on fetch cycles or they may be sources or destinations of operand cycles The third column shows mnemonic information about the emulation bus cycle 228 Chapter 7 Using the Emulation Analyzer The Basics of Starting Stopping and Displaying Traces The fourth column shows the count information time is counted by default Relative indicates that each count is relative to the previous state You can use the scrollbar in the Graphical User Interface or the lt NEXT gt and lt PREV gt keys in the Softkey Interface to scroll through the trace list a page at a time The lt Up arrow gt and lt Down arrow gt keys will scroll through the trace list a line at a time You can also display the trace list centered around a specific line number for example display trace 100 lt RETURN gt Refer to the Modifying the Trace Display section for more information on the trace list display Note that when a trigger condition is found but not enough states are captured to fill trace memory the status line will show the trace is still running You can display all but the last captured state in this situation you must halt the trace to display the last captured state To position the trace display on screen Use the scroll bar or the lt Up arrow gt lt Down arrow gt lt PREV gt lt NEXT gt lt CTRL gt f and lt CTRL gt g keys The trace display command can display
53. Also The copy trace display trace load trace load trace_spec specify trace store trace and store trace_spec commands 423 Chapter 11 Emulator Analyzer Interface Commands TRIGGER about after before occurs QUALIFIER lt TIMES gt TRIGGER From TRACE diagram after D F C Vs i Fi To output of TRIGGER lt TIMES gt on TRACE diagram Occurs This parameter lets you define where the analyzer will begin tracing program information during a trace measurement A trigger is a QUALIFIER When you include the occurs option you can specify the trigger to be a specific number of occurrences of a QUALIFIER see the QUALIFIER syntax diagram The default is to trace after any state occurs once The parameters are as follows This option captures trace data leading to and following the trigger qualifier The trigger is centered in the trace listing Trace data is acquired after the trigger qualifier is found Trace data is acquired prior to the trigger qualifier This specifies a number of qualifier occurrences of a range or state on which the analyzer is to trigger This determines which of the traced states will be stored in trace memory This prompts you to enter a number of qualifier occurrences 424 Chapter 11 Emulator Analyzer Interface Commands TRIGGER Examples trace after MAIN lt RETURN gt tra
54. Answer yes to the Modify memory configuration question Use the delete softkey to delete mapped ranges Note that programs should be reloaded after deleting mapper terms The memory mapper may re assign blocks of emulation memory after the insertion or deletion of mapper terms To delete term 1 in the memory map delete 1 lt RETURN gt To delete all map terms delete all lt RETURN gt To exit out of the memory mapper enter end lt RETURN gt 140 Chapter 5 Configuring the Emulator Mapping Memory To map memory ranges that use function codes Specify function codes with address ranges when mapping memory Memory mapper softkeys that represent the different function codes are supervisor user program data supervisor program supervisor data user program user data When you specify function codes with mapper ranges the 68340 function code outputs FCO FC1 FC2 are decoded to select particular blocks of memory Function codes let you overlay address ranges When you specify function codes as part of the address the emulator memory mapper knows that overlaid blocks are different memory regions and will define them separately If you specify a function code when mapping a range of memory you must include the function code when referring to locations in that range If you don t include the function code an ambiguous address error message is displayed If you use different function
55. Exiting HP 64700 Interfaces 71 To close an interface window 71 To exit a debug emulation session 72 Contents 4 Entering Commands Using Menus the Entry Buffer and Action Keys 75 To choose a pulldown menu item using the mouse method 1 76 To choose a pulldown menu item using the mouse method 2 77 To choose a pulldown menu item using the keyboard 77 To choose popup menu items 79 To place values into the entry buffer using the keyboard 80 To copy and paste to the entry buffer 80 To recall entry buffer values 83 To use the entry buffer 83 To copy and paste from the entry buffer to the command line entry area 84 To use the action keys 85 To use dialog boxes 85 To access help information 89 Using the Command Line with the Mouse 90 To turn the command line on or off 90 Toenteracommand 91 To edit the command line using the command line pushbuttons 92 To edit the command line using the command line popup menu 93 To recall commands 94 To get help about the command line 94 Using the Command Line with the Keyboard 95 To enter multiple commands on one command line 95 To recall commands 96 To edit commands 96 To access on line help information 97 Using Command Files 98 To start logging commands to a command file 101 To stop logging commands to a command file 101 To playback execute a command file 102 Using Pod Commands 103 To display the pod commands screen 104 To use pod commands 104 Contents For
56. File Defining Symbol STATUS cws update_sys 170 Chapter 6 Using the Emulator Using Context Commands Using Context Commands The commands in this section display and control the directory and symbol contexts for the interface Directory context The current directory context is the directory accessed by all system references for files primarily load store and copy commands if no explicit directory is mentioned Unless you have changed directories since beginning the emulation session the current directory context is that of the directory from which you started the interface Symbol context The emulator analyzer interface and the Symbol Retrieval Utilities SRU together support a current working symbol context The current working symbol represents an enclosing scope for local symbols If symbols have not been loaded into the interface you cannot display or change the symbol context This section shows you how to e Display the current directory and symbol context e Change the directory context e Change the symbol context 171 Chapter 6 Using the Emulator Using Context Commands To display the current directory and symbol context e Choose Display Context e Using the command line enter the pwd and pws commands The current directory and working symbol contexts are displayed and also the name of the last executable file from which symbols were loaded Example Direct
57. Identifier is the name of an identifier as declared in the source file Scope is the name of the portion of the program where the specified identifier is defined or active such as a procedure block This indicates that the following string specifies a standard segment such as PROG DATA or COMN or a user defined segment in the source file Prompts you for entry of the segment name The range of addresses beginning with the lowest address occupied by any code in the procedure and ending with the highest address occupied by any code in the procedure Normally the text_range will be the same as the entry_exit_range some compilers may rearrange code so that the return instruction for example is not at the highest address in the range occupied by code of the procedure When two identifier names are identical and have the same scope you can distinguish between them by entering the type in parentheses Do not type a space between the identifier name and the type specification The type will be one of the following Specifies that the identifier is a source file This provides an alternate way to reference a file segment in a command example myfile c PROG fsegment It is better to use the keyword segment example myfile c segment PROG The segment keyword is preferred because it will do scanning for PROG Prog prog and other expressions of the program segment in 413 Chapter 11 Emulator Analyzer Interface Commands
58. Multiple HP 64700s You Can Start and stop up to 16 emulators at the same time up to 32 if modifications are made Use the analyzer in one HP 64700 to arm that is activate the analyzers in other HP 64700 card cages or to cause emulator execution in other HP 64700 card cages to break Use the HP 64700 s BNC connector to trigger an external instrument for example a logic analyzer or oscilloscope when the analyzer finds its trigger condition or you can allow an external instrument to arm the analyzer or break emulator execution With the Graphical User Interface You Can Use the emulator and analyzer under an X Window System that supports OSF Motif interfaces Enter commands using pull down or pop up menus Enter recall and edit commands using the command line pushbuttons Enter file names recalled commands recalled values etc using dialog boxes Set breakpoints by pointing the mouse cursor on a line in the mnemonic memory display and clicking Create action keys for commonly used commands or command files With the Softkey Interface You Can Use the emulator and analyzer with a terminal or terminal emulator Quickly enter commands using softkeys command recall and command editing In This Book This book describes the Graphical User Interface and the Softkey Interface when used with the HP 64751 68340 emulator and the HP 64704 analyzer It is organized into five parts whose chapters are described b
59. Ps editFileLine example vi Specifies the command used to edit a file at d Ps a certain line number lt proc gt actionKeysSub keyDefs paired list Specifies the text that should appear on the of strings action key push buttons and the commands that should be executed in the command line area when the action key is pushed Refer to the To set up custom action keys section for more information lt proc gt dirSelectSub entries list of Specifies the initial values that are placed in strings the File gt Context Directory popup recall buffer Refer to the To set initial recall buffer values section for more information lt proc gt recallSub entries list of Specifies the initial values that are placed in strings the entry buffer labeled Refer to the To set initial recall buffer values section for more information 317 Chapter 10 Setting X Resources To modify the Graphical User Interface resources j The following steps show you how to modify the Graphical User Interface s X resources Copy part or all of the HP64_Softkey application defaults file to a temporary file The HP64_Softkey file contains the default definitions for the graphical interface application s X resources For example on an HP 9000 computer you can use the following command to copy the complete HP64_Softkey file to HP64_Softkey tmp note that the HP64_Softkey file is several hundred lines long cp usr l
60. Rel 0 00 Abs 0 00 Program Activity State Percent Rel 0 00 Abs 0 00 Mean 0 00 Sdv 0 00 Time Percent Rel 0 00 Abs 0 00 proc_specific Address Range 1A62H thru 1A82H Memory Activity State Percent Rel 0 00 Abs 0 00 Mean 0 00 Sdv 0 00 Time Percent Rel 0 00 Abs 0 00 Program Activity State Percent Rel 0 00 Abs 0 00 Mean 0 00 Sdv 0 00 Time Percent Rel 0 00 Abs 0 00 read_conditions Address Range 16E4H thru 1772H Memory Activity State Percent Rel 0 00 Abs 0 00 Mean 0 00 Sdv 0 00 Time Percent Rel 0 00 Abs 0 00 Program Activity State Percent Rel 0 00 Abs 0 00 Mean 0 00 Sdv 0 00 Time Percent Rel 0 00 Abs 0 00 save_points Address Range 1892H thru 1976H Memory Activity State Percent Rel 0 00 Abs 0 00 Mean 0 00 Sdv 0 00 Time Percent Rel 0 00 Abs 0 00 Program Activity State Percent Rel 0 00 Abs 0 00 Mean 0 00 Sdv 0 00 Time Percent Rel 0 00 Abs 0 00 281 Chapter 8 Making Software Performance Measurements Activity Performance Measurements Graph of Memory Activity relative state percents gt 1 set_outputs 31 31 KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKEK strcpy8 21 77 KKK KKK KKK KK interrupt_sim 18 78 KERR KK KK write_hdwr 12 52 KKK KKK get_targets 62265 FFF update_system 6 265 combsort 2 08 Graph of Memory Activity relative time percents gt 1 set_outputs 31 30 KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK strcpy8 21 76 RRR RR interrupt_sim 18 78 RRR RRR KK write_hdwr 12 52
61. SIM registers Enter the synec_sim_registers from_68340_to_config command The contents of the 68340 SIM registers are copied to the emulator s configuration registers The contents of the MBAR register must be valid that is its least significant bit should be 1 158 Chapter 6 Using the Emulator Using the Emulator Configuration Registers To synchronize to the emulator configuration registers Enter the syne_sim_registers to_68340_from_config command The contents of the emulator s configuration registers are copied to the 68340 SIM registers The contents of the CF_MBAR register must be valid that is its least significant bit should be 1 159 Chapter 6 Using the Emulator Loading and Storing Absolute Files Loading and Storing Absolute Files This section describes the tasks related to loading absolute files into the emulator and storing memory contents into absolute files This section shows you how to e Load absolute files into memory e Load absolute files without symbols e Store memory contents into absolute files To load absolute files Choose File gt Load Executable and use the dialog box to select the absolute file Using the command line enter the load lt absolute_file gt command You can load absolute files into emulation or target system memory You can load IEEE 695 format absolute files You can also load HP format absolute files The store memory command creates HP format
62. SUCCEEDED You could perform the same update as in the previous example with the following command progflash v em68340 64751 lt RI EK TURN gt 559 Chapter 16 Installing Updating Emulator Firmware To display current firmware version information To display current firmware version information e Use the Terminal Interface ver command to view the version information for firmware currently in the HP 64700 When using the Graphical User Interface or Softkey Interface you can enter Terminal Interface commands with the pod_command command For example display pod_command lt RETURN gt pod_command ver lt RETURN gt Examples The Terminal Interface ver command displays information similar to Copyright c Hewlett Packard Co 1987 All Rights Reserved Reproduction adaptation or translation without prior written permission is prohibited except as allowed under copyright laws HP64700B Series Emulation System Version B 01 00 20Dec93 Location Flash System RAM 1 Mbyte HP64751A Motorola 68340 Emulator Version A 00 00 26Mar92 Control HP64748C Emulation Control Board Speed 16 7 MHz Memory 260 Kbytes Bank 0 HP64171A 256 Kbyte 35ns Memory Module HP64740 Emulation Analyzer Version A 02 02 13Mar91 560 Chapter 16 Installing Updating Emulator Firmware If there is a power failure during a firmware update If there is a power failure during a firmware u
63. SYMB module procedure prospecial static task the example line The fsegment keyword will only scan for the one expression PROG These refer to module symbols For most C compilers these names derive from the source file name For Ada they are packages Other language systems may allow user defined module names Any procedure or function symbol For languages that allow a change of scope without explicit naming SRU assigns an identifier and tags it with type procedure Prospecial symbols are symbols that were created by the HP SRU such as entry exit and return They are derived symbols not intended for the product user Typical prospecial symbols would be entry 1 entry2 and entry3 in a procedure that has three possible entry points Static symbols which includes global variables The logical address of these symbols will not change Task symbols which are specifically defined by the processor and language system in use A colon is used to specify the UNIX file path from the line segment or symbol specifier When following the file name with a line or segment selection there must be a space after the colon For a symbol there must not be a space after the colon 414 Chapter 11 Emulator Analyzer Interface Commands SYMB Examples The following short C code example should help illustrate how symbols are maintained by SRU and referenced in your emulation commands File users dave control c
64. Segment ENTRY 98861832 prog EXIT aaag1976 prog TEXTRANGE 0001892 88001977 prog 167 Chapter 6 Using the Emulator Using Symbols To display address ranges associated with the high level source line numbers display local_symbols_in update_sys update_sys c lt RETURN gt Symbols in update_sys module update_sys c Source reference symbols Line range Address range __ Segment 1 47 86661592 88881561 prog 46 53 88461562 8815C5 prog 54 H56 15C6 44881501 prog 57 59 48481502 4815E0 prog 60 60 GG15EE 8G15F3 prog 61 61 G15F4 84801683 prog 62 H 63 86061684 88881689 prog 64 1 64 G8168A 8488161 prog 65 H68 88481618 84881629 prog 69 72 06162A 84881630 prog 73 75 G8163E 88881643 prog 76 77 8808 1644 prog 6 94 86081654 4G166F prog 95 95 86081674 88168 prog 96 99 86461686 84881680 prog 100 100 G8168E GG 8G168F prog 168 Chapter 6 Using the Emulator Using Symbols To display a symbol s parent symbol e When displaying symbols position the mouse pointer over the symbol press and hold the select mouse button and choose Display Parent Symbols from the popup menu Examples leg Dis lay Modify Execution Break oints Trace Setin S View the parent Symbols in update dijs module save Jpointslproced re Procedure special symbols symbol associated Procedure special name Address range __ Segment with the
65. Stack Pointer Registers SSP Supervisor Stack Pointer DO D7 Data Registers 0 through 7 AO A7 Address Registers 0 through 7 VBR Vector Base Register SFC DFC Alternate Function Code Registers 192 Chapter 6 Using the Emulator Displaying and Modifying Registers Register Class Register Description SIM MBAR Module Base Address Register SIM_MCR Module Configuration Register System SYNCR Clock Synthesizer Control Register Integration AVR Autovector Register Module RSR Reset Status Register PORTA Port A Data DDRA Port A Data Direction PPARAI Port A Pin Assignment 1 PPARA2 Port A Pin Assignment 2 PORTB Port B Data PORTB1 Port B Data DDRB Port B Data Direction PPARB Port B Pin Assignment SWIV Software Interrupt Vector SYPCR System Protection Control PICR Periodic Interrupt Control Register PITR Periodic Interrupt Timing Register SWSR Software Service CSOMASK Address Mask CSO CSOADDR Base Address CSO CSIMASK Address Mask CS1 CSIADDR Base Address CS1 CS2MASK Address Mask CS2 CS2ADDR Base Address CS2 CS3MASK Address Mask CS3 CS3ADDR Base Address CS3 DMA1 2 DMA_MCR1 2 Module Configuration Register INTR1 2 Interrupt Register DMA CCR1 2 Channel Control Register Controller CSR1 2 Channel Status Register Modules FCR1 2 Function Code Register 1 and 2 SAR1 2 Source Address Register DAR1 2 Destination Address Register BTC1 2 Byte Transfer Counter 193 Chapter 6 Using t
66. Step 1 Install the software from the media The tape that contains the Graphical User Interface software may contain several products Usually you will want to install all of the products on the tape However to save disk space or for other reasons you can choose to install selected filesets If you plan on using the conventional Softkey Interface instead of the Graphical User Interface you can save about 3 5 megabytes of disk space by not installing the XUI suffixed filesets Also if you choose not to install the Graphical User Interface you will not have to use a special command line option to start the Softkey Interface Refer to the Software Installation Notice for software installation instructions After you are done installing the software return here 544 j Chapter 15 Installation Installing Sun SPARCsystem Software Step 2 Start the X server and OpenWindows If you are not already running the X server do so now The X server is required to run the Graphical User Interface because it is an X application Start the X server by entering usr openwin bin openwin at the UNIX prompt Consult the OpenWindows documentation if you do not know about using OpenWindows and the X server Step 3 Set the necessary environment variables The DISPLAY environment variable must be set before the Graphical User Interface will start Also you should modify the PATH environment variable to include the usr hp64000 bin
67. User Interface 26 Graphical User Interface Conventions 28 The Getting Started Tutorial 31 Step 1 Start the demo 32 Step 2 Display the program in memory 33 Step 3 Run from the transfer address 34 Step 4 Step high level source lines 35 Step 5 Display the previous mnemonic display 36 Step 6 Run until an address 37 Step 7 Display data values 38 Step 8 Display registers 39 Step 9 Step assembly level instructions 40 Step 10 Trace the program 41 Step 11 Display memory at an address in a register 43 Step 12 Patch assembly language code 44 Step 13 Exit the emulator analyzer interface 47 Contents Part 2 User s Guide 2 Plugging into a Target System Step 1 Turn OFF power 53 Step 2 Unplug probe from demo target system 54 Step 3 Select the emulator clock source 55 Step 4 Plug the 68340 PGA emulator probe into the target system 60 Step 5 Turn ON power 61 Starting and Exiting HP 64700 Interfaces Starting the Emulator Analyzer Interface 65 To start the emulator analyzer interface 65 To start the interface using the default configuration 66 To run a command file on interface startup 67 To display the status of emulators 67 To unlock an interface that was left locked by another user 68 Opening Other HP 64700 Interface Windows 69 To open additional emulator analyzer windows 69 To open the high level debugger interface window 70 To open the software performance analyzer SPA interface window 70
68. When specifying a trigger state you can include an occurrence count The occurrence count specifies that the analyzer trigger on the Nth occurrence of some state The default base for an occurrence count is decimal You may specify occurrence counts from 1 to 65535 Examples To trigger on the 20th occurrence of the call of the update_system function main c line 102 trace after address main main c line 102 occurs 20 lt RETURN gt 239 Chapter 7 Using the Emulation Analyzer Qualifying Trigger and Store Conditions To qualify states stored in the trace e Enter a storage state specification in the entry buffer then choose Trace Only e Using the command line use the only option in the trace command By default all captured states are stored however you can qualify which states get stored by using the trace command s only option Examples When the emulator is running the demo program to store only accesses of the target_temp variable trace after main main c line 102 only target_temp lt RETURN gt race List FFset G More data off Address peode or Status w Source Lines time count symbols mnemonic w symbols relative HHHHHHHHHHmain c line 141 thru 102 HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH update_ tem pr maint 88812 incomplete instr 4EB9 _target_temp 0048 supr data word ds16 _target_temp 0047 supr data word ds1B _target_temp 0047 supr data word ds16 _tar
69. accesses to the variable target_temp and prestore the two previous states trace after main main c line 102 only target_temp status memwrite prestore anything lt RETURN gt More data off 7 Label Address Opcode or Status w Source Lines time count H symbols mnemonic w symbols relative Hithitttttttmain c line 141 thru 162 HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHRHRHRH RRR Base ae pri maint GGG84812 incomplete instr 4EB9 Hitittttttupdate_sys c line 105 HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH HR if temperature lt MIN_TEMP temp_dir up pstore get_tar H444444E incomplete instr C53 pstore dat _target_temp H4A supr data word rd ds16 003 dat _target_temp 4849 supr data word wr ds16 3 58 mS Hitt Htupdate_sys c line 105 HHHHHHHHHHRHHH HEH if temperature lt MIN_TEMP temp_dir up pstore get_tart Q GG04E incomplete instr C53 pstore dat _target_temp 4049 supr data word rd ds16 006 dat _target_temp 4848 supr data word wr ds16 146 mS Hiatt Htupdate_sys c line 105 HHHHHHHHHHHHH HHH if temperature lt MIN_TEMP temp_dir up 241 Chapter 7 Using the Emulation Analyzer Qualifying Trigger and Store Conditions Examples To change the count qualifier Use the counting option in the trace command After initializing the analyzer the default count qualifier is time which means that the time between states is saved When time is counted up to 512 states can be stored in the trace
70. additional window the status line will show that this session is joining a session already in progress and the event log is displayed You can enter commands in any window in which the interface is running When you enter commands in different windows the command entered in the first window must complete before the command entered in the second window can start The status lines and the event log displays are updated in all windows 69 Chapter 3 Starting and Exiting HP 64700 Interfaces Opening Other HP 64700 Interface Windows To open the high level debugger interface window Choose File gt Emul1700 High Level Debugger under Graphic Windows or enter the emul700 u xdebug lt emul_name gt command in another terminal emulation window For information on how to use the high level debugger interface refer to the debugger emulator User s Guide To open the software performance analyzer SPA interface window Choose File gt Emu1700 Performance Analyzer under Graphic Windows or enter the emul700 u xperf lt emul_name gt command in another terminal emulation window For information on how to use the software performance analyzer refer to the Software Performance Analyzer User s Guide 70 Chapter 3 Starting and Exiting HP 64700 Interfaces Exiting HP 64700 Interfaces Exiting HP 64700 Interfaces There are several options available when exiting the HP 764700 interfaces You can simply close
71. address range is specified that would cross different segments Action Break the memory command into multiple commands so that the address ranges start and end in the same segment Read memory failed at lt PHYSICAL ADDRESS gt store aborted Cause While storing memory from the emulator to a file a read memory error occurred Action Use the display error_log command to view any errors You may need to modify the configuration and map memory before storing the file again Session aborted Cause This will only happen when running multiple emulation windows and a fatal system error occurs 446 Chapter 12 Error Messages Graphical Softkey Interface Messages Unnumbered Action Find the window that caused the error and see the error message that it displayed All the additional windows will simply state session aborted Cycle power on the emulator and enter emul700 u lt logical name gt to make sure the emulator is unlocked Session cannot be continued ending released Cause The emulation session is ending automatically because it could not be continued from the previous session When the session has ended the emulator will be released meaning that others can access and use it Action When you restart the emulation session later the new session will use all default settings Slave clock requires at least one edge Cause The analyzer has an invalid clock specification Action Modify your configuration and try
72. ak ae EN ena et aga ant a E a a sa aE N oh ak ooo oe aE ae g Channel Logical Processor Remainder of Information for the Channel Type Name Type IP address for LAN connections lan em68340 m68340 21 17 9 143 549 Chapter 15 Installation Verifying the Installation A typical entry for a 68340 emulator connected to an RS 422 port would appear as follows a ie te a AEE at ie ll a i ANEN INE AN i a AEE el a i a a ie gee AIEEE I ee ia ae an ena Xpar Parity Flow Stop Char Channel Logical Processor Host Physical Mode Bits Size Type Name Type Name Device XON OFF NONE RTS 2 8 eS RES ant eS aes oe RS as hes aa ye i ge iE as Sng ne Ok bins ht et hea uit a aa eS fa Ss a oS E ee a a OS EIEE ah a ea E ae SS hahaa aa ae nc nS ee io ae ss BS serial em68340 m68340 myhost dev emcom23 OFF NONE RTS 2 8 Step 2 Start the interface with the emul700 command j Apply power to the emulator you wish to access after making sure the emulator is connected to the LAN or to your host system On the HP 64700 Series Emulator the power switch is located on the front panel near the bottom edge Push the switch in to turn power on to the emulator 2 Wait a few seconds to allow the emulator to complete its startup initialization 3 Choose a terminal window from which to start the Graphical User Interface 4 Start the Graphical User Interface by entering emul700 command and givi
73. and copies it to the text area A double click chooses the directory and closes the dialog box Selection fusers guest demo debug_env hp64751 Text entry area Directory name is either copied here from the recall list l or entered directly Clicking this button Clicking this button Clicking this button chooses the directory chooses the directory cancels the directory displayed in the text entry displayed in the text entry selection operation and area and closes the dialog area but keeps the dialog closes the dialog box box box on the screen instead of closing it 88 Chapter 4 Entering Commands Using Menus the Entry Buffer and Action Keys To access help information 1 Display the Help Index by choosing Help General Topic or Help Command Line 2 Choose a topic of interest from the Help Index The Help Index lists topics covering operation of the interface as well other information about the interface When you choose a topic from the Help Index the interface displays a window containing the help information You may leave the window on the screen while you continue using the interface 89 Chapter 4 Entering Commands Using the Command Line with the Mouse Using the Command Line with the Mouse When using the Graphical User Interface the command line portion of the interface gives you the option of entering commands in the same manner as they are entered in the Softkey Interface
74. broken to the monitor The string s indicates the address where the breakpoint was encountered BNC trigger break Cause This status message will be displayed if you have configured the emulator to break on a BNC trigger signal and the BNC trigger line is activated during a program run The emulator is broken to the monitor CMB trigger break Cause This status message will be displayed if you have configured the emulator to break on a CMB trigger signal and the CMB trigger line is activated during a program run The emulator is broken to the monitor 466 Chapter 12 Error Messages Terminal Interface Messages 618 trig break Cause This status message will be displayed if you use the break_on_trigger syntax of the trace command and the analyzer has found the trigger condition while tracing a program run The emulator is broken to the monitor 619 trig2 break Cause This status message will be displayed if you have used the internal trig2 line to connect the analyzer trigger output to the emulator break input and the analyzer has found the trigger condition The emulator is broken to the monitor 620 Unexpected software breakpoint Cause If you have enabled software breakpoints this message is displayed if a software breakpoint instruction is encountered in your program that was not inserted by a modify software_breakpoints set command and is therefore not in the breakpoint table Action Remove the breakpoint instructi
75. can prevent the interface from communicating with the emulator and cause abnormal termination of the interface However it is sometimes necessary to use pod commands For example you must use a pod command to execute the emulator s performance verification pv routine Performance verification is an internal self test procedure for the emulator Remember that pod commands can cause trouble for the high level interface if they are used indiscriminately This section shows you how to e Display the pod commands screen e Use pod commands 103 Chapter 4 Entering Commands Using Pod Commands To display the pod commands screen Choose Display Pod Commands The pod commands screen displays the results of pod Terminal Interface commands To set the interface to use pod commands choose Settings Pod Command Keyboard To use pod commands To begin using pod commands choose Settings gt Pod Command Keyboard To end using pod commands click the suspend pushbutton softkey The Settings Pod Command Keyboard command displays the pod commands screen and activates the keyboard for entering pod command on the command line 104 Chapter 4 Entering Commands Forwarding Commands to Other HP 64700 Interfaces Forwarding Commands to Other HP 64700 Interfaces To allow the emulator analyzer interface to run concurrently with other HP 64700 interfaces like the high level debugger and software performance analyz
76. chmod 644 fm64751 s lt RETURN gt vi fm64751 s lt RETURN gt The monitor will be loaded at 20000H so the modify ORG statement near the top of the file to look like this ORG 020000H START MONITOR ON 4K BOUNDARY Notice that the ORG statement is indented from the left margin if it is not indented the assembler will interpret the ORG as a label and will generate an error when processing the address portion of the statement 130 Chapter 5 Configuring the Emulator Selecting the Emulation Monitor To assemble and link the monitor program enter the following commands which assume that usr hp64000 bin is defined in the PATH environment variable as68k L fm64751 s gt m64751 lis lt RETURN gt 1d68k c m64751 k L gt m64751 map lt RETURN gt Where the fm64751 k linker command file is name fm64751 load fm64751 0 end To configure the emulator to use a foreground monitor program access the configuration questions and answer the questions as shown below Modify memory configuration yes Monitor type user_foreground Reset map change of monitor type requires map reset yes Monitor file name fm64751 Monitor s base address 20000h Re map memory for the demo program by entering the following mapper commands 0O thru 6fffh emulation rom lt RETURN gt 7000h thru 16fffh emulation ram lt RETURN gt end lt RETURN gt Modify emulator pod configuration yes Rese
77. codes Lets the keyboard to interact with your program through the simulated I O software When the keyboard is activated for simulated I O its normal interaction with emulation is disabled The emulation softkeys are blank and the softkey labeled suspend is displayed on your screen Pressing suspend lt RETURN gt will deactivate keyboard simulated I O and return the keyboard to normal emulation mode For details about setting up simulated I O refer to the Simulated I O User s Guide Modify memory values as 32 bit long word values or 64 bit real values when preceded by real Lets you modify the contents of selected memory locations You can modify the contents of individual memory locations to individual values Or you can modify a range of memory to a single value or a sequence of values Modify a series of memory locations by specifying the address of the first location in the series to be modified and the values to which the contents of that location and successive locations are to be changed The first value listed will replace the contents of the first memory location The second value replaces the contents of the next memory location in the series and so on until the list is exhausted When more than one value is listed the value representations must be separated by commas See the examples for more information A range of memory can be modified such that the content of each location in the range is changed to the single sp
78. continue command file lines This is done by avoiding the line feed with a backslash A line terminated by is concatenated with any following lines until a line that does not contain a backslash is found A line constructed in this manner is recognized and executed as one single command line If the last line in a command file is terminated by it appears on the command line but is not executed Normally the line feed is recognized as the command terminator The UNIX environment recognizes three quoting 100 Chapter 4 Entering Commands Using Command Files characters for shell commands which are double quotes single quotes and the backslash symbol For example the following three lines are treated as a single shell command The two hidden line feeds are ignored because they are inside the two single quotes lawk blanks END print blanks gt an_unix_file To start logging commands to a command file Choose File gt Log Record and use the dialog box to select a command file name Using the command line enter the log_commands to lt file gt command To stop logging commands to a command file Choose File gt Log Stop Using the command line enter the log_commands off command 101 Chapter 4 Entering Commands Using Command Files To playback execute a command file Choose File gt Log Playback and use the dialog box to select the name of the command
79. desired menu item Release the mouse button to select the menu choice If you decide not to select a menu item simply continue to hold the mouse button down move the mouse pointer off of the menu and release the mouse button The following popup menus are available in the Graphical User Interface e Mnemonic Memory Display e Breakpoints Display e Global Symbols Display e Local Symbols Display e Status Line e Command Line 79 Chapter 4 Entering Commands Using Menus the Entry Buffer and Action Keys j To place values into the entry buffer using the keyboard Position the mouse pointer within the text entry area An I beam cursor will appear Enter the text using the keyboard To clear the entry buffer text area from beginning until end press the lt Ctrl gt u key combination To copy and paste to the entry buffer To copy and paste a discrete text string as determined by the interface position the mouse pointer over the text to copy and click the paste mouse button To specify the exact text to copy to the entry buffer press and hold the paste mouse button drag the mouse pointer to highlight the text to copy and paste release the paste mouse button You can copy and paste from the display area the status line and from the command line entry area When you position the pointer and click the mouse button the interface expands the highlight to include the most complete text string it
80. directory and if you have installed software in a directory other than you need to set the HP64000 environment variable The following instructions show you how to set these variables at the UNIX prompt Modify your profile or login file if you wish these environment variables to be set when you log in The following instructions also assume that yov re using csh if you re using sh environment variables are set in the lt V ARIABLE gt lt value gt export lt VARIABLE gt form The DISPLAY environment variable is usually set by the openwin startup script Check to see that DISPLAY is set by entering echo DISPLAY If DISPLAY is not set you can set it by entering setenv DISPLA Y lt hostname gt lt server_number gt lt screen_number gt 545 Chapter 15 Installation Installing Sun SPARCsystem Software For example setenv DISPLA Y myhost 0 0 Consult the OpenWindows documentation for an explanation of the DISPLAY environment variable Set the HP64000 environment variable For example if you installed the HP 64000 software relative to the root directory you would enter setenv HP64000 usr hp64000 If you installed the software relative to a directory other than the root directory it is strongly recommended that you use a symbolic link to make the software appear to be under usr hp64000 For example if you installed the software relative to directory users team you would enter In s us
81. guarded memory 152 Foreground monitor had unexpected exception d Cause The decimal number value of the vector offset included with the message tells you what type of exception caused the message For example if a priviledged opcode is attempted to be executed at the user access level the decimal value 32 is shown with this error message Action Determine the cause of the exception 155 Unable to verify trace vector vector table in guarded memory Cause In order to step when using a foreground monitor the trace vector must contain the address of the monitor program s TRACE_ENTRY label which equals the monitor base address plus 800H The step command reads the trace vector on each step to make sure it contains the correct address value This error occurs when the vector table is in guarded memory Action Make sure the vector table is not in an address range mapped as guarded memory 156 Unable to verify trace vector vector table read failed Cause In order to step when using a foreground monitor the trace vector must contain the address of the monitor program s TRACE_ENTRY label which equals the monitor base address plus 800H The step command reads the trace vector on each step to make sure it contains the correct address value This error occurs when the vector table is in target memory and the read fails Action Make sure the vector base register points to the correct location in target memory and that the memory
82. hex 486 12FSC 63 Ba a 2A F G0 12F 64 66 Ba BB 46 FE poA 12F6C 73 pa 4 18 J a0 12F 74 76 46 a 72 DA aaa 1l2F7C 83 46 6 88 28 468 12F 84 86 66 6 Bl 46 aaa 12Fec g3 Ba Ba F EA 468 12F 94 96 Ba l 2F F BoA 12F9C A3 46 a 88 48 pog 12FA4 AB 46 aa B 44 Bpa 12FAC B3 46 aa 86 44 poA 12F64 B6 46 aa z 446 12FBC C3 46 6 B 41 BOA 12FC4 CB pa a 88 48 4 12FCC D3 66 B 7 28 00A 12F04 D06 46 86 88 C4 pog 12F0C E3 pa 6 IC 43 Chapter 1 Getting Started Step 12 Patch assembly language code Step 12 Patch assembly language code The Patch action key lets you patch code in your program 1 With main still in the entry buffer click on the Run Xfer til action key 2 To display memory with assembly level instructions intermixed with the high level source lines click on the Disp Sre amp Asm action key Memory sp mnemonic file main module main c address label data 92 extern void interrupt_sim simulate an interrupt 93 extern void do_sort sets up ascii array and calls 94 95 maint 96 pr main main 4E560000 LINK W AB 0000 97 init_system aaagarc4 4EB9808014 JSR init init_system 98 proc_spec_init BABAFCA 4EB9 AA1IA JSR p proc_spec_init 99 100 while true aaaeF Da 4E71 NOP 181 102 update_system gaga8eF D2 4EB9000015 up update_system 183 num_checks 3 Click on the Patch action key A window appears and the vi editor is starte
83. in the following order 5 The application defaults file For example usr lib X1 1 app defaults HP64_Softkey when the operating system is HP UX or usr openwin lib X 1 1 app defaults HP64_Softkey when the operating system is SunOS 6 The XAPPLRESDIR HP64_Softkey file The XAPPLRESDIR environment variable defines a directory containing system wide custom application defaults 7 The server s RESOURCE_MANAGER property The xrdb command loads user defined resource specifications into the RESOURCE_MANAGER property If no RESOURCE_MANAGER property exists user defined resource settings are read from the SHOME Xdefaults file 500 Chapter 14 Concepts X Resources and the Graphical User Interface 8 The file named by the XENVIRONMENT environment variable If the XENVIRONMENT variable is not set the HOME Xdefaults host file is read typically contains resource specifications for a specific remote host 9 Resource specifications included in the command line with the xrm option When specifications with identical resource names appear in different places the latter specification overrides the former Scheme Files Several of the Graphical User Interface s X resources identify scheme files that contain additional X resource specifications Scheme files group resource specifications for different displays computing environments and languages Resources for Graphical User Interface Schemes There are five X resources
84. jusersiquestidemo debug_envihp64751 Config EA previously accessed Jusersiquestidemo debug_envihp64751 Configall EA during the emulation lt Previous Files gt session Jusersiquestidemo debug envihp64751 Config EA A single click on a file name from either list highlights the file name and copies it to the text area A double click chooses the file and closes the dialog box Label informs you what kind of file Load Emulation Configuration selection you are fusers qguest demo debug_env hp64751 Config EA performing Text entry area z copied here from l i the recall list or entered directly Clicking this button Entering a new file filter Clicking this button chooses the file name and clicking this button cancels the file selection displayed in the text entry causes a list of files operation and closes the area and closes the dialog matching the new filter to dialog box box be read from the directory 87 Chapter 4 Entering Commands Using Menus the Entry Buffer and Action Keys To use the Directory Selection dialog box Label informs you of the typeof list mulator Analyzer Directory Selectio displayed A list of predefined Previous Working Directories or previously Associated X Resource emul m68000 dirSelectSub entr accessed d m irectories sf HP64000 monitor A single click on a HP64000 demo debug_envihp64751 directory name from ae the list highlights fusersiquestidemo debug env the name
85. line number to be centered in the display Examples To display the trace about line number 66 display trace 66 lt RETURN gt race List Address Opcode or Status time count 46861532 supr prgm word ds16 720 G8876F6 supr data long ds16 720 G8876F8 supr data word ds16 720 48881534 supr prgm word ds16 720 86861536 supr prgm word ds16 728 44612F86 supr data long ds16 720 44612F8A supr data word ds16 720 G88154E supr prgm word ds16 720 88881558 supr prgm word ds16 688 448 12F84 supr data long ds16 728 BBB 12F86 supr data word ds16 720 46861552 supr pram word ds16 728 46881554 supr prgm word ds16 720 88881556 supr prgm word ds16 720 48881558 supr prgm word ds16 728 6155A supr prgm word ds16 728 252 Chapter 7 Using the Emulation Analyzer Modifying the Trace Display To display the trace disassembling from a line number e Use the disassemble_from_line_number option to the display trace command The disassemble_from_line_number trace display option causes the inverse assembler to attempt to begin disassembling the trace information from the specified line number This option is required for inverse assemblers that cannot uniquely identify opcode fetch states on the processor bus If the line number specified is not an opcode fetch state the disassembled information will be incorrect Examples To display the trace disassembling from line number 66 display trace disa
86. measures should be taken before handling the microprocessor connector attached to the end of the probe cable to avoid damaging the internal components of the probe by static electricity We STRONGLY suggest using a ground strap when handling the emulator probe A ground strap is provided with the emulator 52 Chapter 2 Plugging into a Target System Step 1 Turn OFF power Step 1 Turn OFF power CAUTION Possible Damage to the Emulator Make sure target system power is OFF and make sure HP 64700 power is OFF before removing or installing the emulator probe into the target system Do not turn HP 64700 power OFF while the emulator is plugged into a target system whose power is ON 1 If the emulator is currently plugged into a different target system turn that target system s power OFF 2 Turn emulator power OFF 53 Chapter 2 Plugging into a Target System Step 2 Unplug probe from demo target system Step 2 Unplug probe from demo target system 1 If the emulator is currently connected to a different target system unplug the emulator probe otherwise disconnect the emulator probe from the demo target system 54 Chapter 2 Plugging into a Target System Step 3 Select the emulator clock source Step 3 Select the emulator clock source For 64751 66506 and lower numbered active probe printed circuit boards the selection of the internal or ext
87. memory by storing the contents of target ROM to an absolute file re mapping the range as emulation RAM and loading the absolute file Another way to break user program execution at a certain point is to break on the analyzer trigger This section shows you how to e Display the breakpoints list e Enable disable breakpoints e Set a permanent breakpoint e Set a temporary breakpoint e Set all breakpoints e Deactivate a breakpoint 179 Chapter 6 Using the Emulator Using Software Breakpoints CAUTION e Re activate a breakpoint e Clear a breakpoint e Clear all breakpoints Software breakpoints should not be set cleared enabled or disabled while the emulator is running user code If any of these commands are entered while the emulator is running user code and the emulator is executing code in the area where the breakpoint is being modified program execution may be unreliable To display the breakpoints list Choose Display Breakpoints or Breakpoints Display Using the command line enter the display software_breakpoints command The breakpoints display shows the address and status of each breakpoint currently defined If symbolic addresses are turned on when setting the display modes the symbolic label associated with a breakpoint is also displayed Also the breakpoints display shows whether the breakpoint feature is enabled or disabled Software breakpoints enabled address se Pett
88. memory configuration question 3 Enter the address range memory type and optionally an attribute for the memory range You can characterize memory ranges as emulation RAM emulation ROM target system RAM target system ROM or as guarded memory Guarded memory accesses will cause emulator execution to break into the monitor program Writes to locations characterized as ROM will cause emulator execution to break into the monitor program if the Break processor on write to ROM trace debug configuration option is enabled Even though execution breaks into the monitor the memory location is modified if it s in emulation ROM or target system RAM mapped as ROM 135 Chapter 5 Configuring the Emulator Mapping Memory The attributes can be dp dsi cs0 dp_dsi dp_cs0 Dual port emulation memory One emulation memory range up to 4 Kbytes in length can be given the dp attribute The dp attribute specifies that the range be mapped to the 4 Kbyte block of dual port emulation memory If a foreground monitor program is selected the dp attribute is automatically assigned to the memory range reserved for the monitor program Interlock emulation memory and target system DSACK The dsi attribute specifies that accesses in that range of emulation memory be synchronized with the target system This means the termination of accesses in the range will not occur until the target system provides a DSACK If the target
89. of instructions to be executed can be entered in binary B octal O or Q decimal D or hexadecimal H notation silently This option updates the register step mnemonic only after stepping is complete This will speed up stepping of many instructions The default is to update the register step mnemonic after each assembly instruction or source line executes if stepping is performed in the same window as the register display transfer_address This represents the starting address of the program you loaded into emulation or target memory The transfer_address is defined in the linker map source This option performs stepping on source lines Examples step lt RETURN gt step from 810H lt RETURN gt step 20 from OAOH lt RETURN gt step 5 source lt RETURN gt step 20 silently lt RETURN gt step 4 from main lt RETURN gt See Also The display registers display memory mnemonic and set symbols commands 407 Chapter 11 Emulator Analyzer Interface Commands stop_trace stop_trace stop_ trace lt RETURN gt This command terminates the current trace and stops execution of the current measurement The analyzer stops searching for trigger and trace states If trace memory is empty no states acquired nothing will be displayed See Also The trace command 408 Chapter 11 Emulator Analyzer Interface Commands store store trace_spec lt FI
90. one of the open interface windows or you can exit the debug session by closing all the open windows When exiting the debug session you can lock the emulator so that you can continue later or you can release the emulation system so that others may use it This section describes how to e Close an interface window e Exit a debug emulation session To close an interface window In the interface window you wish to close choose File gt Exit Window In the emulator analyzer interface command line enter the end command with no options All other interface windows remain open and the emulation session continues unless the window closed is the only one open for the emulation session In that case closing the window ends the emulation session but locks the emulator so that other users cannot access it 71 Chapter 3 Starting and Exiting HP 64700 Interfaces Exiting HP 64700 Interfaces To exit a debug emulation session To exit the interface save your configuration to a temporary file and lock the emulator so that it cannot be accessed by other users choose File gt Exit Locked In the emulator analyzer interface command line enter the end locked command To exit the interface and release the emulator for access by other users choose File Exit Released In the emulator analyzer interface command line enter the end release_system command If you exit the interface locked the interface saves the current conf
91. program counter mnemonic memory display 34 reset values 148 running from 174 pulldown menus choosing with keyboard 77 583 Index choosing with mouse 76 77 pushbutton select mouse button 29 QUALIFIER in trace command 391 393 qualifiers 235 count 242 prestore 241 simple trigger 237 storage 240 RAM mapping emulation or target 135 READY CMB signal 299 real time execution 564 real time runs commands not allowed during 120 commands which will cause break 121 restricting emulator to 120 restricting the emulator to 120 recall buffer 27 columns 323 initial content 323 324 lines 323 recalling entries 83 recall command 96 dialog box 94 recall trace specifications dialog box 230 recursion in SPMT measurements 284 registers copy command 346 display command 39 352 display modify 192 197 modify 197 modify command 381 to file 215 relative count in the trace display 261 relative humidity operating and non operating environments 492 release_system end command option 47 72 115 repetitive display of memory 203 reset emulator commands which cause exit from 178 reset command 394 reset run from 175 resolution memory mapper 133 584 Index resource See X resource RESOURCE_MANAGER property 500 restart term 245 247 restrict to real time runs 120 target system dependency 121 ROM mapping emulation or target 135 writes to 135 RS 422 host computer interfa
92. repeated the number of times specified by the COUNT option Note that the trace command must be set up correctly for the requested measurement For an activity measurement you can use the default trace command trace lt RETURN gt For a duration measurement you must set up the trace specification to store only the points of interest To do this for example you could enter trace only lt symbol_entry gt or lt symbol_exit gt performance_measurement_run 10 lt RETURN gt performance_measurement_run lt RETURN gt The performance_measurement_end and performance_measurement_initialize commands 387 Chapter 11 Emulator Analyzer Interface Commands performance_measurement_run Refer to the Making Software Performance Measurements chapter for examples of performance measurement specification and use 388 Chapter 11 Emulator Analyzer Interface Commands pod_command pod_command Se a keyboard lt pod_commond gt lt RETURN gt suspend Allows you to control the emulator through the direct HP 64700 Terminal Interface The HP 64700 Card Cage contains a low level Terminal Interface which allows you to control the emulator s functions directly You can access this interface using pod_command The options to pod_command allow you to supply only one command at a time Or you can select a keyboard mode which gives you interactive access t
93. run the Motif Window Manager mwm or similar window manager continue with Step 3a of these instructions If you plan to run HP VUE skip to Step 3b of these instructions 540 Chapter 15 Installation Installing HP 9000 Software Step 3a Start the X server and the Motif Window Manager mwm If you are not already running the X server and a window manager do so now The X server is required to use the Graphical User Interface because it is an X Windows application A window manager is not required to execute the interface but as a practical matter you must use some sort of window manager with the X server Start the X server by entering x11start at the HP UX prompt Consult the X Window documentation supplied with the HP UX operating system documentation if you do not know about using X Windows and the X server After starting the X server and Motif Window Manager continue with step 4 of these instructions Step 3b Start HP VUE If you are running the X server under HP VUE and have not started HP VUE do so now HP VUE is a window manager for the X Window system The X server is executing underneath HP VUE Unlike the Motif Window Manager HP VUE provides a login shell and is your default interface to the HP 9000 workstation Step 4 Set the necessary environment variables The DISPLAY environment variable must be set before the Graphical User Interface will start Also you should modify the PATH environment
94. selected the Background Debug Mode BDM of the 68340 processor is used The BKPT line is asserted to enter the monitor Foreground Monitor The foreground monitor is an assembly language program that is executed by the 68340 emulation microprocessor in its normal operating mode When a foreground monitor is selected the foreground monitor or downloaded custom monitor is loaded into dual ported emulation memory and consumes a 4 Kbyte block of the 68340 s address range The foreground monitor program is included with the interface software as usr hp64000 monitor fm64751 s It can be assembled with the HP AxLS 68000 10 20 Assembler Linker Librarian or with the Microtec Research 68000 assembler and linker You may customize the foreground monitor if necessary however you must maintain the basic communications protocol between the monitor and the emulation system controller Comments in the monitor program source file detail sections that cannot be changed Comparison of Background and Foreground Monitor Programs processor s BDM Monitor Program Characteristic Background Foreground Takes up processor memory space No Yes 4 Kbytes Allows the emulator to respond to target system No Yes interrupts during monitor execution Can be customized No Yes Resident in emulator firmware 68340 emulation Yes custom monitor must be assembled linked and loaded 124 j Chapter 5 Config
95. set source only when tracing assembly code This will result in optimum analyzer performance status binary Lists absolute status information in binary form hex Lists absolute status information in hexadecimal form mnemonic Lists absolute status information in mnemonic form Examples display trace count absolute lt RETURN gt display trace absolute status binary lt RETURN gt display trace mnemonic lt RETURN gt See Also The copy store and set commands 363 Chapter 11 Emulator Analyzer Interface Commands end locked release_system end end lt RETURN gt release _system This command terminates the current emulation session You can end the emulation session and keep the emulator in a locked state The current emulation configuration is stored so that you can continue the emulation session on reentry to the emulator You can select another measurement system when ending the current session You also can release the emulation system when ending the session so that others may use the emulator Note that pressing lt CTRL gt d performs the same operation as pressing end lt RETURN gt Pressing lt CTRL gt or lt CTRL gt 1 performs the same as end release_system lt RETURN gt If the command is specified without any options two different things can occur What occurs depends on whether the interface instance being ended is the only one currently executing If it is then thi
96. software breakpoint is set at the address and the program is run from the current program counter When using the command line you can combine the various types of run commands for example you can run from the transfer address until another address To run from the transfer address until the address of the global symbol main run from transfer_address until address main lt RETURN gt To stop break from user program execution Choose Execution Break Using the command line enter the break command This command generates a break to the background monitor 176 Chapter 6 Using the Emulator Executing User Programs If the user program executes a STOP or LPSTOP instruction you cannot break to the emulator s monitor state while the processor is in the stopped state The break command uses the emulation processor background debug mode BDM and the processor must be executing instructions in order to enter the BDM An interrupt from the target system will cause the 68340 to exit the stopped state then the break command will work normally Software breakpoints and the run until command allow you to stop execution at particular points in the user program Examples To break emulator execution from the user program to the monitor break lt RETURN gt To step high level source lines e Choose Execution Step Source and select one of the items from the cascade menu e Using the command line enter
97. states The parameters are as follows address The value following this softkey is searched for on the lines that monitor the emulation processor s address bus This is the default and is therefore not required on the command line when specifying an address expression and This lets you specify a combination of status and expression values when status is specified in the state specification 391 Chapter 11 Emulator Analyzer Interface Commands QUALIFIER data EXPR long_aligned not or range status lt STATUS gt thru Examples The value following this softkey is searched for on the lines that monitor the emulation processor s data bus An expression is a combination of numeric values symbols operators and parentheses specifying an address data status value See the EXPR syntax diagram for details Causes a mask to be applied to the address to force it to a long word boundary least significant hex digit is 0 4 8 or C This is necessary because the emulation bus analyzer may not otherwise see the address on the address bus due to the way the processor fetches instructions This specifies that the analyzer will search for the logical not of a specified state this includes any address that is not in the specified state This option allows you to specify multiple states to be captured during a trace measurement This indicates a range of addresses to be specified EXPR thru
98. system is operating correctly 459 Chapter 12 Error Messages Terminal Interface Messages 157 158 159 162 Unable to set trace vector to lt TRACE_ENTRY_address gt vector table write failed Cause In order to step when using a foreground monitor the trace vector must contain the address of the monitor program s TRACE_ENTRY label which equals the monitor base address plus 800H The step command reads the trace vector on each step to make sure it contains the correct address value If the trace vector does not contain the correct value the emulator attempts to write the correct value This error occurs when the vector table is in target memory and the write fails Action Make sure the vector base register points to the correct location in target memory and that the memory system is writeable and is operating correctly Trace vector modified to lt TRACE_ENTRY_address gt for single stepping Cause In order to step when using a foreground monitor the trace vector must contain the address of the monitor program s TRACE_ENTRY label which equals the monitor base address plus 800H The step command reads the trace vector on each step to make sure it contains the correct address value If the trace vector does not contain the correct value the emulator attempts to write the correct value This message informs you the emulator was successful in writing the correct value to the trace vector Unable to set trace vector
99. takes up the same number of bytes as the old instruction otherwise you may inadvertently modify code that follows 45 Chapter 1 Getting Started Step 12 Patch assembly language code 5 Type main 4 thru main 15 in the entry buffer By entering an address range in the entry buffer that is lt address gt thru lt address gt before clicking on the Patch action key you can modify a patch template file which allows you to insert as much or as little code as you wish Click on the Patch action key again A window running the vi editor again appears Suppose you want to patch the demo program so that the proc_spec_init function is called before the init_system function Suppose also that there is memory available at address 8800H Edit the patch template file as shown below PCHS700 Assembly Patch File PCHmain 4 s Date Tue Jun 30 14 06 06 MDT 1992 Dir users guest demo debug_env hp64751 Owner guest INCLUDE PCHSINC s ORG You may want to change this name You MUST set this address You may need to modify labels and operands of the Dea ea following code to match your assembler syntax Pie are see Patching Range main 4 thru main 15 Insert new code here _proc_spec_init _init_system main 1l6 You MUST set this address also Notice that symbols can be used in the patch file Exit out of the editor saving your changes won The file you just edited is assembled and the patch main m
100. terms of the external analyzer and stored in trace memory trigger The captured analyzer state about which other captured states are stored The trigger state specifies when the trace measurement is taken 565 566 Index about trigger position specification 237 absolute count in the trace display 261 absolute files 374 loading 160 loading without symbols 161 storing memory contents into 162 absolute status in the trace display 255 access mode 563 access size target memory 149 action keys 26 custom 322 operation 85 with command files 322 with entry buffer 83 85 activity measurements SPMT 269 283 additional symbols for address 277 confidence level 278 error tolerance 278 interpreting reports 276 mean 276 relative and absolute counts 277 standard deviation 277 symbols within range 277 trace command setup 271 address analyzer state qualifier softkey 235 391 address overlays memory mapping 141 address qualifiers 235 address range file format SPMT measurements 273 after trigger position specification 237 altitude operating and non operating environments 492 ambiguous address error message 141 analyzer 563 arming other HP 64700 Series analyzers 5 breaking emulator execution into the monitor 4 244 breaking execution of other HP 64700 Series emulators 5 567 Index count qualifiers 242 definition 4 general description 4 occurrence count 239 prestore q
101. that identify scheme files HP64_Softkey labelScheme Names the scheme file to use for labels and button text Values can be Label LANG or a custom scheme file name The default uses the LANG environment variable if it is set and if a scheme file named Softkey LANG exists in one of the directories searched for scheme files otherwise the default is Label HP64_Softkey platformScheme Names the subdirectory for the platform specific color size and input scheme files This resource should be set to the platform on which the X server is running and displaying the Graphical User Interface if it is different than the platform where the application is running Values can be HP UX SunOS pc xview or a custom platform scheme directory name HP64_Softkey colorScheme Names the color scheme file Values can be Color BW or a custom scheme file name 501 Chapter 14 Concepts X Resources and the Graphical User Interface HP64_Softkey sizeScheme Names the size scheme file which defines the fonts and the spacing used Values can be Large Small or a custom scheme file name HP64_Softkey inputScheme Names the input scheme file which specifies mouse and keyboard operation Values can be Input or a custom scheme file name The actual scheme file names take the form Softkey lt value gt Scheme File Names There are six scheme files provided with the Graphical User Interface Their names and brief descript
102. that it operates correctly in the target system The configuration tasks are grouped into the following sections e Using the configuration interface e Modifying the general configuration items e Reconfiguring the emulator configuration registers e Selecting the emulation monitor program e Mapping emulation and target system memory e Configuring the emulator pod e Setting the debug trace options The simulated I O feature and configuration questions are described in the Simulated I O User s Guide The interactive measurement configuration questions are described in the Making Coordinated Measurements chapter Configuring for Operation in the Target System After you plug the emulator into a target system and turn on power to the HP 64700 you need to configure the emulator so that it operates properly with your target system Before the emulator can operate in your target system you must Map memory Because the emulator can use target system memory or emulation memory or both it is necessary to map ranges of memory so that the emulator knows where to direct its accesses You can synchronize emulation memory accesses to the target system in order to more closely imitate target system memory For example if emulation memory 108 Chapter 5 Configuring the Emulator replaces slower target system memory that requires wait states synchronizing emulation memory to the target system causes wait states to be inse
103. the HP 64700 Card Cage Electrical Characteristics of the HP 64751 Emulator The emulator requires some control signals and power supply in order to run Therefore a target system is required in order to use the emulator The demo board that is included with the emulator is one such minimum target system DC Characteristics The DC characteristics of the HP 64751 emulator s active probe are listed in the following table 478 Chapter 13 Specifications and Characteristics Emulator Specifications and Characteristics DC Electrical Specifications Characteristic Symbol Min Max Unit Input High Voltage except clock VIH 2 0 Vcc V Input Low Voltage VIL GND 0 8 V Input Leakage Current GNDS lt Vin lt Vce Iin uA BR BGACK IRQx 2 5 2 5 Input High Current Im uA BERR DSACKx 25 RESET HALT 50 Input Low Current I mA BERR DSACKx 0 25 RESET HALT 1 0 Output High Voltage lon 0 8 mA _ Vou V A0 A23 AS BG D0 D15 DS R W 2 4 RMC SIZ0 SIZ1 FCO FC3 2 4 Output Low Voltage VoL V IoL 2 0mA A0 A23 SIZO SIZ1 FCO FC3 0 5 IoL 4 55mA R W RMC __ 0 5 IoL 20mA_ AS DO D15 DS 0 5 loL 14mA RESET HALT 0 5 Power Dissipation Pp W Ta 0 C 2 2 Ta 70 C 2 2 Capacitance Vin 0 V Ta 25 C f 1 MHz Cin 20 pF Load Capacitance CL pF A0 A31 R W SIZ0 SIZ1 FC0 FC3 100 All Other 50
104. the address and mnemonic or absolute columns in the trace list Values from one to 80 can be entered When address information is being displayed in terms of symbols in other words symbols on you may wish to increase the width of the address column to display more of the symbol information When trace information is displayed in mnemonic format you can additionally specify the width of symbols in the Opcode or Status column Examples To display the trace with the address column width set to 30 characters set width label 30 lt RETURN gt display trace lt RETURN gt race List FFset G More data off screen Opcode or Status prog init_system init_val_arr LINK W AB 6888 prog init_val_arr G4abaa82 4088 supr prgm word ds16 stack sysstack 4 07F84 8081 supr data long ds16 stack sysstackt 7F86 2FaC supr data word ds16 prog init_val_arr 80084 MOVEA L 88807156 AG prog init_val_arr 4 08806 0088 supr prgm word ds16 prog init_val_arr 4 08805 7156 supr prgm word ds16 prog init_val_arr Q 8888A MOVED a8080aG 01 prog init_val_arr 0888C NOP prog init_val_arr G GE MOVE L 01 08 prog init_val_arr 0861 ADO L DE DA prog init_val_arr 1l2 ADD L 01 08 prog init_val_arr 4 08814 LSL L 2 08 prog init_val_arr 0016 MOVE W 0041 00 AG DA L prog init_val_arr 8800815 0041 supr prgm word ds16 prog init_val_arr 4 0 81A 0588 supr prgm word ds16 260 Chapter 7 U
105. the trace Events can be selectively saved by using trace only to enter the specific events to be saved When this is used only the indicated states are stored in the trace memory See the QUALIFIER syntax This initiates a new trace after the results of the previous trace are displayed The trace will continue until a stop_trace or a new trace command is issued When using this option you cannot use the on_halt option Allows you to specify up to seven sequence terms including the trigger The analyzer must find each of these terms in the given order before searching for the trigger You are limited to four sequence terms if windowing is enabled See the SEQUENCING syntax pages for more details This represents the event on the emulation bus to be used as the starting ending or centering event for the trace See the TRIGGER syntax diagram When using this option you cannot include the on_halt option Selectively enables and disables analyzer operation based upon independent enable and disable terms This can be used as a simple storage qualifier Or you may use it to further qualify complex trigger specifications See the WINDOW syntax pages for details 422 Chapter 11 Emulator Analyzer Interface Commands trace Examples trace after 1000H lt RETURN gt trace only address range 1000H thru 1004H lt RETURN gt trace after address 1000H occurs 2 only address range 1000H thru 1004H break_on_trigger lt RETURN gt See
106. the trace buffer is deep enough 246 Chapter 7 Using the Emulation Analyzer Using the Sequencer To specify a global restart state e Use the restart option to the trace command When using the analyzer s sequencer an additional sequence restart term is also allowed This restart is a global restart that is it applies to all the sequence terms The restart term is a state which when captured before the analyzer has found the trigger state causes the search for the sequence of states to start over You can use the restart term to make certain some state does not occur in the sequence that triggers the analyzer Examples In the demo program suppose you wish to trigger on the following sequence of events the save_points function the interrupt_sim function and the do_sort function However you only want to trigger when the interrupt_sim calls the do_sort function In other words if the proc_specific function is entered before the do_sort function is entered you know interrupt_sim did not call do_sort this time and the analyzer should start searching again from the beginning Again suppose you wish to store only opcode fetches of the assembly language LINK A6 0 instruction data values that equal 4E56H To set up this sequencing trace specification enter the following trace command trace find_sequence save_points then interrupt_sim restart proc_specific trigger about do_sort only data 4e56h
107. then correct the condition and retry the command See message 608 Read PC failed during break Cause System failure or target condition Action Try again Disable breakpoint failed s Cause System failure or target condition 464 Chapter 12 Error Messages Terminal Interface Messages Action Run performance verification Terminal Interface py command and check target system 605 Undefined software breakpoint s Cause The emulator has encountered a software breakpoint in your program that was not inserted with the modify software_breakpoints set command Action Remove the breakpoint instructions in your code before assembly and link 606 Unable to run after CMB break Cause System failure or target condition Action Run performance verification Terminal Interface py command and check target system 608 Unable to break Cause This message is displayed if the emulator is unable to break to the monitor because the emulation processor is reset halted or is otherwise disabled Action First look at the emulation prompt and other status messages displayed to determine why the processor is stopped If reset by the emulation controller use the break command to break to the monitor If reset by the emulation system release that reset If halted try reset and break to get to the monitor If there is a bus grant wait for the requesting device to release the bus before retrying the command If there is no cl
108. to copy pod_command to copy error_log to copy event_log to lt command file gt log_commands to log_commands off N A N A N A N A vi lt file gt no_prompt_before_exit vi lt line gt lt file gt no_prompt_before_exit vi lt line gt lt file gt no_prompt_before_exit end File Exit Locked all windows save session end locked File Exit Released all windows release emulator end release_system 333 Chapter 11 Emulator Analyzer Interface Commands Pulldown Command Line Display Context pwd pws Display Memory display memory Display Memory Mnhemonic Display Memory Mnhemonic at PC Display Memory Mnemonic Previous Display Memory Hex bytes DisplayMemory Hex words DisplayMemory Hex long DisplayMemory Real short Display gt Memory Real long Display gt Memory At Display Memory Repetitively Display Data Values Display Data Values New gt lt type gt Display Data Values Add gt lt type gt display memory EXPR mnemonic display memory mnemonic at_pc display memory mnemonic previous_display display memory EXPR blocked bytes display memory EXPR blocked words display memory EXPR blocked long display memory EXPR real short display memory EXPR real long display memory EXPR display memory repetitively display data display data EXPR lt type gt display data EXPR
109. to display all or at least more of the characters from the symbol The interface displays absolute addresses as hex values Text pasted into the entry buffer replaces that which is currently there You cannot use paste to append text to existing text already in the entry buffer See To copy and paste from the entry buffer to the command line entry area for information about pasting the contents of the entry buffer into the command line entry area 81 Chapter 4 Entering Commands Using Menus the Entry Buffer and Action Keys Example A mouse click causes the interface to expand the highlight to include the symbol num_checks and paste the symbol into the entry buffer To paste the symbol num_checks into the entry buffer from the interface display area position the mouse pointer over the symbol and then click the paste mouse button Hewlett Packard Emulator Analyzer em68340 m68340 File Display Modify Execution Breakpoints Trace Settings Action keys l lt Demo gt Disp Sre Trace Run lt Your Key gt Make Disp Src Prev Run Xfer to Break Step Source Step Asm Memory mnemonic file main module main c address label data 91 extern void update_system update system variables 92 extern void interrupt_sim simulate an interrupt 93 extern void do_sort sets up ascii array and calls 94 95 mai
110. to locate the files 212 Chapter 6 Using the Emulator Using System Commands Examples To edit a file that defines a symbol Ene xDisplay Modify Erec uon Ereakpoints Trace Settings lt Your Key gt SEN Make ne Sre Se xfer to aa Break aes Step Asm Choosing this menu Global symbols in ecs x Procedure symbols item brings up a Procedure name Address range __ Segment terminal window realloc opaazAFa BBBG2BC5 libe with an edit session ee Set D t puts een open on the file Peep Display Local Symbols where the strnemp Display Parent Symbols i i i unlink highlighted symbol is update_system Cut Full Symbol Name defined lri Edit File Defining Symbol a write_hdwr 44841812 G G41868B prog Static symbols Symbol name Address range __ Segment AS QGF 156 stack JSR_ENTRY aaaa4sce mon STATUS M68340 Running in monitor Emulation trace complete 213 Chapter 6 Using the Emulator Using System Commands To edit a file at a source line Ene xDisplay Modify Execution Br akpolnts Trace Settings lt Your Key gt SEN Make ee Sre ae xfer to a Break ao Step Asm sp tmnemonic file update_sys module update_sys c Choosing this menu item brings up a terminal window old_datalcurr_loc temp current_temp old_datalcurr_loc humid current_humid with an edit session ee loci MAKEBAR lt ARGS
111. topic2 or paths relative to the product directory for example Xdemo general where the product directory is something like usr hp64000 inst emul 6475 1A 3 Set the enableDemo or enableTutorial resource to True 4 Define the demo index file by setting the demoPopupSub indexFile or tutorialPopupSub indexFile resource For example demoPopupSub indexFile users guest gui_demos index You can use absolute paths for example users guest Index paths relative to the directory in which the interface was started for example mydir indexfile or paths relative to the product directory for example Xdemo Index topics where the product directory is something like usr hp64000 inst emul 6475 1A 5 If you wish to define a default topic to be selected set the demoTopic or tutorialTopic resource to the topic string For example demoTopic About demos Refer to the previous To customize Graphical User Interface resources section for more detailed information on modifying resources 327 328 Part 3 Reference Descriptions of the product in a dictionary or encyclopedia format 329 Part 3 330 11 Emulator Analyzer Interface Commands 331 Emulator Analyzer Interface Commands This chapter describes the emulator analyzer interface commands in alphabetical order First the syntax conventions are described and the commands are summarized How Pulldown Me
112. unrecoverable error occurred during a transfer operation Action Retry the transfer If it fails again make sure that the data communications parameters are set correctly on the host and on the HP 64700 Also make sure that you are using the correct command options both on the HP 64700 and on the host 463 Chapter 12 Error Messages Terminal Interface Messages 412 413 415 600 602 603 604 Retry limit exceeded transfer failed Cause The limit for repeated attempts to send a record during a transfer operation was exceeded therefore the transfer was aborted Action Retry the transfer Make sure you are using the correct command options for both the host and the HP 64700 The data communications parameters need to be set correctly for both devices Also if you are in a remote location from the host it is possible that line noise may cause the failure Transfer failed to start Cause Communication link or transfer protocol incorrect Action Check link and transfer options Timeout receiver failed to respond Cause Communication link or transfer protocol incorrect Action Check link and transfer options Adjust PC failed during break Cause System failure or target condition Action Run performance verification Terminal Interface py command and check target system Break failed Cause The break command was unable to break the emulator to the monitor Action Determine why the break failed
113. up to 1024 states not all of which can appear on the screen at the same time However you can reposition the display on the screen with the keys described below The lt Up arrow gt and lt Down arrow gt or roll up and roll down keys move the display up or down on the screen one line at a time The lt PREV gt and lt NEXT gt or page up and page down keys allow you to move the display up or down a page at a time The lt CTRL gt f and lt CTRL gt g keys allow you to move the display left or right respectively These keys are used when the width of the address or mnemonic absolute columns is increased so that not all the trace display data can be displayed across the screen 229 Chapter 7 Using the Emulation Analyzer The Basics of Starting Stopping and Displaying Traces To change the trace depth Using the command line enter the display trace depth command The display trace depth command allows you to specify the number of states that are displayed By reducing the trace depth you can shorten the time it takes for the interface to upload the trace information You can increase the trace depth to view more states of the current trace The maximum number of trace states is 1024 when counting is turned off 512 otherwise The minimum trace depth is 9 If you wish to reduce the number of states that are displayed the display trace depth command must be entered before the trace command You cannot use this comman
114. update system variables Entry buffer recall extern void interrupt_sim simulate an interrupt button extern void do_sort sets up ascii array and calls 94 95 maint 36 I7 init_system Display area 98 proc_spec_init 99 100 while true 16 Scroll bar aou 102 update_system 183 num_checkst 164 interrupt_sim amp num_checks 105 if graph 106 graph_data Status line Ne 107 proc_specific STATUS cws main main c Command line Ji isplay memory main mnemonic Command line en area run il trace step display modify i break end ETC Command Cursor Sackup Forward Clear to end Clear Help Softkey pushbuttons Command buttons Includes command Cursor buttons for command line area recall button control Menu Bar Provides pulldown menus from which you select commands When menu items are not applicable they appear half bright and do not respond to mouse clicks Action Keys User defined pushbuttons You can label these pushbuttons and define the action to be performed 26 Chapter 1 Getting Started Entry Buffer Wherever you see in a pulldown menu the contents of the entry buffer are used in that command You can type values into the entry buffer or you can cut and paste values into the entry buffer from the display area or from the command line entry area You can also set up actio
115. variable to include the usr hp64000 bin directory and if you have installed software in a directory other than you need to set the HP64000 environment variable 541 Chapter 15 Installation Installing HP 9000 Software j The following instructions show you how to set these variables at the UNIX prompt Modify your profile or login file if you wish these environment variables to be set when you log in The following instructions also assume that you re using sh or ksh if you re using csh environment variables are set using the setenv lt VARIABLE gt lt value gt command Set the DISPLAY environment variable by entering DISPLA Y lt hostname gt lt server_number gt lt screen_number gt export DISPLAY For example DISPLAY myhost 0 0 export DISPLAY Consult the X Window documentation supplied with the UNIX system documentation for an explanation of the DISPLAY environment variable Set the HP64000 environment variable For example if you installed the HP 64000 software relative to the root directory you would enter HP64000 usr hp64000 export HP64000 If you installed the software relative to a directory other than the root directory it is strongly recommended that you use a symbolic link to make the software appear to be under usr hp64000 For example if you installed the software relative to directory users team you would enter In s users team usr hp64000 usr hp64000 I
116. variables will be at run time and therefore cannot build a corresponding symbol tree entry with run time address Here are some examples of referencing different symbols in the above programs control c main control c port_one porthand c utils c delay The last example above only works with IEEE 695 object module format the HP object module format does not support referencing of include files that generate program code porthand c process_port i porthand c process_port BLOCK_1 1 Notice how you can reference different variables with matching identifiers by specifying the complete scope You also can save typing by specifying a scope with cws For example if you are making many measurements involving symbols in the file porthand c you could specify cws porthand c process_port Then as BLOCK_1 i are prefixed with porthand c process_port before the database lookup If a symbol search with the current working symbol prefix is unsuccessful the last scope on the current working symbol is stripped The symbol you specified is then retested with the modified current working symbol Note that this does not change the actual current working symbol For example if you set the current working symbol as cws porthand c process_port BLOCK_1 417 Chapter 11 Emulator Analyzer Interface Commands SYMB See Also and made a reference to symbol i2 the retrieval utilities attempt to find a symbol called porthand c proc
117. will interpret the above command to be main procedure With langinfo ADA SRU will interpret the above command to be main module 400 Chapter 11 Emulator Analyzer Interface Commands set C Identifies ANSI C as the language so SRU can use the C hierarchy to disambiguate symbols ADA Identifies ADA as the language so SRU can use the ADA hierarchy to disambiguate symbols C_IEE695 Identifies C_IEEE 695 as the language so SRU can use the C_IEEE 695 hierarchy to disambiguate symbols Note An alternate method for making the langinfo specification is to use the environment variable HP64SYMORDER By making the following entry in your profile the langinfo setting will always be C for example HP64SYMORDER C I want to use the C disambiguating hierarchy export HP64SYMORDER let children processes know about it noupdate When using multiple windows or terminals and specifying this option the display buffer in that window or terminal will not update when a new measurement completes Displays showing memory contents are not updated when a command executes that could have caused the values in memory to change modify memory load etc number_of_ This allows you to specify the number of source lines displayed for the actual source_lines processor instructions to which they correlate Only source lines up to the previous actual source line will be displayed Using this option you can specify how many com
118. your command again Starting address greater than ending address Cause You specified a starting address that is greater than the ending address Action Specify a starting address that is less than or equal to the ending address Starting new session continue file loaded Cause This is a status message The emulator was started using a new emulation session and the continue file loaded properly Starting new session user interface defaulted Cause The emulator was started using a new emulation session and the user interface was set to default selections Action Call your HP Service Representative Status unknown run emul700 1 lt LOGICAL NAME gt Cause The host system cannot determine the status of the emulator Action To verify communication between the emulator and the host system and display the emulator status enter the emul700 1 lt logical name gt command The 447 Chapter 12 Error Messages Graphical Softkey Interface Messages Unnumbered emulator logical name is located in the usr hp64000 etc 64700tab net or 64700tab file Stepping aborted number steps completed lt STEPS TAKEN gt Cause Stepping aborted because lt CTRL gt c or software breakpoint was hit guarded memory was accessed or some other kind of error occurred Action See the error log display for any abnormal errors Correct those errors and then step again Stepping complete Cause Stepping was completed successfully
119. 0 10329 10330 10331 10332 10350 10351 10352 Chapter 12 Error Messages Graphical Softkey Interface Messages Numbered Emulator locked by user lt USER NAME gt Cause You tried to start an emulator interface but your attempt failed because the emulator is already in use by someone else Action Current user must release the emulator Emulator locked by another user interface Cause You tried to start an emulator interface but your attempt failed because the emulator is already in use by someone else Action Current user must release the emulator HP64700 I O channel in use by emulator lt LOGICAL NAME gt Cause You tried to start an emulator interface but your attempt failed because the emulator is already in use by someone else Action Current user must release the emulator Cannot default emulator already in use Cause You tried to start an emulator interface but your attempt failed because the emulator is already in use by someone else Action Current user must release the emulator Cannot interpret emulator output Cause There may be characters dropped in the information returned from the emulator Action Ignore this message unless it becomes frequent If it becomes frequent you may have a fatal error call your HP 64700 representative Exceeded maximum 64700 command line length Cause Your command is longer than 240 characters Action Shorten the command Incompatible wit
120. 119 CMB coordinated measurement bus 298 EXECUTE line 300 342 HP 64700 connection 301 READY line 299 signals 299 TRIGGER line 299 cmb_execute command 306 342 color scheme 316 320 502 column width trace display option 260 columns in main display area 317 command buttons 27 command files 376 other things to know about 100 passing parameters 99 command line 27 Command Recall dialog box 28 Command Recall dialog box operation 94 copy and paste to from entry buffer 84 editing entry area with popup menu 93 editing entry area with pushbuttons 92 entering commands 91 entry area 27 569 Index executing commands 91 help 94 keyboard use of 95 97 on line help 97 recalling commands with dialog box 94 turning on or off 90 317 command paste mouse button 29 Command Recall dialog box operation 86 command select mouse button 29 commands 95 combining on a single command line 95 completion 95 editing in command line entry area 92 93 entering in command line 91 executing in command line 91 keyboard entry 95 line erase 96 map 142 recall 96 recalling with dialog box 94 summary 339 word selection 96 communications ports electrical characteristics 490 physical characteristics 491 comparison of foreground background monitors 124 configuration context displaying from configuration window 117 configuration emulator background states tracing 151 breaks on writes t
121. 2 Chapter 7 Using the Emulation Analyzer Qualifying Trigger and Store Conditions The trace listing above shows that the program loops 4 times for each call of the do_sort function To trace until the analyzer is halted Choose Trace Until Stop Using the command line enter the trace on_halt command The trace on_halt command allows you to prevent triggering In other words the trace runs until you enter the stop_trace command The trace on_halt command is the same as tracing before a state that never occurs The trace on_halt command is useful for example when you wish to trace the states leading up to a break into the monitor Suppose your program breaks on an access to guarded memory To trace the states that lead up to the break enter the trace on_halt command and run the program When the break occurs the emulator is running in the background monitor and the analyzer is no longer capturing states To display the states leading up to the break enter the stop_trace command and the display trace command if traces are not currently being displayed When the on_halt option is used in a trace command the trigger condition and position options as well as the repetitively and break_on_trigger options cannot be included in the command Also note that this does not work the same when using a foreground monitor unless the processor becomes halted because the analyzer continues to capture states when the break to mon
122. 2 overlapping addresses memory mapping 141 parameter passing in command files 99 parent symbol displaying from symbols screen 169 paste mouse button 29 PATH UNIX environment variable 65 perf out SPMT output file 274 288 293 295 384 perf32 SPMT report generator utility 268 293 294 interpreting reports 276 289 options 295 using the 295 performance measurements See software performance measurements 582 Index performance_measurement_end command 384 performance_measurement_initialize command 385 386 performance_measurement_run command 387 388 physical characteristics of the emulator 490 pin extender 60 platform HP 9000 memory needs 508 HP 9000 minimum performance 508 SPARCsystem memory needs 509 SPARCsystem minimum performance 509 platform scheme 316 501 plug in 52 pod commands 389 390 copy command 346 copying to file 216 display command 352 display screen 104 keyboard input 104 popup menus command line editing with 93 hand pointer indicates presence 27 79 positioning the trace display left right 229 positioning the trace display up down 229 power cables connecting 533 correct type 533 power failure during firmware update 561 power requirements of emulator probe 478 prestore 241 prestore qualifier 241 prestore qualifiers 241 564 primary branches analyzer sequencer 564 processor type 66 progflash example 558 program activity measurements SPMT 269 276
123. 2F2 aaaa72F4 G0072F 6 00072F8 00072FA 200 Chapter 6 Using the Emulator Displaying and Modifying Memory To display memory in blocked byte format display memory ascii_old_data blocked bytes lt RETURN gt Memory sp tblocked update address ihex pagar 2DA E1 26 28 28 B0007 2E2 E9 50 61 73 aa72EA F 1 20 37 36 Bagar 2F2 F9 532 27 869 agaa72FA 81 45 41 98007382 89 6E 28 9 84738A 11 45 41 a aa73i2 19 65 20 aaa731A 21 45 41 ggaa7322 29 45 41 9888732A 31 45 41 98807332 39 41 08733A 41 41 9aa87342 49 41 a8734A 51 41 ggaa7352 59 41 868735A 61 41 mmmmmmmmma m3 ME woo D D mu a OoUODOOOCODOOCOSE0CKF OF N jan u o s Wen c Gen n Dien a o x een a b a Gon a 4 6 4 7 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 5 6 anannnanannnanazor ADADADAADAADAoA mmmmmmmmm To display memory in real number format Place an absolute or symbolic address in the entry buffer then choose Display Memory gt Real and select the size from the cascade menu Using the command line enter the display memory lt address gt real lt size gt command Displays memory as a list of real number values beginning at the address in the entry buffer Short means four byte real numbers and long means eight byte real numbers 201 Chapter 6 Using the Emulator Displaying and Modifying Memory Examples To display memory in 64 bit real number format display memory real long lt RETURN gt Me
124. 32 copy command 345 display command 165 352 initializing the performance measurement with 273 to file 216 locked end command option 72 log_commands command 376 377 map command 142 mapping memory 133 147 memory 345 activity measurements SPMT 269 276 characterization of 135 contents listed as asterisk 345 copy command 345 display command 356 359 displaying 198 displaying at an address 202 displaying repetitively 203 dual port emulation 120 loading programs into 160 mapping 133 147 mnemonic format display 199 modify command 380 modifying 203 re assignment of emulation memory blocks in mapper 140 store command 410 to file 215 memory mapping block size 133 function code specification 141 overlaid addresses 141 resolution of mapped ranges 133 using emulation memory in place of target 142 580 memory recommendations HP 9000 508 SPARCsystem 509 menus editing command line with popup 93 hand pointer means popup 27 79 pulldown operation with keyboard 77 pulldown operation with mouse 76 77 messages Terminal Interface error 453 mnemonic information in trace listing 256 mnemonic memory display 33 199 setting the source symbol modes 206 modes source symbol 206 modify command 378 383 configuration 379 keyboard_to_simio 380 memory 380 register 197 381 software_breakpoints 381 modify_command trace command option 230 module duration measurements SPMT 284 module u
125. 32 report generator to look at the data saved in the perf out file Note that the perf out file is a binary file Do not try to read it with the UNIX more or cat commands The perf32 report generator utility described in the following section must be used to read the contents of the perf out file To cause the processed trace information to be dumped to the perf out file performance_measurement_end lt RETURN gt 294 Chapter 8 Making Software Performance Measurements Running Measurements and Creating Reports To create a performance measurement report Use the perf32 command at the UNIX prompt The perf32 report generator utility must be used to read the information in the perf out file and other files dumped by the SPMT in other words renamed perf out files The perf32 utility is run from the UNIX shell You can fork a shell while in the Softkey Interface and run perf32 or you can exit the Softkey Interface and run perf32 Options to perf32 A default report containing all performance measurement information is generated when the perf32 command is used without any options The options available with perf32 allow you to limit the information in the generated report These options are described below h Produce outputs limited to histograms S Produce a summary limited to the statistical data p Produce a summary limited to the program activity m Produce a summary limited to the memory activity
126. 40 16 78 MHz HP 64751 Num Characteristic Symbol Min Max Min Max Unit 16 CLKOUT High to AS DS tcusz 60 O5tcyc 40 ns R W High Impedance 60 60 ns 17 AS DS CS Negated to R W High tSNRN 15 15 ns 18 CLKOUT High to R W High tmr 0 30 0 30 ns 20 CLKOUT High to R W Low tcmRL 0 30 0 30 ns 21 R W High to AS CS Asserted tRAAA 15 15 ns 22 R W Low to DS Asserted Write tRASA 70 70 ns 23 CLKOUT High to Data Out Valid tCHDO 30 33 ns 24 Data Out Valid to Negating Edge of AS CS tpvasn 15 15 ns Synchronous Write 25 DS CS Negated to Data Out Invalid tSNDOI 15 15 ns Data Out Hold 26 Data Out Valid to DS Asserted Write tDVSA 15 12 ns 27 Data In Valid to CLKOUT Low Data Setup tDICL 5 8 ns 27A Late BERR HALT tBELcL 20 20 ns BKPT Asserted to CLKOUT Low 2 ns Setup Time 28 AS DS Negated to DSACKx BERR HALT tson 0 80 0 80 ns 29 DS Negated to Data In Invalid Data In Hold tsnp1 0 0 ns 29A DS Negated to Data In High Impedance tSHDI 60 60 ns 487 Chapter 13 Specifications and Characteristics Emulator Specifications and Characteristics AC Electrical Specifications 64751 6
127. 4000 etc 64700tab net or 64700tab file lt LOGICAL NAME gt End released Cause This is a status message The emulation session is being exited with the end release_system command When the session has ended the emulator is released meaning that others can access and use it When you restart the emulation session later the new session will use all default settings The emulator logical name is located in the usr hp64000 etc 64700tab net or 64700tab file Ending released Cause This is a status message The emulation session is being exited with the end release_system The emulator will be released for others to access and use it 437 Chapter 12 Error Messages Graphical Softkey Interface Messages Unnumbered Error display size is lt LINES gt lines by lt COLUMNS gt columns It must be at least 24 by 80 Cause You tried to specify an incorrect window size Action Set the window size accordingly then start the emulation session The size of the window must be a minimum of 24 lines rows by 80 columns to operate an emulation session Error in configuration process Error starting configuration process Cause Unexpected configuration error Action Verify proper software installation and call your HP 64000 representative Fatal error from function lt ADDRESS OF FUNCTION gt Cause This is an unexpected fatal system error Action Cycle power on the emulator and start again If this is a persistent problem
128. 487C 0000487C 00000000 0 BYTE mon NORMAL CODE 0000487C 000049C5 0000014A 2 WORD envdata NORMAL DATA 00007000 00007155 00000156 4 LONG data NORMAL DATA 00007156 00007721 000005CC 2 WORD idata 00007722 00007722 00000000 0 BYTE udata 00007722 00007722 00000000 0 BYTE libdata NORMAL DATA 00007724 00007727 00000004 4 LONG libedata NORMAL DATA 00007728 00008153 00000A2C 2 WORD mondata NORMAL DATA 00008154 00008177 00000024 2 WORD stack NORMAL DATA 0000B000 00012FFF 00008000 4 LONG heap NORMAL DATA 00013000 O0016FFD 00003FFE 4 LONG Notice the ABSOLUTE DATA CODE and ROM sections occupy locations 0 through 49CS5H Because the contents of these sections will eventually reside in target system ROM this area should be characterized as ROM when mapped This will prevent these locations from being written over accidentally If breaks on writes to ROM are enabled instructions that attempt to write to these locations will cause emulator execution to break into the monitor Also notice the DATA sections occupy locations 7000H through 8177H and OBOOOH through 16FFDH Since these sections are written to they should be characterized as RAM when mapped 137 Chapter 5 Configuring the Emulator Mapping Memory Enter the following commands to map memory for the above program delete all lt RETURN gt 0O thru 6fffh emulation rom lt RETURN gt 7000h thru 16fffh emulation ram lt RETURN gt The resulting memory mapper sc
129. 5 trace listing to 215 file extensions EA and EB configuration files 115 file formats address ranges for SPMT measurements 273 time ranges for SPMT measurements 287 File Selection dialog box operation 86 87 firmware updates 5 firmware version 560 foreground 123 564 foreground monitor 124 advantages disadvantages 124 customizing 124 example of using 130 memory space required 124 selecting 123 132 single step processor 126 128 130 source file location 124 foreground operation tracing 151 formal parameters command files 99 forward command syntax 371 577 Index function codes lines to analyzer 234 mapping memory 141 memory mapping 141 need for separately linked modules 141 functions step over 199 global restart qualifier 247 564 global symbols 33 232 352 copy command 345 display command 164 352 initializing the SPMT measurement with 273 to file 216 ground strap 52 guarded memory accesses 135 141 243 halfbright 91 92 halt trace 227 hand pointer 27 79 hardware HP 9000 memory needs 508 HP 9000 minimum performance 508 HP 9000 minimums overview 508 SPARCsystem memory needs 509 SPARCsystem minimum performance 509 SPARCsystem minimums overview 509 help command line 94 372 373 copy command 345 help index 89 on line 97 softkey driven information 97 help index displaying 89 hexadecimal numbers 232 HP 64700 Operating Environment minimum version 509
130. 5C 01 08 ns 4880 155E 04 08 ns 8841564 01 08 ns 6861562 2 08 ns 8861564 041 00 AB DA L ns 4880 156A 029 42 AB DA L uS 00001570 04 AB DA L E uS 86861574 08 AG DA L i uS 98861576 uS 0157A 1 01 ns aaag15 C uS 880157E aa08024 DA ns ZS2ZDWDA200RZICDDIIAZALZZ To return to displaying all cycles display trace disassemble_from_line_number 66 all_cycles lt RETURN gt 254 Chapter 7 Using the Emulation Analyzer Modifying the Trace Display To display the trace in absolute format e Use the absolute option to the display trace command The absolute trace display option allows you to display status information in absolute format binary hex or mnemonic The absolute status mnemonic display is the same as default mnemonic display except that opcodes are not disassembled Examples To display the trace in absolute format with the status information as binary values display trace absolute status binary lt RETURN gt Label Address Absolute Status time count Base hex binary relative 6864 154E 0000111111011101 720 48881558 0010111111611181 688 888 12F84 0011111110061011 720 886 12F86 0611111111861011 720 48861552 6616111111611161 720 48861554 6616111111611161 720 88841556 0010111111611181 720 98861558 0010111111611181 720 8888 155A 0010111111811181 720 9888 155C 0010111111811181 720 8886 155E 6616111111611161 720 44441568 0010111111011101 680
131. 6 and lower active probe board numbers Read and Write Cycles Vcc 5 0 Vdc 5 GND 0 Vdc Ta TL to Tp MC68340 16 78 MHz HP 64751 Num Characteristic Symbol Min Max Min Max Unit 6 CLKOUT High to Address FC SIZE RMC tCHAV 0 30 0 30 ns Valid 7 CLKOUT High to Address Data FC SIZE tCHAZx 0 60 0 60 ns RMC High Impedance 8 CLKOUT High to Address FC SIZE RMC tCHAZn 0 0 ns Invalid 9 CLKOUT Low to AS DS tcrsa 3 30 0 33 ns CS IACK 3 30 3 30 ns IFETCH IPIPE Asserted 3 30 ns 9A AS to DS or CS Asserted Read tstsa 15 15 15 15 ns 11 Address FC SIZE RMC Valid to AS CS tavsa 15 15 ns and DS Read Asserted 12 CLKOUT Low to AS DS tcrs 3 30 0 33 ns CS IACK 3 30 3 30 ns IFETCH IPIPE Negated 3 30 ns 13 AS DS CS IACK Negated to Address FC tsNAI 15 15 ns SIZE Invalid Address Hold 14 AS CS and DS Read Width Asserted tswa 100 100 ns 14A DS Width Asserted Write tswaw 45 45 ns 14B AS CS IACK and DS READ Width tswDW 40 40 ns Asserted Sync Cycle 15 AS DS CS Width Negated tn 40 40 ns 486 Chapter 13 Specifications and Characteristics Emulator Specifications and Characteristics AC Electrical Specifications 64751 66506 and lower active probe board numbers Read and Write Cycles Vcc 5 0 Vdc 5 GND 0 Vdc Ta TL to Tp MC683
132. 62 Chapter 12 Error Messages Terminal Interface Messages 318 Count out of bounds s Cause You specified an occurrence count less than 1 or greater than 65535 Action Re enter the command specifying a count value from 1 to 65535 400 Record checksum failure Cause During a transfer operation the checksum specified in a file did not agree with that calculated by the HP 64700 Action Retry the transfer operation If the failure is repeated make sure that both your host and the HP 64700 data communications parameters are configured correctly 401 Records expected s records received s Cause The HP 64700 received a different number of records than it expected to receive during a transfer operation Action Retry the transfer If the failure is repeated make sure that the data communications parameters are set correctly on the host and on the HP 64700 Refer to the Installation chapter for details 410 File transfer aborted Cause A transfer operation was aborted due to a break received most likely a lt CTRL gt c from the keyboard Action If you typed lt CTRL gt c you probably did so because you thought the transfer was about to fail Retry the transfer making sure to use the correct command options If you are unsuccessful make sure that the data communications parameters are set correctly on the host and on the HP 64700 then retry the operation 411 Severe error detected file transfer failed Cause An
133. 6506 and lower active probe board numbers Read and Write Cycles Vcc 5 0 Vdc 5 GND 0 Vdc Ta TL to Tp MC68340 16 78 MHz HP 64751 Num Characteristic Symbol Min Max Min Max Unit 30 CLKOUT Low to Data In Invalid tCLDI 15 15 ns Synchronous Hold 30Af CLKOUT Low to Data In High Impedance tCLDH 90 90 ns 31 DSACKx Asserted to Data In Valid tDADI 50 50 ns 32 HALT and RESET Input Transition Time tRHrf 0 200 0 200 ns 33 CLKOUT Low to BG Asserted tcea 30 30 ns 34 CLKOUT Low to BG Negated tCLBN 30 30 ns 35 BR Asserted to BG Asserted RMC Not tBRAGA 1 1 clks Asserted 37 BGACK Asserted to BG Negated tGAGN 1 2 5 1 2 clks 39 BG Width Negated tGH 2 2 clks 39A BG Width Asserted tGA 1 1 clks 46 R W Width Asserted Write or Read tRWA 150 150 ns 46A R W Width Asserted Sync Write or Read tRWAS 90 90 ns 47A Asynchronous Input Setup Time tAIST 5 5 ns 47B Asynchronous Input Hold Time tAIHT 15 15 ns 488 DSACKx Asserted to BERR HALT Asserted tDABA 30 30 ns 53 Data Out Hold from CLKOUT High tDOCH 0 0 ns 54 CLKOUT High to Data Out High Impedance tCHDH 30 30 ns 55 R W Asserted to Data Bus Impedance Change tRADC 40 40 ns 488 Chapter 13 Specifications and Characteristics Emulator Specifications and Characteristics AC Electrical Specifications
134. A for the following clock cycle o 6 To ensure coherency during every operand transfer BG will not be asserted in response to BR until after cycles of the current operand transfer are complete and RMC is negated 7 In the absence of DSACKx BERR is an asychronous input using the asychronous setup time 47 8 Address Access Time 2tcyc tCW tCHAV tDICL 112 2 ns 16 78 MHz clock Chip Select Access Time 2teyc tCLSA tDICL 84 2 ns 16 78 MHz clock HP 64751 NOTES A IFETCH and IPIPE are not driven to the target system B The emulator does not respond to BKPT from the target system C The emulator does not drive data to the target system during show cycles 489 Chapter 13 Specifications and Characteristics Emulator Specifications and Characteristics Electrical Characteristics of the HP 64700 The electrical characteristics of the HP 64700 communication ports are as follows Communications Serial Port RS 232 C DCE or DTE to 38 4 Kbaud RS 422 DCE to 460 8 Kbaud BNC labeled Input The signal must drive approximately 4 mA at 2 V Edge TRIGGER IN OUTSensitive Minimum pulse width is approximately 25 ns Output Driven active high only equals 2 4V into a 50 ohm load Physical Dimensions of Emulator Probe There must be enough clearance in the target system to allow the emulation probe to be plugged in and the cable routed from the target system to the emulator
135. About this Manual We ve added this manual to the Agilent website in an effort to help you support your product This manual is the best copy we could find it may be incomplete or contain dated information If we find a more recent copy in the future we will add it to the Agilent website Support for Your Product Agilent no longer sells or supports this product Our service centers may be able to perform calibration if no repair parts are needed but no other support from Agilent is available You will find any other available product information on the Agilent Test amp Measurement website www tm agilent com HP References in this Manual This manual may contain references to HP or Hewlett Packard Please note that Hewlett Packard s former test and measurement semiconductor products and chemical analysis businesses are now part of Agilent Technologies We have made no changes to this manual copy In other documentation to reduce potential confusion the only change to product numbers and names has been in the company name prefix where a product number name was HP XXXX the current name number is now Agilent XXXX For example model number HP8648A is now model number Agilent 8648A User s Guide for the Graphical User Interface HP 64751 68340 Emulator HP 64704 Analyzer Notice Hewlett Packard makes no warranty of any kind with regard to this material including but not limited to the implied warranties of merchantability a
136. Answer yes to the Modify interactive measurement specification question Answer receive to the Should CMBT drive or receive Trig question You could also drive the emulation analyzer trigger to the CMB over the trig2 internal line by specifying that the CMBT should receive trig2 and that the emulation analyzer should drive trig2 309 Chapter 9 Making Coordinated Measurements Using Trigger Signals j To drive the emulation analyzer trigger signal to the BNC connector Enter the modify configuration command Answer yes to the Modify interactive measurement specification question Answer receive to the Should BNC drive or receive Trig question You could also drive the emulation analyzer trigger to the BNC over the trig2 internal line by specifying that the BNC should receive trig2 and that the emulation analyzer should drive trig2 To break emulator execution on signal from CMB Enter the modify configuration command Answer yes to the Modify interactive measurement specification question Answer drive to the Should CMBT drive or receive Trig1 question You could also break emulator execution on a trigger signal from the CMB over the trig2 internal line by specifying that the CMB should drive trig2 and that the emulator break should receive trig2 310 j Chapter 9 Making Coordinated Measurements Using Trigger Signals To break emulator execution on signal f
137. B interaction does not have to be enabled in order to use either of these commands When you enable CMB interaction you only specify how the emulator will react to the CMB EXECUTE signal All emulators whose CMB interaction is enabled will break into the monitor when any one of those emulators breaks into its monitor To disable synchronous measurements Enter the specify run disable command You can disable the emulator s interaction with the CMB by using the specify run disable command When interaction is disabled the emulator ignores the CMB EXECUTE and READY lines 306 Chapter 9 Making Coordinated Measurements Using Trigger Signals Using Trigger Signals The HP 64700 contains two internal lines trig and trig2 over which trigger signals can pass from the emulator or analyzer to other HP 64700s on the Coordinated Measurement Bus CMB or other instruments connected to the BNC connector You can configure the internal lines to make connections between the emulator analyzer CMB connector or BNC connector Measurements that depend on these connections are called interactive measurements or coordinated measurements To configure the internal trig1 and trig2 lines you must enter the modify configuration command and then answer yes to the Modify interactive measurement specification question When you do this the following display appears Interactive Measurement Specification BNC lt lt gt gt
138. Br simulate an interrupt id do 5 ii array and calls combs g main main LINK W AG 000 pr maint agggaa2 0000 supr pram word rd ds16 sysstactHBGG7F94 8881 supr data long wr ds16 sysstact 4GG7FI6 2FF supr data word wr ds16 HHAHHHHHHHmain c line g7 sabd ainsi nai aa nana Aa A A pr maint 84aG4444 JSR init init_system pri maint 60886 8088 supr prgm word rd ds16 728 ns pr main gg8888 14E6 supr prgm word rd ds16 720 ns ARUMIRMBtmai n c line 98 PTTrrercerreerrrer renter rrr rer rer rrr yt The default display mode settings cause source lines and symbols to appear in the trace list Captured states are numbered in the left hand column of the trace list Line 0 always contains the state that caused the analyzer to trigger Other columns contain address information data values opcode or status information and time count information 42 Chapter 1 Getting Started Step 11 Display memory at an address in a register Step 11 Display memory at an address ina register 1 Click on the Disp REG action key Or using the command line enter the name of the command file mematreg lt RETURN gt A command file dialog box appears or a prompt appears in the command line 2 Move the mouse pointer to the dialog box text entry area type A7 and click on the OK button Or if the prompt is in the command line A7 lt RETURN gt Memory sp bytes blocked update address data ts
139. Chapter 7 Using the Emulation Analyzer Qualifying Trigger and Store Conditions State Qualifiers Whenever a state can be specified in the trace command trigger state storage state prestore state etc you will see the following softkeys that allow you to qualify the state address The value following this softkey is searched for on the lines that monitor the emulation processor s address bus data The value following this softkey is searched for on the lines that monitor the emulation processor s data bus status The value following this softkey is searched for on the lines that monitor other emulation processor signals When a value is specified without one of these softkeys it is assumed to be an address value Predefined Values for Qualifiers When you specify status qualifiers for analyzer states by pressing the status softkey you will be given the following softkeys which are predefined values for the qualifiers 235 Chapter 7 Using the Emulation Analyzer Qualifying Trigger and Store Conditions Predefined Equates for Analyzer Status Equate Value Description buserror 0XXXX XOXX XXXX XXXXD BERR active code OxxxO XXXX XXXX XXXxbD code execution cycles code_tfr Oxx00 XXXX XXXX XXxxb first instruction following a pipeline flush cpu OXXXX XXXX XXxx 111xb CPU space function code csx_byte Oxxxx xx11 Oxxx xxxxb byte data transfer chip select active DSACKx not internally generated csx
140. Display 2 Default All Settings Clicking this checkbox changes all display mode settings to their defaults Clicking this button saves your Clicking this button saves Clicking this button cancels your changes and closes the dialog your changes and leaves the changes and closes the dialog box box dialog box open 207 Chapter 6 Using the Emulator Changing the Interface Settings Source Symbols View Source in Memory specifies whether source lines are included mixed with assembly code or excluded from mnemonic memory displays Source in Trace specifies whether source lines are included mixed with stored states or excluded from trace displays Symbolic Addresses specifies whether symbols are included in displays Tab Expansion sets the number of spaces displayed for tabs in source lines Source Symbols View Label Field sets the width in characters of the address field in the trace list or label symbols field in any of the other displays Mnemonic Field sets the width in characters of the mnemonic field in memory mnemonic trace list and register step mnemonic displays It also changes the width of the status field in the trace list Symbols in Mnemonic Field sets the maximum width of symbols in the mnemonic field of the trace list memory mnemonic and register step mnemonic displays Source Lines sets the width in characters of the source lines in the memory mnemonic display Auto Update Memory D
141. Examples To recall commands Press lt CTRL gt r or lt CTRL gt b The most recent 20 commands you enter are stored in a buffer and may be recalled by pressing lt CTRL gt r Pressing lt CTRL gt b cycles forward through the recall buffer For example to recall and execute the command prior to the last command lt CTRL gt r lt CTRL gt r lt RETURN gt To edit commands Use the lt Left arrow gt lt Right arrow gt lt Tab gt lt Shift gt lt Tab gt lt Insert char gt lt Back space gt lt Delete char gt lt Clear line gt and lt CTRL gt u keys The lt Left arrow gt and lt Right arrow gt keys move the cursor single spaces to the left or right The lt Tab gt and lt Shift gt lt Tab gt keys move the cursor to the next or previous word on the command line The lt Insert char gt key enters the insert editing mode and allows characters or command options to be inserted at the cursor location The lt Back space gt key deletes the character to the left of the cursor The lt Delete char gt key deletes the character to the right of the cursor The lt Clear line gt key deletes the characters from the cursor to the end of the line The lt CTRL gt u key erases the command line 96 Chapter 4 Entering Commands Using the Command Line with the Keyboard To access on line help information e Use the help or commands To access the command line s on line help information type either he
142. HA supr prgm word rd ds16 002 FF G8884 Illegal Instruction FFA81888 003 FF G8886 1888 supr pram word rd ds16 004 FFaa1888 NOP 005 FFa818G2 NOP 006 FF G1G04 BRA B FF G6 1408 007 FF G18 6 NOP FFa aiaaa NOP FFa giae2 NOP FF ag 1484 FF 8 1886 FF aa 14a FFaalaa2 FF ae 1aa4 FF 1886 FF G8 1888 OP F FG 1808 Z2U2220222022 Notice the supervisor stack pointer and program counter values that were loaded at OFF000000H appear to be fetched from memory locations OFF000000H through OFFO00007H when they are really fetched from locations 0 through 7 This is because the upper 8 bits of the CF_CSOADDR register are sent to the analyzer instead of A31 A24 this is true even if Port A is set up to be address lines 147 Chapter 5 Configuring the Emulator Configuring the Emulator Pod Configuring the Emulator Pod In order to configure the emulator pod you must first start the configuration interface and access the Emulator Pod Settings configuration section refer to the previous Using the Configuration Interface section This section shows you how to e Set the reset values of the Supervisor Stack Pointer and the Program Counter e Set the user memory access size To set the reset values of the SSP and PC Enter an even address in response to the Reset value for Supervisor Stack Pointer question Enter an even address in response to the Reset value of the Program Counter question
143. HP 9000 700 series Motif libraries 508 HP UX minimum version 508 installing software 538 543 minimum system requirements overview 508 HP 98659 RS 422 Interface Card 5 HP UX minimum version 508 578 Index HP64KPATH UNIX environment variable 102 HP64KSYMBPATH environment variable 412 IEEE 695 absolute file format 160 input pod commands 104 simulated io 218 input scheme 316 502 installation 508 hardware 510 536 HP 9000 software 538 543 SPARCsystem software 544 548 instance name X applications 497 498 instruction cycles in trace displaying only 254 interactive measurements 307 interface emulator configuration exiting 118 modifying a section 113 starting 111 interface exiting 72 interlock DTACK 136 interrupts 124 inverse video graphical interface demo tutorial files 326 source line display option 257 keyboard accelerators 78 choosing menu items 77 focus policy 78 pod commands 104 simulated io 218 keyboard_to_simio modify command 380 label scheme 316 320 502 LANG environment variable 502 LD_LIBRARY_PATH environment variable 547 libraries Motif for HP 9000 700 508 line numbers source file symbol display 165 line numbers trace disassembling from 253 displaying about 252 579 Index lines in main display area 317 318 list trace 228 load command 374 375 absolute files 160 configuration 374 trace 265 266 375 trace_spec 265 375 local symbols 2
144. IM is configured through the registers in the SIM register class these registers control how the 68340 uses external signal lines to access memory The emulator s DE SIM module is configured through the registers in the CF_SIM register class The DE SIM module controls how the emulator interprets the signals from the 68340 when accessing emulation memory and passing information to the analysis trace Normally the SIM and CF_SIM registers should be programmed with the same values so they will be working together One of the primary functions of the DE SIM is to provide A31 A24 to the memory mapper and analyzer so they will have the complete 32 bit address bus This is easy if Port A of the 68340 is programmed as address lines however if it s programmed as an input port for example the upper address lines are not available external to the 68340 this is the case following reset The four chip selects however have access to the full 32 bit address inside the 68340 You can therefore locate memory using a chip select at an address that is not possible to decode externally If properly programmed the DE SIM can use information in the programming of the chip selects to re create the upper address lines This provides the ability to map emulation memory at these addresses and also provides a correct address in the analysis trace so that symbolic debugging is possible Normally the DE SIM would be programmed through the CF_SIM registers to m
145. IRONMENT environment variable If the XENVIRONMENT variable is not set the HOME Xdefaults host file typically containing resource specifications for a specific remote host is read 314 Chapter 10 Setting X Resources 5 Resource specifications included in the command line with the xrm option 6 System scheme files in directory usr hp64000 lib X 1 1 HP64_schemes 7 System wide custom scheme files located in directory X APPLRES DIR HP64_ schemes 8 User defined scheme files located in directory HOME HP64_schemes note the dot in the directory name Scheme files group resource specifications for different displays computing environments and languages This chapter shows you how to e Modify the Graphical User Interface resources e Use customized scheme files e Set up custom action keys e Set initial recall buffer values e Set up demos or tutorials Refer to the X Resources and the Graphical Interface section in the Concepts chapter for more detailed information 315 Chapter 10 Setting X Resources To modify the Graphical User Interface resources To modify the Graphical User Interface resources You can customize the appearance of an X Windows application by modifying its X resources The following tables describe some of the commonly modified application resources Application Resources for Schemes Resource Values Description HP64_Softkey platformScheme HP UX Names the subdir
146. If the you re emulating boot ROM with emulation memory load the boot ROM code Run from reset The advantages are e You can put the boot ROM contents in emulation memory e The base address of the boot ROM does not have to be at address 0 to fetch vectors from reset e If boot ROM is already in the target system you can prevent guarded memory accesses when running from reset Limitations The maximum amount of emulation memory that can be mapped is half the amount of memory installed in bank 1 or one quarter the amount of memory installed in bank 0 whichever is larger 143 Chapter 5 Configuring the Emulator Mapping Memory Examples This example shows how to use the cs0 memory map attribute to emulate the 68340 s global chip select operation To map the boot ROM address range in emulation memory access the configuration questions and answer the questions as shown below Modify memory configuration yes Entering the following mapper commands Specify unmapped ranges as guarded memory to show that the fetches of the supervisor stack pointer and program counter values after reset really come from the boot ROM address range 80000h thru 8ffffh emulation rom cs0 lt RETURN gt default guarded lt RETURN gt Configuration file name boot_cfg To modify the emulator configuration registers so appropriate information is sent to the analyzer modify register CF_SIM CF_MBAR to 100001h lt RETURN gt m
147. If you are using LAN and heavy LAN traffic is present try setting the environment variable to HP64700TIMEOUT 30 or larger if needed The value is the number of seconds before timeout occurs Then try running again HP64700 I O error connection timed out Cause A user abort occurred while attempting to connect via LAN Action Possibly connecting to an emulator many miles away be patient HP 64700 I O error power down detected Cause The emulator power was cycled Action Do not do this during a user interface session this may force the user interface to end immediately HP64700 I O channel busy communications timed out Cause The communications channel is in use for an unusually long period of time by another command Action try again later 439 Chapter 12 Error Messages Graphical Softkey Interface Messages Unnumbered Illegal status combination Cause You tried to specify combinations of status qualifiers in expressions incorrectly when entering commands Action Refer to the Emulator Analyzer Interface Commands chapter for information about syntax of commands Illegal symbol name Cause You tried to specify incorrect symbol names when entering commands Action Specify correct symbol names To see global symbol names use the display global_symbols command To see local symbol names use the display local_symbols_in lt SYMB gt command Initialization failed Cause The emulator could not be initia
148. LATION CONTROL CONTROL CARD CARDCAGE 6 64751E03 522 Chapter 15 Installation Installing Hardware wats On ew ons wW O zm Zz OOo O gt L wa LJ ZY Oo cee ee 11 Connect the 5 V power cable to the connector in the HP 64700 front panel 523 Chapter 15 Installation Installing Hardware 12 To reinstall the front bezel be sure that the bottom rear groove of the front bezel is aligned with the lip as shown below BE SURE BACK GROOVE OF BEZEL IS ALIGNED WITH LIP PUSH FRONT BEZEL INTO PLACE 524 Chapter 15 Installation Installing Hardware 13 Install the card supports 64700E01 NUMBER HERE INDICATES SLOT CARD SUPPORTS 14 To install the side cover insert the side cover into the tab slots and fasten the two latches TAB SLOTS EMULATOR SIDE COVER L LATCHES ON BOTTOM PANEL e y
149. LE gt H lt RE TURN gt aan EAD Ree This command lets you save the contents of specific memory locations in an absolute file You also can save trace memory contents in a trace file The store command creates a new file with the name you specify if there is not already an absolute file with the same name If a file represented by lt FILE gt already exists you must decide whether to keep or delete the old file If you respond with yes to the prompt the new file replaces the old one If you respond with no the store command is canceled and no data is stored The transfer address of the absolute file is set to zero The parameters are as follows EXPR This is a combination of numeric values symbols operators and parentheses specifying a memory address See the EXPR syntax diagram FCODE The function code used to define the address space being referenced See the syntax diagram for FCODE to see a list of the function codes available and for an explanation of those codes lt FILE gt This represents a file name you specify for the absolute file identifier or trace file where data is to be stored If you want to name a file beginning with a number you must precede the file name with a backslash so the system will recognize it as a file name 409 Chapter 11 Emulator Analyzer Interface Commands store memory thru to trace trace_spec Exa
150. N gt 354 Chapter 11 Emulator Analyzer Interface Commands display display registers lt RETURN gt display registers BASIC D2 lt RETURN gt display simulated_io lt RETURN gt display software_breakpoints lt RETURN gt display software_breakpoints offset_by 1000H lt RETURN gt See Also The copy modify set and step command descriptions and the following pages which describe the display memory and display trace commands 355 Chapter 11 Emulator Analyzer Interface Commands display memory display memory C display memory E FCODE EXPR een EXPR repetitively abso blocked Saat mnemonic i To lt RETURN gt on DISPLAY diagram offset by H EXPR This command displays the contents of the specified memory location or series of locations 356 absolute at_pc blocked bytes EXPR Chapter 11 Emulator Analyzer Interface Commands display memory The memory contents can be displayed in mnemonic hexadecimal or real number format In addition the memory addresses can be listed offset by a value which allows the information to be easily compared to the program listing When displaying memory mnemonic and stepping the next instruction that will step is highlighted The memory mnemonic display autopages to the new add
151. Re map memory see the following section on Mapping Memory Answer yes to the Modify emulator pod configuration question Answer the Reset value for Supervisor Stack Pointer question Answer the Reset value for Program Counter question Save the configuration changes Modify the TRACE exception vector to point to the TRACE_ENTRY symbol in the monitor program so that you can step through the user program Selecting the Foreground Monitor Answering foreground to the Monitor type question causes the current memory map to be deleted and a new map term is added for the monitor program 126 Chapter 5 Configuring the Emulator Selecting the Emulation Monitor The starting address of the monitor block is set by answering the Monitor s base address question and your response to the Enable DSACK interlocking on monitor addresses question determines whether the dsi DSACK interlock memory attribute is added When you select a foreground monitor the emulator automatically loads the default program resident in emulator firmware into dual ported emulation memory The foreground monitor is reloaded every time the emulator breaks into the monitor state from the reset state Unlike the background monitor the foreground monitor runs within the same address space as the target program consuming a 4 Kbyte block of the 68340 s address range The foreground monitor can run with target interrupts enabled see Selecti
152. SNRN 10 10 ns 18 CLKOUT High to R W High tmr 0 20 0 20 ns 20 CLKOUT High to R W Low tcmRL 0 20 0 20 ns 21 R W High to AS CS Asserted tRAAA 10 10 ns 22 R W Low to DS Asserted Write tRASA 47 47 ns 23 CLKOUT High to Data Out Valid tcHDO 2 20 23 ns 24 Data Out Valid to Negating Edge of AS CS tDVASN 10 10 ns Synchronous Write 25 DS CS Negated to Data Out Invalid tSNDOI 10 10 ns Data Out Hold 26 Data Out Valid to DS Asserted Write tDVSA 10 9 ns 27 Data In Valid to CLKOUT Low Data Setup tDICL 5 8 ns 27A Late BERR HALT tBELCL 10 10 ns BKPT Asserted to CLKOUT Low 10 le ns Setup Time 28 AS DS Negated to DSACKx BERR HALT tson 0 50 0 50 ns 29 DS Negated to Data In Invalid Data In Hold tsnp1 0 0 ns 29Af DS Negated to Data In High Impedance tSHDI 40 40 ns 482 Chapter 13 Specifications and Characteristics Emulator Specifications and Characteristics AC Electrical Specifications 64751 66508 and higher active probe board numbers Read and Write Cycles Vcc 5 0 Vdc 5 GND 0 Vdc Ta TL to Tp MC68340 25 16 MHz HP 64751 Num Characteristic Symbol Min Max Min Max Unit 30 CLKOUT Low to Data In Invalid tCLDI 10 10 ns Synchronous Hold 30Af CLKOUT Low to Data In High Im
153. Straight 79 20 Mint Gray 250V SEV1011 8120 2296 1959 24507 79 200 Mint Gray Type 12 GRE ig SS Opt 912 Straight 79 200 Mint Gray 220V DHCK107 8120 2957 90 79 200 Mint Gray g Opt 917 8120 4600 Straight 79 200 Jade Gray 250V SABS164 8120 4211 90 79 200 EP Opt 918 8120 4753 Straight Miti 90 230 Dark Gray 100V 8120 4754 90 90 230 Part number shown for plug is industry identifier for plug only Number shown for cable is HP part number for complete cable including plug These cords are included in the CSA certification approval for the equipment 535 Chapter 15 Installation Installing Hardware 1 Connect the power cord and turn on the HP 64700 The line switch is a push button located at the lower left hand corner of the front panel To turn ON power to the HP 64700 push the line switch button in to the ON 1 position The power light at the lower right hand corner of the front panel will be illuminated I pL 64700E03 536 Chapter 15 Installation Connecting the HP 64700 to a Computer or LAN Connecting the HP 64700 to a Computer or LAN Refer to the HP 64700 Series Installation Service Guide for instructions on connecting the HP 64700 to a host computer via RS 422 or RS 232 or LAN and setting the HP 64700 s configuration switches RS 422 and RS 232 are only supported on HP 9000 Series 300 400 machines
154. The CMB trigger line puts out a true pulse following receipt of EXECUTE despite the commands used to configure it This pulse is internally ignored Note that if you use the EXECUTE function the CMB TRIGGER should not be used to trigger external instruments because a false trigger will be generated when EXECUTE is activated 300 Caution Chapter 9 Making Coordinated Measurements Setting Up for Coordinated Measurements Setting Up for Coordinated Measurements This section describes how to e Connect the Coordinated Measurement Bus e Connect the rear panel BNC To connect the Coordinated Measurement Bus CMB Be careful not to confuse the 9 pin connector used for CMB with those used by some computer systems for RS 232C communications Applying RS 232C signals to the CMB connector is likely to result in damage to the HP 64700 Card Cage To use the CMB you will need one CMB cable for the first two emulators and one additional cable for every emulator after the first two The CMB cable is orderable from HP under product number HP 64023A The cable is four meters long You can build your own compatible CMB cables using standard 9 pin D type subminiature connectors and 26 AWG wire Note that Hewlett Packard does not ensure proper CMB operation if you are using a self built cable 301 Chapter 9 Making Coordinated Measurements Setting Up for Coordinated Measurements 1 Conn
155. _word Oxxxx xx11 1xxx xxxxb word data transfer chip select active DSACKx not internally generated data OxOxx xxxx xxxx x01xb data cycle dma 0X1XX XXXX XXXX XXXxXD DMA space function code if used by DMA controller module ds_byte OXxxxX XX10 XxXxX XXxxb byte data transfer ds_word Oxxxx xx01 XXXX Xxxxb word data transfer memread OXXXX XXXX XXX Xxxxb memory read memwrite OXXXX XXXX XXX0 Xxxxb memory write prog OxOxx XXXX XxXxx X10xb program space function code rerun Oxxxx OOXx xxxx xxxxb BERR and HALT active retry siz_3byt OXXXX XXXX X11x Xxxxb 3 byte access siz_byte 0XXXX XXXX X01X Xxxxb byte access siz_long OXXxxxX XXXX X00x xxxxb long word access siz_word OxxxX XXXX X10X Xxxxb word access super 0X0XX XXXX XXXX 1xxxb supervisor space function code supdata OxOxx xxxx xxxx 101xb supervisor data space function code supprog OxOxx xxxx xxxx 110xb supervisor program space function code user OxOxx XXXX XXXX OXxxxb user space function code userdata OxOxx xxxx xxxx 001 xb user data space function code userprog OxOxx xxxx xxxx 010xb user program space function code These predefined values may be used as other values would be used For example trace after status write is the same as trace after status 0xxxxxxxxxxx0xxxxb 236 Chapter 7 Using the Emulation Analyzer Qualifying Trigger and Store Conditions To qualify the trigger state and position Enter a trigger state specification in the entry buffer
156. a configuration section Store a configuration Change the configuration directory context Display the configuration context Access help information Exit the configuration interface Load a configuration This chapter describes emulator configuration in general terms For information about your emulator s specific configuration questions refer to your emulator User s Guide 110 Chapter 5 Configuring the Emulator Using the Configuration Interface To start the configuration interface Choose Modify Emulator Config from the emulator analyzer interface pulldown menu Using the command line enter the modify configuration command The configuration interface main menu see example below is displayed The configuration sections that are presented depend on the hardware and features of your particular emulator The configuration interface may be left running while you are using the emulator analyzer interface If you re using the Softkey Interface you don t get a main menu from which to choose configuration sections however the same display area and command line are used to answer the configuration questions 111 Chapter 5 Configuring the Emulator Using the Configuration Interface Examples The 68340 emulator configuration interface main menu is shown below Emulator Configuration Main Men Emulator Configuration Sections General Items Reconfigure Internal Registers Monitor Typ
157. a register class instead of an individual register Action You can only modify individual registers Refer to the display registers command description for a list of register names Unable to reset Cause Target condition or system failure Action Check target system and run performance verification Terminal Interface pv command Unable to configure break on write to ROM Cause The emulator controller is unable to configure for breaks on writes to ROM possibly because the emulator was left in an unknown state or because of a hardware failure Action Initialize the emulator or cycle power Then reenter the command If the same failure occurs call your HP sales and service office 469 Chapter 12 Error Messages Terminal Interface Messages 651 653 661 663 664 665 666 Unable to configure break on software breakpoints Cause The emulator controller cannot enable breakpoints possibly because the emulator is in an unknown state or because of a hardware failure Action Initialize the emulator or cycle power then re enter the command If the same failure occurs call your HP sales and service office Break condition configuration aborted Cause Occurs when lt CTRL gt c is entered during the configuration of break conditions Software breakpoint break condition is disabled Cause You have attempted to set or clear a software breakpoint when software breakpoints are disabled Actio
158. ability As previously explained turning off counting provides a larger trace depth This is defined by you and used with the state option to define the states to be captured by the analyzer This causes the emulation bus analyzer to count occurrences of the specified state during a trace measurement This option causes the emulation bus analyzer to count the time between states captured during the trace measurement 348 Chapter 11 Emulator Analyzer Interface Commands COUNT Examples trace after START counting state LOOP2 lt RETURN gt trace counting time lt RETURN gt See Also The trace command 349 Chapter 11 Emulator Analyzer Interface Commands display display display lt RETURN gt MC status repetitively pod_command M eveni _log MC error_log C smuloted_io IC tocal_symbols_in a SYMB FCODE N C data ei F Br thru x EXPR m lt TYPE gt NM registers lt CLASS gt a lt REGISTER gt DISPLAY MEMORY _ DISPLAY TRACE 3 offset_by EXPR software_breakpoint This command displays selected information on your screen 350 lt CLASS gt data error_log event_log EXPR Chapter 11 Emulator Analyzer Interface Commands dis
159. absolute files If you wish to load only that portion of the absolute file that resides in memory mapped as emulation RAM or ROM use the command line s load emul_mem syntax If you wish to load only the portion of the absolute file that resides in memory mapped as target RAM use the command line s load user_mem syntax If you want both emulation and target memory to be loaded do not specify emul_mem or user_mem 160 Chapter 6 Using the Emulator Loading and Storing Absolute Files Examples To load the demo program absolute file enter the following command load ecs x lt RETURN gt To load only portions of the absolute file that reside in target system RAM load user_mem absfile lt RETURN gt To load only portions of the absolute file that reside in emulation memory load emul_mem absfile lt RETURN gt To load absolute files without symbols e Choose File gt Load Program Only and use the dialog box to select the absolute file e Using the command line enter the load lt absolute_file gt nosymbols command 161 Chapter 6 Using the Emulator Loading and Storing Absolute Files Examples To store memory contents into absolute files e Using the command line enter the store memory command You can store emulation or target system memory contents into HP format absolute files on the host computer Absolute files are stored in the current directory If no extension is given for
160. ace command Examples To store the current trace store trace trcfile lt RETURN gt 265 Chapter 7 Using the Emulation Analyzer Saving and Restoring Traces To restore traces e Choose File gt Load Trace Data e Using the command line enter the load trace command The restored trace depth is the depth specified when the trace was stored and cannot be increased You may want to increase the trace depth before storing traces When a trace is loaded the trace command is not restored A trace again or trace modify command will use the last trace command entered not the command which resulted in the loaded trace Also the trace status shown by the display status command does not reflect the lo Examples To restore the trcfile TR trace load trace trcfile lt RI The trace information stored in you would any other trace aded trace file ETURN gt trcfile TR is restored You can view the trace as 266 Making Software Performance Measurements 267 Making Software Performance Measurements The Software Performance Measurement Tool SPMT is a feature of the Softkey Interface that allows you to make software performance measurements on your programs The SPMT allows you to make some of the measurements that are possible with the HP 64708 Software Performance Analyzer and its Graphical User Interface HP B1487 The SPMT post processes information from the
161. allation process Due to the complexity of installing on NFS mounted file systems a script that verifies and customizes these products was also installed This stand alone script may be run at any time to verify that all files required by the products are in place in the file system If required files are not found this script will attempt to symbolically link them from the HP64000 install directory to their proper locations Run the script HP64000 bin envinstall 547 Chapter 15 Installation Installing Sun SPARCsystem Software j Step 5 Map your function keys If you are using the conventional Softkey Interface map your function keys by following the steps below Copy the function key definitions by typing cp HP64000 ete ttyswre ttyswre This creates key mappings in the ttyswrc file in your HOME directory Remove or comment out the following line from your xinitrc file xmodmap e keysym F1 Help If any of the other keys F1 F8 are remapped using xmodmap comment out those lines also Add the following to your profile or login file stty erase H setenv KEYMAP sun The erase character needs to be set to backspace so that the Delete key can be used for delete character If you want to continue using the F1 key for HELP you can use use F2 F9 for the Softkey Interface All you have to do is set the KEYMAP variable If you use OpenWindows type setenv KEYMAP sun 2 9 If you use xterm
162. alysis remove the right angle adapter board by turning the thumb screws counter clockwise 520 Chapter 15 Installation Installing Hardware 9 To remove the analyzer card insert a flat blade screwdriver in the access hole and eject the analyzer card by rotating the screwdriver EJECT ANALYZER CARD Do not remove the system control board This board is used in all HP 64700 emulation and analysis systems 521 Chapter 15 Installation Installing Hardware 10 Install HP 64704A and HP 64748C boards The HP 64704A is installed in the slot next to the system controller board The HP 64748C is installed in the second slot from the bottom of the HP 64700 These boards are identified with labels that show the model number and the serial number To install a card insert it into the plastic guides Make sure the connectors are properly aligned then press the card into mother board sockets Check to ensure that the cards are seated all the way into the sockets If the cards can be removed with your fingers the cards are NOT seated all the way into the mother board socket 80 CHANNEL ANALYZER CARD 64748C EMU
163. ameters Offffh and 4 5 4 are passed to amp ArG_IEfT You can also pass the parameters when you invoke the command file for example CMDFILE 1000h 0 1 20 Offffh 44 5 4 Other Things to Know About Command Files You should know the following about using command files 1 Command files may contain shell variables Only those shell variables beginning with followed by an identifier will be supported An identifier is a sequence of letters digits or underscores beginning with a letter or underscore The identifier may be enclosed by braces or entered directly following the symbol Braces are required when the identifier is followed by a letter a digit or an underscore that is not interpreted as part of its name For example assume a directory named users softkeys and the shell variable S The value of S is soft By specifying the directory as users S keys the correct result is obtained However if you attempt to specify the directory as users Skeys the Softkey Interface looks for the value of the variable Skeys This is not the operators intended result You may not get the intended result unless Skeys is already defined to be softkeys You can examine the current values of all shell variables defined in your environment with the command env Positional shell variables such as 1 2 and so on are not supported Neither are special shell variables such as and so on supported You can
164. ample in the Terminal Interface you can specify different restart states for each sequence term and you can set up a windowing trace specification where the trigger does not have to be in the window If you do not find the sequencing flexibility you need from within Softkey Interface refer to the 68340 Emulator User s Guide for the Terminal Interface To trigger after a sequence of states Use the trace find_sequence command The analyzer s sequencer has several levels also called sequence terms Each state in the series of states to be found before triggering as well as the trigger state is associated with a sequence term The sequencer works like this The analyzer searches for the state associated with the first sequence term When that state is captured the analyzer starts searching for the state associated with the second term and so on The last sequence term used is associated with the trigger state When the trigger state is captured the analyzer is triggered Up to seven sequence terms and an optional occurrence count for each term are available 245 Chapter 7 Using the Emulation Analyzer Using the Sequencer Examples In the demo program suppose you wish to trigger on the following sequence of events the save_points function the interrupt_sim function and finally the do_sort function Also suppose you wish to store only opcode fetches of the assembly language LINK A6 0 instruction data values th
165. an use the trig 1 and trig2 lines to make several type of connections at the same time For example when the analyzer finds its trigger condition a signal is driven on the trig line This signal may be used to stop user program execution but the trigger signal may also be driven on the CMB and BNC connectors Also it s possible for signals to be driven and received on the CMB or BNC connectors So for example while the analyzer s trigger signal can be driven on the CMB and BNC connectors signals can also be received from the CMB and BNC connectors and used to stop user program execution In this case the emulator will break into the monitor on either the analyzer trigger or on the reception of a trigger signal from the CMB or BNC You can disable connections made by the internal trig and trig2 lines by answering neither or no to the appropriate interactive measurement configuration question 308 j Chapter 9 Making Coordinated Measurements Using Trigger Signals This section shows you how to e Drive the emulation analyzer trigger signal to the CMB e Drive the emulation analyzer trigger signal to the BNC connector e Break emulator execution on signal from CMB e Break emulator execution on signal from BNC e Arm the emulation analyzer on signal from CMB e Arm the emulation analyzer on signal from BNC To drive the emulation analyzer trigger signal to the CMB Enter the modify configuration command
166. analyzer receive trig2 See the chapter on Making Coordinated Measurements for more information break_on_trigger This stops target system program execution when the trigger is found The emulator begins execution in the emulation monitor When using this option the on_halt option cannot be included in the command COUNT This specifies whether time or state occurrences or nothing will be counted during the trace See the COUNT syntax diagram for details counting This option specifies whether the analyzer will count time or occurrences of states during a trace or whether the option is to be turned off modify command This recalls the last trace command that was executed 421 Chapter 11 Emulator Analyzer Interface Commands trace on_halt only prestore QUALIFIER repetitively SEQUENCING TRIGGER WINDOW When using this option the analyzer will continue to capture states until the emulation processor halts or until astop_trace command is executed When this option is used the break_on_trigger repetitively and TRIGGER options cannot be included in the command This option allows you to qualify the states that are stored as defined by QUALIFIER This option instructs the analyzer to save specific states that occur prior to states that are stored as specified with the only option This determines which of the traced states will be stored or prestored in the trace memory for display upon completion of
167. analyzer trace list When you end a performance measurement the SPMT dumps the post processed information to a binary file which is then read using the perf32 report generator utility Two types of software performance measurements can be made with the SPMT activity measurements and duration measurements This chapter describes tasks you perform while using the Software Performance Measurement Tool SPMT These tasks are grouped into the following sections e Activity performance measurements e Duration performance measurements e Running performance measurements and creating reports 268 Chapter 8 Making Software Performance Measurements Activity Performance Measurements Activity Performance Measurements Activity measurements are measurements of the number of accesses reads or writes within an address range The SPMT shows you the percentage of analyzer trace states that are in the specified address range as well as the percentage of time taken by those states Two types of activity are measured memory activity and program activity Memory activity is all activity that occurs within the address range Program activity is the activity caused by instruction execution in the address range Program activity includes opcode fetches and the cycles that result from the execution of those instructions reads and writes to memory stack pushes etc For example suppose an address range being measured for activity conta
168. and 409 410 absolute files 160 162 store trace command 265 266 store trace_spec command 264 summary of commands 339 SunOS minimum version 509 587 Index supervisor stack pointer reset values 148 SYMB syntax 411 418 symbol context changing 173 displaying 172 symbol file loading 163 symbols 163 232 displaying 163 displaying parent from symbols screen 169 global to file 216 local to file 216 set command 402 S YMB syntax 411 418 trace display 259 sync_sim_registers command 419 synchronous measurements 305 syntax conventions 338 system requirements HP 64700 minimum version 509 HP 9000 overview 508 HP UX minimum version 508 OSF Motif HP 9000 700 requirements 508 SPARCsystem overview 509 SunOS minimum version 509 Tt start trace command 224 tabs are source line display option 257 target memory access size 149 loading absolute files 160 ROM symbols for 163 target system 564 access for emulator probe 490 contents minimum 478 dependency on executing code 121 design considerations 478 plugging the emulator into 52 probe power requirements 478 processor signal considerations 478 RAM and ROM 135 temperatures operating and non operating environments 492 588 Index terminal emulation window opening 216 time range file format SPMT measurements 287 trace 565 at EXECUTE 305 copy command 346 depth of 230 display command 360 363 displaying
169. and pod_command keyboard display simulated_io modify keyboard_to_simio N A toggles the command line How Popup Menus Map to the Command Line The following tables show the items available in the popup menus and the command line commands to which they map Mnemonic Memory Display Popup Command Line Set Clear Breakpoint Edit Source Run Until Trace After Trace Before Trace About Trace Until modify software_breakpoints set clear EXPR vi lt line gt lt file gt no_prompt_before_exit run until EXPR trace after STATE trace before STATE trace about STATE trace before STATE break_on_trigger Breakpoints Display Popup Command Line Set Inactivate Breakpoint Clear delete Breakpoint Enable Disable Software Breakpoints Set All Breakpoints Clear delete All Breakpoints modify software_breakpoints set deactivate EXPR modify software_breakpoints clear EXPR modify software_breakpoints enable disable modify software_breakpoints set modify software_breakpoints clear 336 Chapter 11 Emulator Analyzer Interface Commands Symbols Display Popup Command Line Display Local Symbols display local_symbols_in S YMB Display Parent Symbols display local_symbols_in SYMB display global_symbols Cut Full Symbol Name N A Edit File Defining Symbol vi lt line gt lt file gt no_prompt_before_exit Status Line Popup Command Line Remove Temp
170. and causes the processor to be held in a reset state until a break run or step command is entered A CMB execute signal will also cause the emulator to run if reset Also a request to access memory or registers while reset will cause a break into the monitor 178 Chapter 6 Using the Emulator Using Software Breakpoints Using Software Breakpoints Software breakpoints provide a way to accurately stop the execution of your program at selected locations Note Version A 04 00 or greater of the HP 64700 system firmware provides support for permanent as well as temporary breakpoints If your version of HP 64700 system firmware is less than A 04 00 only temporary breakpoints are supported When you set a software breakpoint at an address the instruction at that address is replaced with a BGND instruction When the BGND instruction is executed control is passed to the emulator s monitor program and the original instruction is restored in the user program If the BGND instruction was not inserted as the result of a modify software_breakpoints set command the Undefined software breakpoint message is displayed on the status line In order to successfully set a software breakpoint the emulator must be able to write to the memory location specified Therefore software breakpoints cannot be set in target memory while the emulator is reset and they can never be set in target ROM You can however copy target ROM to emulation
171. and is identical to the command used with the restored measurement The restore option checks the emulator software version and will only work if the perf out files you are restoring were made with the same software version as is presently running in the emulator If you ran tests using a former software version and saved perf out files then updated your software to a new version number you will not be able to restore old perf out measurement files To initialize the duration measurement performance_measurement_initialize duration lt RETURN gt 288 Chapter 8 Making Software Performance Measurements Duration Performance Measurements To interpret duration measurement reports View the performance measurement report Duration measurements provide a best case worst case characterization of code execution time These measurements record execution times that fall within a set of specified time ranges The information you will see in duration measurement reports is described below Number of Intervals Number of from address and to address pairs after prefetch correction Maximum Time The greatest amount of time between the from address to the to address Minimum Time The shortest amount of time between the from address to the to address Average Time Average time between the from address and the to address The following equation is used to calculate the average time amount of time for all interva
172. answer in lt CONFIGURATION FILENAMES ignored Cause You must provide acceptable responses to questions in the configuration file file EA The emulator ignored the incorrect response Incorrect responses may appear in configuration files when you have saved the configuration to a file edited it later and tried reloading it into the emulator This may also occur if you have loaded a configuration file that you created while using another emulator and the response differs from the response required for this emulator Action Examine your configuration file to check for inappropriate responses to configuration file questions Inverse assembly file lt INVERSE ASSEMBLER FILENAMES could not be loaded Inverse assembly file lt INVERSE ASSEMBLER FILENAMES not found lt filename gt Inverse assembly not available Cause The file does not exist Action Reload your interface and or real time operating system software Inverse assembly not available Cause The inverse assembler for your emulator is missing Action Verify proper software installation Joining session already in progress continue file loaded Cause This is a status message When operating the emulator in multiple windows a new emulation session is joined to a current session In this case the new session was able to continue because the continue file loaded properly 441 Chapter 12 Error Messages Graphical Softkey Interface Messages Unnumbered Joining
173. ant the specified information to be copied If you want to specify a file name that begins with a number you must precede the file name with a backslash For example copy display to 12 10 lt RETURN gt from_line_number This specifies the trace list line number from which copying will begin global_symbols This lets you copy a list of global symbols to the selected destination help This allows you to copy the contents of the emulation help files to the selected destination lt LINE gt Use this with from_line_number and thru_line_number to specify the starting and ending trace list lines to be copied local_symbols_in This lets you copy all the children of a given symbol to the selected destination See the SYMB syntax page and the Symbolic Retrieval Utilities User s Guide for information on symbol hierarchy memory This command copies the contents of a memory location or series of locations to the specified output The memory contents are copied in the same format as specified in the last display memory command Contents of memory can be displayed if program runs are not restricted to real time Memory contents are listed as an asterisk under the following conditions 1 The address refers to guarded memory 2 Runs are restricted to real time the emulator is running a user program and the address is located in target system memory or in single port emulation memory Initial values are the same as those specified b
174. ar Press and hold the command select mouse button to display the menu While continuing to hold down the mouse button move the mouse pointer to the desired menu item If the menu item has a cascade menu identified by an arrow on the right edge of the menu button then continue to hold the mouse button down and move the mouse pointer toward the arrow on the right edge of the menu The cascade menu will display Repeat this step for the cascade menu until you find the desired menu item Release the mouse button to select the menu choice If you decide not to select a menu item simply continue to hold the mouse button down move the mouse pointer off of the menu and release the mouse button Some menu items have an ellipsis as part of the menu label An ellipsis indicates that the menu item will display a dialog or message box when the menu item is chosen 76 j Chapter 4 Entering Commands Using Menus the Entry Buffer and Action Keys To choose a pulldown menu item using the mouse method 2 Position the mouse pointer over the menu name on the menu bar Click the command select mouse button to display the menu Move the mouse pointer to the desired menu item If the menu item has a cascade menu identified by an arrow on the right edge of the menu button then repeat the previous step and then this step until you find the desired item Click the mouse button to select the item If you decide not to select a
175. ard mnemonic character Notice the keyboard mnemonic is not always the first character of the label If a menu item has a cascade menu attached to it then typing the keyboard mnemonic displays the cascade menu Some menu items have an ellipsis as part of the menu label An ellipsis indicates that the menu item will display a dialog or other box when the menu item is chosen Dialog boxes support the use of the keyboard as well To direct keyboard input to a dialog box you must position the mouse pointer somewhere inside the boundaries of the dialog box That is because the interface keyboard focus policy is set to pointer That just means that the window containing the mouse pointer receives the keyboard input In addition to keyboard mnemonics you can also specify keyboard accelerators which are keyboard shortcuts for selected menu items Refer to the Setting X Resources chapter and the Softkey Input scheme file for more information about setting the X resources that control defining keyboard accelerators 78 j Chapter 4 Entering Commands Using Menus the Entry Buffer and Action Keys To choose popup menu items Move the mouse pointer to the area whose popup menu you wish to access If a popup menu is available the mouse pointer changes from an arrow to a hand Press and hold the select mouse button After the popup menu appears while continuing to hold down the mouse button move the mouse pointer to the
176. are breakpoint facility may be completely disabled or enabled via the modify software_breakpoints command The default is enabled 381 Chapter 11 Emulator Analyzer Interface Commands modify string Modify memory values to the ASCII character string given by lt STRING gt lt STRING gt Quoted ASCH string including special characters as follows null 0 newline n horizontal tab t backspace b carriage return r form feed f backslash single quote V bit pattern ooo where ooo is an octal number temporary Sets a temporary breakpoint When the break occurs the original opcode is replaced in the program thru This option lets you specify a range of memory locations to be modified to This lets you specify values to which the selected memory locations or registers will be changed words Modify memory locations as 16 bit values Examples modify configuration lt RETURN gt modify memory datal bytes to OE3H 01H 08H lt RETURN gt modify memory datal thru DATA100 to OFFFFH lt RETURN gt modify memory 0675H real to 1 303 lt RETURN gt modify memory temp real long to 0 5532E 8 lt RETURN gt modify memory buffer string to This is a test n 0 lt RETURN gt modify register D2 to 41H lt RETURN gt 382 Chapter 11 Emulator Analyzer Interface Commands modify modify software_breakpoints enable lt RETURN gt modify software_breakpoints set loopl end loop2 end
177. asurements of the number of accesses reads or writes within an address range The reports generated for activity measurements show you the percentage of analyzer trace states that are in the specified address range as well as the percentage of time taken by those states The performance measurement must include four traces before statistics mean and standard deviation appear in the activity report The information you will see in activity measurement reports is described below Memory Activity All activity found within the address range Program Activity All activity caused by instruction execution in the address range Program activity includes opcode fetches and the cycles that result from the execution of those instructions reads and writes to memory stack pushes etc Relative With respect to activity in all ranges defined in the performance measurement Absolute With respect to all activity not just activity in those ranges defined in the performance measurement Mean Average number of states in the range per trace The following equation is used to calculate the mean sta meae tes in range total states 276 Chapter 8 Making Software Performance Measurements Activity Performance Measurements Standard Deviation Deviation from the mean of state count The following equation is used to calculate standard deviation 1 N std dev NT x gt S sumq N mean je i 1 Where N Number of traces in the measurement
178. at equal 4E56H to show function entry addresses To set up the sequencing trace specification enter the following trace command trace find_sequence save_points then interrupt_sim trigger about do_sort only data 4e56h lt RETURN gt set source off lt RETURN gt Address Opcode or Status time count updat write_hdwr 4E56 supr prgm word rd ds16 upda save_points 4E56 supr prgm word rd ds16 ma interrupt_sim 4E56 supr prgm word rd ds16 pr proc_specific 4E56 supr pram word rd ds16 up update_system incomplete instr 4E56 7 upda get_targets incomplete instr 4E56 read_conditions incomplete instr 4E56 upda set_outputs incomplete instr 4E56 7 updat write_hdwr incomplete instr 4E56 upda save_points incomplete instr 4E56 ma interrupt_sim incomplete instr 4E56 pro main do_sort incomplete instr 4E56 001 pro main strepy8 incomplete instr 4E56 7 002 pro jmain strcpy incomplete instr 4E56 003 pro main strepy8 incomplete instr 4E56 7 7 004 pro main strepyS incomplete instr 4E56 Notice the states that contain sq adv in the first column you may have to press lt PREV gt in order to see the states captured prior to the trigger These are the states associated with or captured for each sequence term Just as the trigger state is always stored in trace memory the states captured in the sequence are always stored if
179. atch the programming of the 68340 SIM as it will exist after all of the boot up configuration is complete This can be done before the boot up code is run In fact the programming of the CF_SIM registers is part of the configuration and will be loaded along with the memory map and other configuration items when a configuration file is loaded 156 Chapter 6 Using the Emulator Using the Emulator Configuration Registers The default programming of the DE SIM matches the reset values of the 68340 SIM refer to the Motorola MC68340 Integrated Processor User s Manual for specific values If desired the programming of the DE SIM can be transferred into the 68340 SIM with the sync_sim_registers to_68340_from_config command This happens automatically each time a break to the monitor from emulation reset occurs This ensures that the 68340 is prepared to properly access memory when a program is downloaded to the emulator Alternatively the emulator s DE SIM can be programmed from the 68340 SIM with the sync_sim_registers from_68340_to_config command This is useful if initialization code that configures the 68340 SIM exists but you don t what its values are In this case you can use the default configuration run from reset to execute the initialization code and use the sync_sim_registers from_68340_to_config command to configure the emulator to match the 68340 SIM At any time you can verify if the SIM and DE SIM are programmed the
180. ause The emulator is reading an invalid identifier for the emulation probe Action Make sure that the emulator probe cables are connected correctly Also make sure that the probe is the 68340 probe Fuse F1 blown on HP64748C ABG Control Board Cause The emulator detects a blown fuse on the HP 64748C ABG Control Board Action Contact your Hewlett Packard Representative General Emulator and System Messages FATAL SYSTEM SOFTWARE ERROR FATAL SYSTEM SOFTWARE ERROR FATAL SYSTEM SOFTWARE ERROR Cause The system has encountered an error from which it cannot recover Action Write down the sequence of commands which caused the error Cycle power on the emulator and reenter the commands If the error repeats call your local HP Sales and Service office for assistance Incompatible compatibility table entry Cause The emulation firmware ROM is not compatible with the analysis or system firmware in your HP 64700 system Action The ROMs in your emulator must be compatible with each other for your emulation system to work correctly Contact your Hewlett Packard Representative Ambiguous address s Cause Certain emulators support segmentation or function code information in addressing The emulator is unable to determine which of two or more address ranges you are referring to based upon the information you entered Action Re enter the command and fully specify the address including segmentation or function code information 4
181. ay and adding a new item 205 copying to a file 215 displaying 204 data values displaying 38 decimal numbers 231 default trace command 224 default trace display returning to 263 demo target system 478 demos setting up 325 327 depth of the trace 230 dequeued trace display 251 design considerations target system 478 device table file 32 65 66 dialog box 85 Command Recall operation 86 94 Directory Selection 172 Directory Selection operation 85 88 Entry Buffer Recall operation 83 86 File Selection operation 86 87 Trace Specification Selection operation 230 dimensions emulator 491 probe 491 directory context changing in configuration window 116 changing in emulator analyzer window 172 displaying from configuration window 117 displaying from emulator analyzer window 172 Directory Selection dialog box operation 85 88 display area 27 columns 317 copying to file 215 lines 317 318 display command 350 355 data 351 error_log 351 event_log 351 global_symbols 352 local_symbols_in 352 572 Index memory 356 359 memory mnemonic 33 199 pod_command 352 registers 192 197 352 simulated_io 217 352 software_breakpoints 352 status 224 353 symbols 163 trace 228 360 363 display mode 563 display trace 250 263 about line number 252 absolute format 255 count absolute relative 261 default 263 dequeued 251 disassemble from line number 253 instruction cycles only 254 m
182. blade screwdriver in the access hole and eject the emulator cards by rotating the screwdriver EMULATOR CARD FOUR EGRESS THUMB SCREWS PROBE CABLES k Ys WITH FLAT BLADE SCREWDRIVER WA EJECT EMULATOR CARD EGRESS 64700E02 AND PROBE CABLE AS AN ASSEMBLY 518 Chapter 15 Installation Installing Hardware 6 Insert a screw driver into the third slot of the right side of the front bezel push to release catch and pull the right side of the bezel about one half inch away from the front of the HP 64700 Then do the same thing on the left side of the bezel When both sides are released pull the bezel toward you approximately 2 inches INSERT SCREW DRIVER INTO THIRD SLOT OF FRONT BEZEL PUSH TO RELEASE CATCH AND PULL BEZEL TOWARD YOU OQ FRONT PANEL OQ WITHOUT BEZEL SHOWING CATCH 519 Chapter 15 Installation Installing Hardware 7 Lift the bezel panel to remove Be careful not to put stress on the power switch extender LIFT BEZEL PANEL AND TIP TOWARD YOU TO REMOVE BE CAREFUL NOT TO PUT STRESS ON POWER SWITCH EXTENDER 8 If you re removing an existing analyzer card that provides external an
183. box 27 83 multi window copy and paste from 84 multi window copy and paste to 81 operation 83 recall button 27 recalling entries 83 symbol width and copy and paste to 81 text entry 80 with action keys 83 85 with pulldown menus 83 Entry Buffer Recall dialog box operation 86 environment variables UNIX HP64KPATH 102 HP64KS YMBPATH 412 PATH 65 Softkey Interface setting while in 209 environmental characteristics of the emulator 492 eram memory characterization 135 erom memory characterization 135 error messages 432 analyzer 475 emulator 453 general and system error status 462 Terminal Interface 453 error_log copy command 216 344 display command 351 event_log 69 copy command 216 344 display command 351 EXECUTE CMB signal 300 tracing at 305 exit emulation session 72 emulator analyzer interface 71 72 exit emulator analyzer interface 47 expressions 231 EXPR syntax 366 368 576 Index F fast termination mode 134 file breakpoints screen to 215 data values screen to 215 display area to 215 editing 212 editing at address 212 editing at program counter 212 editing at symbol from symbols screen 212 editing from memory display screen 212 emulator configuration 115 emulator configuration load 118 emulator status screen to 216 error log to 216 event log to 216 global symbols to 216 local symbols to 216 memory to 215 pod commands screen to 216 registers to 21
184. buffer values task descriptions Choose the menu item or click the action key that uses the contents of the entry buffer that is the menu item or action key that contains 83 Chapter 4 Entering Commands Using Menus the Entry Buffer and Action Keys j To copy and paste from the entry buffer to the command line entry area Place text to be pasted into the command line in the entry buffer text area You may do that by e Copying the text from the display area using the copy and paste feature e Enter the text directly by typing it into the entry buffer text area e Choose the text from the entry buffer recall dialog box Position the mouse pointer within the command line text entry area If necessary reposition the cursor to the location where you want to paste the text If necessary choose the insert or replace mode for the command entry area Click the command paste mouse button to paste the text in the command line entry area at the current cursor position The entire contents of the entry buffer are pasted into the command line at the current cursor position Although a paste from the display area to the entry buffer affects all displayed entry buffers in all open windows a paste from the entry buffer to the command line only affects the command line of the window in which you are currently working See To copy and paste to the entry buffer for information about pasting information from the display in
185. c format Display memory in mnemonic format at the current PC Return to the previous mnemonic display Display memory in hexadecimal format Display memory in real number format Display memory at an address Display memory repetitively Modify memory Modify memory at an address To display memory Choose Display gt Memory This command either re displays memory in the format specified by the last memory display command or if no previous command has been executed displays memory as hexadecimal bytes beginning at address zero 198 Chapter 6 Using the Emulator Displaying and Modifying Memory To display memory in mnemonic format To display memory at a particular address place an absolute or symbolic address in the entry buffer then choose DisplayMemory Mnemonic or using the command line enter the display memory lt address gt mnemonic command To display memory at the current program counter address choose Display Memory Mnhemonic at PC or using the command line enter the display memory mnemonic at_pc command A highlighted bar shows the location of the current program counter address This allows you to view the program counter while stepping through user program execution Whether source lines assembly language instructions or symbols are included in the display depends on the modes you choose with the Settings Source Symbols Modes or Settings Display Modes pulldown menu items Se
186. ccount for at least 1 of the activity for all labels defined in the measurement 283 Chapter 8 Making Software Performance Measurements Duration Performance Measurements Duration Performance Measurements Duration measurements provide a best case worst case characterization of code execution time These measurements record execution times that fall within a set of specified time ranges The analyzer trace command is set up to store only the entry and exit states of the module to be measured for example a C function or Pascal procedure The SPMT provides two types of duration measurements module duration and module usage Module duration measurements record how much time it takes to execute a particular code segment for example a function in the source file Module usage shows how much of the execution time is spent outside of the module from exit to entry This measurement gives an indication of how often the module is being used When using the SPMT to perform duration measurements there should be only two addresses stored in the trace memory the entry address and the exit address Recursion can place several entry addresses before the first exit address and or several exit addresses before the first entry address Duration measurements are made between the last entry address in a series of entry addresses and the last exit address in a series of exit addresses see the figure below All of the entry and exit add
187. ce To display the configuration context e When answering the configuration questions choose Display Context from the pulldown menu The current directory context and the current configuration files are displayed in a window Click the Done pushbutton when you wish to close the window 2 Directory users questidemo debug_envihp64751 Configuration File users questidemo debug_envihp64751 Config To access help information e When answering the configuration questions choose Help General Topic from the pulldown menu e From the configuration interface main menu click on the Help Topic button 117 Chapter 5 Configuring the Emulator Using the Configuration Interface To exit the configuration interface When answering the configuration questions choose File gt Exit from the pulldown menu or type lt CTRL gt x and click Yes in the confirmation dialog box From the configuration interface main menu click the Exit Window button and click Yes in the confirmation dialog box The confirmation dialog box only appears if changes have been made to the current configuration When you choose Yes from the confirmation dialog box any modifications made to the configuration which haven t been stored are lost Choosing No from the confirmation dialog box cancels the exit and keeps the emulator configuration interface running To load a configuration In the emulator analyzer interfac
188. ce Symbol Modes Source Mixed or using the command line enter the set source on symbols on command To display only high level source lines choose Settings Source Symbol Modes Source Only or using the command line enter the set source only symbols on command The source symbol modes affect mnemonic memory displays and trace displays Each display mode cascade menu choice is a toggle Choosing one of these items causes it to be the only one active and toggles all others off Provided that symbols were loaded the interface defaults to e Source only for mnemonic memory displays e Source mixed for trace listing displays 206 Chapter 6 Using the Emulator Changing the Interface Settings To set the display modes e Choose Settings Display Modes to open the display modes dialog box Press and hold the select Sa Source Symbols View mouse button and drag the n ource in Memory Source Only r mouse to select Source Only Source Mixed or Off Source in Trace Source Mixed re Tab Expansion 2 to 15 Spaces a Symbolic Addresses Clicking toggles whether symbolic information is displayed Mnemonic Field 55 Move the mouse porter to the Symbols in Mnemonic Field 16 text entry area and type in the value Descriptions of the Source Line modes follow Source 60 to 255 All Others 1 to 80 Auto Update Clicking toggles auto update i Memory Displays Except Mnemonic settings aj Trace
189. ce after 1000H then data 5 lt RETURN gt Also see the trace command examples See Also The trace command Also refer to the Making Coordinated Measurements chapter 425 Chapter 11 Emulator Analyzer Interface Commands wait wait lt RETURN gt lt TIME gt ae or measurement_complete measurement complete or Pe lt TIME gt i This command allows you to present delays to the system The wait command can be an enhancement to a command file or to normal operation at the main emulation level Delays allow the emulation system and target processor time to reach a certain condition or state before executing the next emulation command The wait command does not appear on the softkey labels You must type the wait command into the keyboard After you type wait the command parameters will be accessible through the softkeys If you issue a wait command without any other options the system will pause until it receives a lt CTRL gt c signal Note that if set intr lt CTRL gt c was not executed on your system lt CTRL gt c normally defaults to the backspace key See your UNIX system administrator for more details regarding keyboard definitions Note that a wait command in a command file will cause execution of the command file to pause until a lt CTRL gt c signal is received if lt CTRL gt c is defined as the interrupt signal Subsequent com
190. ce card 5 run command 174 395 396 from reset 175 scheme files for X resources 315 501 color scheme 316 320 502 custom 320 321 503 input scheme 316 502 label scheme 316 320 502 platform scheme 316 501 size scheme 316 502 scroll bar 27 secondary branch expression 564 select mouse button 29 selecting emulation monitor 123 132 sequencer analyzer 564 branch 564 terms 245 564 using the 245 249 SEQUENCING in trace command 397 398 server X 314 500 set command 399 403 shell variables 100 sig INT 293 signal considerations 478 signals CMB 299 simulated I O 108 380 display command 352 displaying screen 217 219 keyboard input 218 size scheme 316 502 softkey driven help information 97 softkey pushbuttons 27 585 Index softkeys 95 software installation for HP 9000 538 543 installation for SPARCsystems 544 548 software breakpoints 179 191 clearing 189 clearing all 191 copy command 346 deactivating 186 display command 352 enable disable 181 modify command 381 opcode locations 184 186 permanent setting 184 re activating 187 ROM code 179 setting 185 setting all 186 setting while running user code 180 software breakpoints list displaying 180 software performance measurements 267 269 296 absolute information 276 activity measurements 269 283 adding traces 274 288 duration 284 292 end 384 ending 294 how th
191. ckground monitor file noabort This option allows you to load a file even if part of the file is located at memory mapped as guarded or target ROM trom nosymbols This option causes the file specified to be loaded without symbols noupdate This option suppresses rebuilding of the symbol data base when you load an absolute file If you load an absolute file end emulation then modify the file and relink it the symbol database will not be updated upon reentering emulation and reloading the file The default is to rebuild the database symbols This option causes the file specified to be loaded with symbols trace This option allows you to load a previously generated trace file trace_spec This option allows you to load a previously generated trace specification Note that the current trace specification will be modified but a new trace will not be started To start a trace with the newly loaded trace specification enter trace again or specify trace again not trace If you specify trace a new trace will begin with the default trace specification not the one you loaded Examples load sortl lt RETURN gt load configuration config3 lt RETURN gt load trace trace3 lt RETURN gt See Also The display trace command 375 Chapter 11 Emulator Analyzer Interface Commands log_commands lt FILE gt off noappend log commands This command allows you to record com
192. codes it s possible to map address ranges that overlap When address ranges with different function codes overlap you must load a separately linked module for the space associated with each function code The modules are linked separately because linker errors occur when address ranges overlap When address ranges are mapped with different function codes and there are no overlapping ranges your program modules may exist in one absolute file However you have to use multiple load commands one for each function code specifier This is necessary to load the various sections of the absolute file into the appropriate function code qualified memory ranges When you do this be sure that all address ranges not mapped that is the other memory mapper term are mapped as target RAM When other is mapped as guarded guarded memory access errors from the attempt to load the absolute file sections that are outside the specified function code range can prevent the absolute file sections that are inside the specified function range from being loaded 141 Chapter 5 Configuring the Emulator Mapping Memory Examples Suppose you re developing a system with the following characteristics e Input port at 100 hex e Output port at 400 hex e Supervisor program from 1000 through 1fff hex e User program from 3000 through 3fff hex e User data from 3000 through 3fff hex Notice that the last two terms have address ranges that overla
193. command The break and run commands 394 Chapter 11 Emulator Analyzer Interface Commands run run run lt RETURN gt from EXPR S FCODE y S transfer_address J reset until EXPR E FCODE P This command causes the emulator to execute a program If the processor is in a reset state run will cause the reset to be released If the from parameter and an address is specified the processor will start running your program at that address Otherwise the run will occur from the address currently stored in the processor s program counter A run from reset command will reset the processor and then allow it to run It is equivalent to entering a reset command followed by a run command If the emulator is configured to participate in the READY signal on the CMB then this emulator will release the READY signal so that it will go TRUE if all other HP 64700 emulators participating on that signal are also ready See the cmb_execute command description Qualifying a run command with an until parameter causes a software breakpoint to be set before the program is run If you omit the address option EXPR the emulator begins program execution at the current address specified by the emulation processor program counter If an absolute file containing a transfer address has just been loaded execution starts at that address The parameter
194. command line enter the trace command The trace command tells the analyzer to begin monitoring the states which appear on the trace signals You will see a message that confirms that a trace is started The default trace command simply trace with no options will trigger on any state store all captured states While the emulator is running the user program you can start the default trace measurement with the command trace lt RETURN gt A message is displayed on the status line to show you that the Emulation trace has started and another message will show you when the Emulation trace is complete To display the trace status Choose Display Status Using the command line enter the display status command In addition to the analyzer information shown on the status line Emulation trace started Emulation trace complete etc you can display complete analyzer status with the command below 224 Chapter 7 Using the Emulation Analyzer The Basics of Starting Stopping and Displaying Traces Examples To display the trace status display status lt RETURN gt Status Emulator Status M6834 Running user program Trace Status Emulation trace complete Arm ignored Trigger in memory Arm to trigger States 512 512 511 Sequence term 2 Occurrence left 1 The first line of the emulation trace status display shows the user trace has been completed other possibilities are that
195. considers to be discrete Discrete here means that the interface will stop expanding the highlight in a given direction when it discovers a delimiting character not determined to be part of the string A common delimiter would of course be a space When you press and hold the mouse button and drag the pointer to highlight text the interface copies all highlighted text to the entry buffer when you release the mouse button Because the interface displays absolute addresses as hex values any copied and pasted string that can be interpreted as a hexadecimal value that is the string 80 Chapter 4 Entering Commands Using Menus the Entry Buffer and Action Keys contains only numbers 0 through 9 and characters a through f automatically has an h appended Note If you have multiple Graphical User Interface windows open a copy and paste action in any window causes the text to appear in all entry buffers in all windows That is because although there are a number of entry buffers being displayed there is actually only one entry buffer and it is common to all windows That means you can copy a symbol or an address from one window and then use it in another window On a memory display or trace display a symbol may not be completely displayed because there are too many characters to fit into the width limit for a particular column of the display To make a symbol usable for copy and paste you can scroll the screen left or right
196. control card in the HP 64700 The following figure shows probe dimensions 490 Chapter 13 Specifications and Characteristics Emulator Specifications and Characteristics Emulator Dimensions Width 325 mm 12 8 in Height 173 mm 6 8 in Length 389 mm 15 3 in Emulator Weight HP 64751 8 2 kg 18 1b Cable Length Emulator to approximately 914 mm 3 ft target system Probe Dimensions 92 mm 3 625 in width x 16 mm 0 626 in height x 159 mm 6 25 in length Communications Serial Port 25 pin female type D subminiature connector CMB Port 9 pin female type D subminiature connector CAUTION Possible damage to emulator Any component used in suspending the emulator must be rated for 30 kg 65 1b capacity 491 Chapter 13 Specifications and Characteristics Emulator Specifications and Characteristics Environmental Temperature Operating 0 C to 55 C 32 F to 131 F Non operating 40 C to 70 C 40 F to 158 F Altitude Operating 4 600m 15 000 ft Non operating 15 300m 50 000 ft Relative Humidity 15 to 95 492 Part 4 Concept Guide Topics that explain concepts and apply them to advanced tasks 493 Part 4 494 14 Concepts 495 Concepts This chapter provides conceptual information on the following topics e X resources and the Graphical User Interface 496 Chapter 14 Concepts X Resources and th
197. ctrical characteristics 478 environmental characteristics of 492 error messages 453 general description 4 multiple start stop 5 305 306 physical characteristics 490 plugging into a target system 52 probe cable length 491 restrict to real time runs 120 running from target reset 175 specifications and characteristics 478 492 574 Index status lines predefined values for 235 using the 154 weight 491 emulator configuration break processor on write to ROM 150 clock selection 119 exiting the configuration interface 118 load command 374 loading from file 118 modify command 379 modifying a configuration section 113 monitor entry after 120 starting the configuration interface 111 storing 115 target memory access size 149 trace background foreground operation 151 emulator limitations external DMA support 134 emulator probe access to target system 490 cable length 491 dimensions 491 pin alignment 60 power requirements 478 target system connection 52 emulator status displaying 216 emulator analyzer interface exiting 47 71 72 running in multiple windows 65 starting 65 68 emulator analyzer window changing directory context 172 changing symbol context 173 end command 47 72 364 365 entry pod commands 104 simulated io 218 entry buffer 27 address copy and paste to 81 clearing 80 copy and paste from 84 copy and paste to 80 575 Index Entry Buffer Recall dialog
198. ctuates pushbuttons select outside of the display area Middle button on three button mouse Both buttons on two button mouse 29 Chapter 1 Getting Started The following tables show the default keyboard bindings Keyboard Key Bindings Generic Key Name HP 9000 Sun SPARCsystem menu select extend char extend char insert insert char insert char delete delete char delete char left arrow left arrow left arrow right arrow right arrow right arrow up arrow up arrow up arrow down arrow down arrow down arrow escape escape escape TAB TAB TAB 30 Chapter 1 Getting Started The Getting Started Tutorial This tutorial gives you step by step instructions on how to perform a few basic tasks using the emulator analyzer interface The tutorial examples presented in this chapter make the following assumptions e The HP 64751 emulator and HP 64704 analyzer are installed into the HP 64700 Card Cage the HP 64700 is connected to the host computer and the emulator analyzer interface software has been installed as outlined in the Installation chapter e The emulator contains at least 256 Kbytes of emulation memory installed in bank 0 and is plugged into the demo target system The Demonstration Program The demonstration program used in this chapter is a simple environmental control system The program controls the temperature and humidity of a room requiring accurate environmental control 31 Chapter 1 G
199. d Add the line LINK A6 1234h Exit out of the editor saving your changes won The file you just edited is assembled and the patch main menu appears Type a and press lt RETURN gt to apply the patch 44 Chapter 1 Getting Started Step 12 Patch assembly language code Memory sp imnemonic file main module main c address label data 32 extern void interrupt_sim simulate an interrupt 93 extern void do_sort sets up ascii array and calls 94 95 maint 36 pr main main 46561234 AB 1234 9 init_system Baagarc4 4EB90AA 14 init init_system 98 proc_spec_init aG8GFCA 4EB980801A p proc_spec_init 39 148 while true aaagar DA 4E 1 181 102 update_system BagaeF D2 4EB9000015 up update_system 143 num_checks Notice in the emulator analyzer interface that the instruction at address main has changed Click on the Patch action key again A window running the vi editor again appears allowing you to modify the patch code that was just created Modify the line you added previously to LINK A6 0 Exit out of the editor saving your changes The file you just edited is assembled and the patch main menu appears Type a lt RETURN3 gt to apply the patch Notice in the emulator analyzer interface that the instruction at address main has been changed back to what it was originally When patching a single address make sure the new instruction
200. d When the EXECUTE signal is received the emulator will run at the current program counter address or the address specified in the specify run command Note that when the CMB is being actively controlled by another emulator the step command does not work correctly The emulator may end up running in user code NOT stepping Disable CMB interaction see To disable synchronous measurements below while stepping the processor Note that enabling CMB interaction does not affect the operation of analyzer cross triggering You can use the specify trace command to specify that an analyzer measurement begin upon reception of the CMB EXECUTE signal The trace measurement defined by the specify trace command will be started when the EXECUTE signal becomes active When the trace measurement begins you will see the message CMB execute emulation trace started 305 Chapter 9 Making Coordinated Measurements Starting Stopping Multiple Emulators Examples When you enter a normal trace command trace at execute is disabled and the analyzer ignores the CMB EXECUTE signal To enable synchronous measurements specify run from 1e8h lt RETURN gt To trace when synchronous execution begins specify trace after address main lt RETURN gt To start synchronous measurements Enter the cmb_execute command The cmb_execute command will cause the EXECUTE line to be pulsed thereby initiating a synchronous measurement CM
201. d to read or write the value s For example when the access mode is byte and a target system location is modified to contain the value 12345678H byte instructions are used to write the byte values 12H 34H 56H and 78H to target system memory Answer bytes if the emulator should make 8 bit accesses to target system memory Answer words if the emulator should make 16 bit accesses to target system memory Answer longs if the emulator should make 32 bit accesses to target system memory 149 Chapter 5 Configuring the Emulator Setting the Debug Trace Options j Setting the Debug Trace Options In order to set the debug trace options you must first start the configuration interface and access the Debug Trace Options configuration section refer to the previous Using the Configuration Interface section This section shows you how to e Fnable disable breaks on writes to ROM e Trace background cycles To enable disable breaks on writes to ROM Access the configuration questions Answer yes to the Modify trace debug options question Answer yes to the Break processor on write to ROM question to enable breaks answer no to disable breaks When breaks on writes to ROM are enabled The emulator will break into the emulation monitor whenever the user program attempts to write to a memory region mapped as ROM Even though execution breaks into the monitor the memory location is modified if
202. d Computer Software clause at DFARS 52 227 7013 HEWLETT PACKARD Company 3000 Hanover St Palo Alto CA 94304 1181 Logical Name Processor 1 em68k m68000 2 em80960 180960 3 em68340 m68340 Number of Emulator to Update intr usually cntl C or DEL to abort To update firmware in the HP 64700 that contains the 68340 emulator enter 3 Product 64700 64703 64704 64706 64740 64744 64760 64751 BUNE Number of Product to Update intr usually cntl C or DEL to abort To update the HP 64751A 68340 emulator firmware enter 5 Enable progress messages y n y Woo To enable status messages enter y 558 Chapter 16 Installing Updating Emulator Firmware To update emulator firmware with progflash Checking System firmware revision Mainframe is a 64700B Reading configuration from usr hp64000 inst update 64751 cfg ROM identifier address 2FFFFOH Required hardware identifier 1FF4H Control ROM Control ROM Control ROM Programming Programming Programming start a size width voltage voltage voltage ddress 280000H 40000H 16 control address 2FFFFEH control value FFFFH control mask OH Rebooting HP64700 Checking Hardware id code Erasing Flash ROM Downloading ROM code usr hp64000 inst update 64751 X Code start 280000H should equal control ROM start Code size 2348CH must be less than control ROM size Finishing up Rebooting HP64700 Flash programming
203. d absolute file name to be loaded No symbols loaded Cause You tried to step through lines in the source file before symbols are loaded Action Load symbols and try again or use step with the source option i e step assembly language program 443 Chapter 12 Error Messages Graphical Softkey Interface Messages Unnumbered No valid trace data Cause You tried to store trace data before a trace was completed Action Wait until valid trace data is available before attempting to store a trace Not a valid trace file load aborted Cause You tried to load a file TR that was not created by the emulation session Action Only load trace data files that were created by the emulator Not compatible trace file load aborted Cause You tried to load a file TR that was created by another type of emulator Action Only load trace data files that were created by the same type of emulator Number of lines not in range 1 lt valid lines lt 50 Cause You tried to enter a number of lines that was outside the range from 1 to 50 Action Try entering the command again using a valid number of lines Number of spaces not in range 2 lt valid spaces lt 15 Cause You tried to enter a number of spaces outside the range from 2 to 15 Action Try entering the command again using a valid number of spaces opcode extends beyond specified address range Cause Memory disassembly is attempted on an address range that is too smal
204. d as they appear in the global symbols display When specifying a local symbol you must include the name of the module anly c as shown below anly c cmp_function Operators Analysis specification expressions may contain operators All operations are carried out on 32 bit two s complement integers Values which are not 32 bits will be sign extended when expression evaluation occurs The available operators are listed below in the order of evaluation precedence Parentheses are also allowed in expressions to change the order of evaluation Unary two s complement unary one s complement The unary two s complement operator is not allowed on constants containing don t care bits 1 Integer multiply divide and modulo These operators are not allowed on constants containing don t care bits Addition subtraction These operators are not allowed on constants containing don t care bits amp Bitwise AND Bitwise inclusive OR Values symbols and operators may be used together in analysis specification expressions For example if the local symbol exists the following is a valid expression module c symb 0b67dh 0fff00h 232 Chapter 7 Using the Emulation Analyzer Qualifying Trigger and Store Conditions However you cannot add two symbols unless one of them is an EQU type symbol Emulation Analyzer Trace Signals When you qualify states you specify values that should be found on the analy
205. d in the trace list This prevents symbol display This displays symbols This option works for the trace list memory software breakpoints and register step mnemonics Displays only high level symbols such as those available from a compiler See the Symbolic Retrieval Utilities User s Guide for a detailed discussion of symbols Displays only low level symbols such as those generated internally by a compiler or an assembly symbol Displays all symbols This option allows you to define the number of spaces inserted for tab characters in the source listing Prompts you for the number of spaces to use in replacing the tab character Values in the range of 2 through 15 may be entered When using multiple windows or terminals and specifying this option the display buffer in that window or terminal will be updated when a new measurement completes This is the default Note that for displays that show memory contents the values will be updated when a command executes that changes memory contents such as modify memory load and so on Specifies the logical value to which a particular UNIX environment variable is to be set 402 source label mnemonic symbols lt WIDTH gt Examples See Also Chapter 11 Emulator Analyzer Interface Commands set This allows you to specify the width in columns of the source lines in the memory mnemonic display To adjust the width of the source lines in the trace d
206. d to be complete Click on the Recall button to the right of the entry buffer A selection dialog box appears You can select from entry buffer values that have been entered previously or that have been predefined Click on main in the selection dialog box and click the OK pushbutton Notice that the value main has been returned to the entry buffer To trigger on the address main and store states that occur after the trigger choose Trace After Or using the command line enter trace after main lt RETURN gt Notice the message Emulation trace started appears on the status line This shows that the analyzer has begun to look for the trigger state which is the address main on the processor s address bus Run the demo program from its transfer address by choosing Execution Run from Transfer Address Or using the command line enter run from transfer_address lt RETURN gt 41 Chapter 1 Getting Started Step 10 Trace the program Notice that now the message on the status line is Emulation trace complete This shows the trigger state has been found and the analyzer trace memory has been filled 5 To view the captured states choose Display Trace Or using the command line enter display trace lt RETURN gt Opcode or Status w Source Lines time count symbols mnemonic w symbols relati eet c line 1 thru 96 HTHATHRERHNR UNA TRRRM AAR ANR IER HOR n void interrupt
207. d to reduce the number of states displayed in the current trace To modify the last trace command entered Choose Trace Trace Spec and use the dialog box to select and edit a trace command Using the command line enter the trace modify_command command The Trace Specification Selection dialog box contains a list of trace specifications executed during the emulation session as well as any predefined trace specifications present at interface startup You can predefine trace specifications and set the maximum number of entries for the dialog box by setting X resources see the Setting X Resources chapter The trace modify_command command recalls the last trace command The advantage of this command over command recall is that you do not have to move forward and backward over other commands to find the last trace command also the last trace command is always available no matter how many commands have since been entered 230 Chapter 7 Using the Emulation Analyzer Qualifying Trigger and Store Conditions Qualifying Trigger and Store Conditions This section describes tasks relating to the qualification of trigger and storage states You can trigger on or store specific states or specific values on a set of trace signals which are identified by trace labels Also you can prestore states The prestore qualifier is a second storage qualifier used for storing states that occur before the normally stored states Prestor
208. dify register command is not allowed when the emulator is configured for real time runs and is running the user program lt REGISTER gt Specifies the name of an individual register Refer to the Accessing Registers section in the Using the Emulator chapter for a list of the register names and classes set This option allows you to activate software breakpoints in your program If no breakpoint addresses are specified in the command all breakpoints that have been inactivated executed are reactivated short Modify memory values as 32 bit real numbers software _ Lets you change the specification of software breakpoints Software breakpoints breakpoints provide a way to accurately stop the execution of your program at one or more instruction locations When a software breakpoint is set the instruction that is normally at that location is replaced with a BGND instruction When the software breakpoint is executed control is passed to the emulator s monitor program and the original instruction is restored in the user program Thus execution is interrupted before the instruction at the specified address is executed Operation of the program can be resumed after the breakpoint is encountered by specifying either a run or step command If you modify software breakpoints while the memory mnemonic display is active the new breakpoints are indicated by a in the leftmost column of the instruction containing the breakpoint The softw
209. e Also command files can be executed by placing the name of the file in the command definition nn Finally an empty action means to repeat the previous operation whether it came from a pulldown a dialog a popup or another action key To set up custom action keys when the graphical interface is used with the 68340 emulator modify the m68340 actionKeysSub keyDefs resource m68340 actionKeysSub keyDefs Make Load Pgm Run Pgm Trace after Step Source Again cd users project2 68340 make in_browser load configuration config EA load program2 run from reset es trace after display trace set source on display memory mnemonic step source we Refer to the previous To modify Graphical User Interface resources section for more detailed information on modifying resources 322 Chapter 10 Setting X Resources To set initial recall buffer values To set initial recall buffer values e Modify the entries resource for the particular recall buffer There are six popup recall buffers present in the Graphical User Interface The resources for these popup recall buffers are listed in the following table The window manager resource transientDecoration controls the borders around dialog box windows The most natural setting for this resource is title Popup Recall Buffer Resources Recall Popup Resources Description File Context Directory
210. e Clicking on one of lt gt Memory Map these lines selects a particular configuration Emulator Pod Settings section Debug Trace Options Simulated IO Analyzer Configuration Sections Interactive Measurement Specification Clicking this button Modify Apply to Exit Help presents the questions Section Emulator Window Topic for the selected configuration section Clicking this button Clicking this button Clicking this button stores the current exits the configuration presents the on line help configuration interface 112 Chapter 5 Configuring the Emulator Using the Configuration Interface To modify a configuration section 1 Start the emulator configuration interface 2 Click on a section name in the configuration interface main menu and click the Modify Section pushbutton 3 Use the command line to answer the configuration questions If you re using the Softkey Interface The configuration questions in the General Items section are the first to be asked To access the questions in the Reconfigure Internal Registers section answer yes to the Reconfigure internal registers question To access the questions in the Monitor Type section answer yes to the Modify memory configuration question To access the questions in the Memory Map section answer yes to the Modify memory configuration question To access the questions in the Emulator Pod Settings section answer
211. e bottom of the emulator analyzer window The status line is not part of the command line and continues to be displayed whether the command line is on or off Choosing certain pulldown menu items while the command line is off causes the command line to be turned on That is because the menu item chosen requires some input at the command line that cannot be supplied another way To enter a command Build a command using the softkey label pushbuttons by successively positioning the mouse pointer on a pushbutton and clicking the pushbutton select mouse button until a complete command is formed Execute the completed command by clicking the Return pushbutton found near the bottom of the command line in the Command group Or Execute the completed command using the Command Line entry area popup menu Position the mouse pointer in the command line entry area press and hold the select mouse button until the Command Line popup menu appears then choose the Execute Command menu item You may need to combine pushbutton and keyboard entry to form a complete command A complete command is a string of softkey labels and text entered with the keyboard You know a command is complete when Return pushbutton is not halfbright The interface does not check or act on a command however until the command is executed In contrast commands resulting from pulldown menu choices and action keys are supplied with the needed carriage return as part of t
212. e choose File gt Load Emulator Config from the pulldown menu and use the File Selection dialog box to specify the configuration file to be loaded Using the command line enter the load configuration lt FILE gt command This command loads previously created and stored configuration files 118 Chapter 5 Configuring the Emulator Modifying the General Configuration Items Modifying the General Configuration Items In order to modify the general configuration items you must first start the configuration interface and access the General Items configuration section refer to the previous Using the Configuration Interface section This section shows you how to e Select the emulator s clock source e Enable disable entry into the monitor after configuration e Restrict to real time runs e Turn OFF the restriction to real time runs To select the emulator s clock source For 64751 66508 and higher numbered active probe printed circuit boards the selection of the internal or external clock source is made by positioning a jumper module on the board as described in the Plugging into a Target System chapter For 64751 66506 and lower numbered active probe printed circuit boards the selection of the internal or external clock source is made with the Micro processor clock source configuration question Answer internal or external to the Micro processor clock source question When you answer inter
213. e power if needed Cannot start Pod initialization failed Cause The host system could not start a new emulation session because it could not initialize the emulator Action Cycle power on the emulator verify that there are no red lights on the front of the emulator You may need to run the Terminal Interface pv command to verify that the emulator is functioning properly before starting a new session Configuration not valid restoring previous configuration Configuration not valid restoring default configuration Cause The modifications you tried to make to the emulator configuration are not valid so the host system restored the previous configuration Action See the Configuring the Emulator chapter for more information about the emulator configuration items and their settings 433 Chapter 12 Error Messages Graphical Softkey Interface Messages Unnumbered Configuration process QUIT Cause The configuration process ended because lt CTRL gt SIGQUIT signal was encountered This is an easy way to exit configuration without saving any changes Action Try starting the emulation session again If the problem persists you may need to cycle power on the emulator Connecting to lt LOGICAL NAME gt Cause This is a status message The host system is making a communication connection to the emulator whose logical name is defined in usr hp64000 etc 64700tab net or usr hp64000 etc 64700tab Continue load
214. e you can only enter commands from the keyboard using the command line The menu commands in the Graphical User Interface are a subset of the commands available when using the command line While you have a great deal of capability in the menu commands you have even more in the command line This chapter shows you how to enter commands in each type of emulator analyzer interface The tasks associated with entering commands are grouped into the following sections e Using menus the entry buffer and action keys e Using the command line with the mouse e Using the command line with the keyboard e Using command files e Using pod commands e Forwarding commands to other HP 64700 interfaces 74 Chapter 4 Entering Commands Using Menus the Entry Buffer and Action Keys Using Menus the Entry Buffer and Action Keys This section describes the tasks you perform when using the Graphical User Interface to enter commands This section describes how to e Choose a pulldown menu item using the mouse e Choose a pulldown menu item using the keyboard e Use the popup menus e Use the entry buffer e Copy and paste to the entry buffer e Use action keys e Use dialog boxes e Access help information 75 Chapter 4 Entering Commands Using Menus the Entry Buffer and Action Keys j To choose a pulldown menu item using the mouse method 1 Position the mouse pointer over the name of the menu on the menu b
215. e Broadcast Message Server or BMS lt COMMAND gt An ASCII string enclosed in quotes that is the command to be forwarded to the named interface debug Forwards command to the high level debugger interface emul Forwards command to the emulator analyzer interface perf Forwards commands to the software performance analyzer interface lt UINAME gt Forwards commands to a user interface name other than those available on the softkeys Examples To send the Program Run command to the debugger forward debug Program Run lt RETURN gt To send the profile command to the software performance analyzer forward debug profile lt RETURN gt See Also The User s Guide for the interface to which you are forwarding commands 371 Chapter 11 Emulator Analyzer Interface Commands help lt HELP_FILE gt Examples help lt HELP_FILE gt F lt RETURN gt Displays information about system and emulation features during an emulation session Typing help or displays softkey labels that list the options on which you may receive help When you select an option the system will list the information to the screen The help command is not displayed on the softkeys You must enter it into the keyboard You may use a question mark in place of help to access the help information The parameters are as follows This represents one of the available options on the softkey labels You can ei
216. e Graphical User Interface X Resources and the Graphical User Interface This section contains more detailed information about X resources and scheme files that control the appearance and operation of the Graphical User Interface This section e Describes the X Window concepts surrounding resource specification e Describes the Graphical User Interface s implementation of scheme files X Resource Specifications An X resource specification is a resource name and a value The resource name identifies the element whose appearance or behavior is to be defined and the value specifies how the element should look or behave For example consider the following resource specification Application form row done background red The resource name is Application form row done background and the value is LL m red Resource Names Follow Widget Hierarchy A widget is an OSF Motif graphic device from which X applications are built For example pushbuttons and menu bars are Motif widgets Applications are built using a hierarchy of widgets and the application s X resource names follow this hierarchy For example Application form row done background red In the resource name above the top level widget is named after the application One of the top level widget s children is a form widget one of the form widget s children is arow column manager widget and one of the row column manager widget s children is a pushbutton widge
217. e Using the command line enter the run from lt address gt command Examples To run from address 9COH run from 9c0h lt RETURN gt To run programs from the transfer address e Choose Execution Run from Transfer Address e Using the command line enter the run from transfer_address command Most software development tools allow you to specify a starting or entry address for program execution That address is included with the absolute file s symbolic information and is known by the interface as the transfer address To run programs from reset e Choose Execution Run from Reset e Using the command line enter the run from reset command The run from reset command resets the emulation processor and lets the emulator run and fetch its stack pointer and program counter value from memory 175 Chapter 6 Using the Emulator Executing User Programs Examples A reset command followed by a run command will load the interrupt stack pointer and program counter values specified during configuration into the emulation processor and run from the loaded program counter value This is true for both background and foreground monitors To run programs until an address Position the mouse pointer in the entry buffer and enter the address you want to run from then choose Execution gt Run until Using the command line enter the run until lt address gt command When you run until an address a
218. e basic register class is copied Specifies the name of an individual register Refer to the Accessing Registers section in the Using the Emulator chapter for a list of the register names and classes This option lets you copy a list of the current software breakpoints to a selected destination This allows you to copy emulation and analysis status information This option represents the symbol whose children are to be listed See the SYMB syntax diagram and the Symbolic Retrieval Utilities User s Guide for information on symbol hierarchy Specifies the last line number of the trace list to include in the copied range This allows you to specify a destination for the copied information This lets you copy the current trace listing to the selected destination Trace information is copied in the same format as specified in the last display trace command Initial values are the same as specified by the last display trace command 346 Chapter 11 Emulator Analyzer Interface Commands copy Examples copy local_symbols_in mod_name to printer lt RETURN gt copy local_symbols_in mod_name to linenumfile lt RETURN gt copy memory start to printer lt RETURN gt copy memory 0 thru 100h start thru 5 500H target2 to memlist lt RETURN gt copy memory 2000h thru 204fh to memlist lt RETURN gt copy registers BASIC to printer lt RETURN gt copy registers to reglist lt RETURN g
219. e beginning of a command word or token the softkey labels change to display the possible choices at that level of the command See To edit the command line using the mouse and the command line pushbuttons and To edit the command line using the keyboard for information about additional editing operations you can perform 93 Chapter 4 Entering Commands Using the Command Line with the Mouse To recall commands 1 Click the pushbutton labeled Recall in the Command Line to display the dialog box 2 Choose a command from the buffer list You can also enter a command directly into the text entry area of the dialog box Because all command entry methods in the interface pulldown menus action keys and command line entries are echoed to the command line entry area the contents of the Command Recall dialog box is not restricted to just commands entered directly into the command line entry area The Command Recall dialog box contains a list of interface commands executed during the session as well as any predefined commands present at interface startup If you exit the emulation analysis session with the interface locked commands in the recall buffer are saved and will be present when you restart the interface You can predefine entries for the Command Recall dialog box and define the maximum number of entries by setting X resources refer to the Setting X Resources chapter See To use dialog boxes for informat
220. e cases when a carriage return is required and you can supply it by clicking the Return command pushbutton or by pressing the lt RETURN gt key 114 Chapter 5 Configuring the Emulator Using the Configuration Interface At the last question of a configuration section you are asked if you wish to return to the main menu You can click the next_sec softkey pushbutton to access the questions in the next configuration section To recall a configuration question click the RECALL softkey pushbutton If you do this at the starting question of a configuration section you are asked if you want to return to the main menu In order for the emulator to recognize any configuration changes the configuration must be applied to the emulator To store a configuration When answering the configuration questions choose File Store from the pulldown menu and use the File Selection dialog box to name the configuration file From the configuration interface main menu click on the Apply to Emulator button and use the File Selection dialog box to name the configuration file If you re using the Softkey Interface the last configuration question Configuration file name lets you name the file to which configuration information is stored If you don t enter a name configuration information is saved to a temporary file which is deleted when you exit the interface and release the emulation system The file to which the co
221. e expressions specified in the last display data command unless new expressions are supplied or appended with a leading comma Symbols are normally set off until you give the command set symbols on Otherwise only the address data type and value of the data item will be displayed This option displays the recorded list of error messages that occurred during the emulation session This option displays the recorded list of events An expression is a combination of numeric values symbols operators and parentheses specifying the data item to display or an offset value for the breakpoint address See the EXPR syntax diagram 351 Chapter 11 Emulator Analyzer Interface Commands display global_symbols local_symbols_in memory offset_by pod_command registers lt REGISTER gt repetitively simulated_io software __ breakpoints This command displays the global symbols defined for the current absolute file Global symbols are symbols declared as global in the source file They include procedure names variables constants and file names When the display global_symbols command is used the listing will include the symbol name and its logical address This option lets you display all the children of a given symbol Displaying the local symbols sets the current working symbol to the one specified See the SYMB syntax page and the Symbolic Retrieval Utilities User s Guide for details on symbol hiera
222. e file name the symbols associated with that source file become the address ranges for which activity is measured If the symbols database is not loaded an error message will occur telling you that the source filename symbol was not found 273 Chapter 8 Making Software Performance Measurements Activity Performance Measurements You can also use the local_symbols_in option with procedure symbols this allows you to measure activity related to the symbols defined in a single function or procedure Restoring the Current Measurement The performance_measurement_initialize restore command allows you to restore old performance measurement data from the perf out file in the current directory If you have not exited and reentered emulation you can add traces to a performance measurement simply by entering another performance_measurement_run command However if you exit and reenter the emulation system you must enter the performance_measurement _ initialize restore command before you can add traces to a performance measurement When you restore a performance measurement make sure your current trace command is identical to the command used with the restored measurement The restore option checks the emulator software version and will only work if the perf out files you are restoring were made with the same software version as is presently running in the emulator If you ran tests using a former software version and saved perf out files the
223. e host system to continue the emulation session failed Action Check the data communication switch settings on the rear panel of the HP 64700 series emulator If necessary refer to the HP 64700 Installation Service Guide Emul700dmn executable not found Cause The emulation session could not begin because the host system could not locate the HP 64700 emulator daemon process executable Action Make sure that software installation is correct Then try starting the emulator again Emul700dmn failed to start Cause The emulation session could not begin because the host system could not start the HP 64700 emulator daemon process Action Make sure there is sufficient disk space under usr hp64000 Make sure the host system is operating properly that all Softkey Interface software has been loaded correctly and the data communication switch settings on the emulator rear panel match the settings in the usr hp64000 etc 64700tab net or 64700tab file Emul700dmn message too large Emul700dmn message too small Emul700dmn queue and or semaphores missing Emul700dmn queue failure Emul700dmn error in file operation Emul700dmn queue full Cause The HP 64700 emulator daemon process command was too large for the host system to process Action You must press end_release_system to exit this emulation session completely then start a new session Make sure the host system is operating properly that all Softkey Interface software has been l
224. e is useful for capturing entry points to procedures or for identifying where global variables are accessed from This section describes how to e Qualify the trigger state and its position in the trace e Trigger on a number of occurrences of some state e Qualify states stored in the trace e Qualify prestore states e Change the count qualifier e Trace until the analyzer is halted e Cause the emulator to break into the monitor when the analyzer triggers Expressions in Trace Commands When modifying the analysis specification you can enter expressions which consist of values symbols and operators Values Values are numbers in hexadecimal decimal octal or binary These number bases are specified by the following characters Bb Binary example 10010110b QqOo Octal example 3770 or 377q D d default Decimal example 2048d or 2048 231 Chapter 7 Using the Emulation Analyzer Qualifying Trigger and Store Conditions Hh Hexadecimal example 0a7fh You must precede any hexadecimal number that begins with an A B C D E or F with a zero Don t care digits may be included in binary octal or hexadecimal numbers and they are represented by the letters X or x A zero must precede any numerical value that begins with an X Symbols A symbol database is built when the absolute file is loaded into the emulator Both global and local symbols can be used when entering expressions Global symbols are entere
225. e range files may contain comments and time ranges in units of microseconds us milliseconds ms or seconds s An example time range file is shown below Any line which starts with a is a comment 1 us 20 us 10 1 ms 100 6 ms 250 Bo G I os us microseconds ms milliseconds s seconds The above are the only abbreviations allowed The space between the number and the units abbreviation is required SE Se HE SHE HE HE 287 Chapter 8 Making Software Performance Measurements Duration Performance Measurements Examples When no user defined time range file is specified the following set of default time ranges are used us 10 us 0 1 us 100 us 00 1 us 500 us 500 1 us 1 ms 001 ms 5 ms 5 001 ms 10 ms 0 1 ms 20 ms 20 1 ms 40 ms 40 1 ms 80 ms 80 1 ms 160 ms 60 1 ms 320 ms 320 1 ms 640 ms 640 1 ms 1 2 s Restoring the Current Measurement The performance_measurement_initialize restore command allows you to restore old performance measurement data from the perf out file in the current directory If you have not exited and reentered emulation you can add traces to a performance measurement simply by entering another performance_measurement_run command However if you exit and reenter the emulation system you must enter the performance_measurement _initialize restore command before you can add traces to a performance measurement When you restore a performance measurement make sure your current trace comm
226. e the Changing the Interface Settings section If symbols are loaded into the interface the default is to display source only To return to the previous mnemonic display Choose DisplayMemory Mnemonic Previous Using the command line enter the display memory mnemonic previous_display command This command is useful for quickly returning to the previous mnemonic memory display For example suppose you are stepping source lines and you step into a function that you would like to step over You can return to the previous mnemonic memory display set a breakpoint at the line following the function call and run the program from the current program counter 199 Chapter 6 Using the Emulator Displaying and Modifying Memory To display memory in hexadecimal format e Place an absolute or symbolic address in the entry buffer then choose Display Memory Hex and select the size from the cascade menu e Using the command line enter the display memory lt address gt blocked lt size gt command This command displays memory as hexadecimal values beginning at th the entry buffer Examples To display memory in absolute word format e address in display memory ascii_old_data absolute words lt R Memory sp words absolute update address label KE TURN gt 80720A _ascii_oldd aaaa720C a00720E aaaa72E8 G0072E2 aa072E4 G8072E6 G0072E8 00072ER GQ072EC 00072EE 00072F 8 aaa7
227. e traces you include in your sample the more accurate will be your results At least four consecutive traces are required to obtain statistical interpretation of activity measurement results 293 Chapter 8 Making Software Performance Measurements Running Measurements and Creating Reports Examples Examples To run the performance measurement enter the following command performance_measurement_run 20 lt RETURN gt The command above causes 20 traces to occur The SPMT processes the trace information after each trace and the number of the trace being processed is shown on the status line To end performance measurements Use the performance_measurement_end command The performance_measurement_end command takes the data generated by the performance_measurement_run command and places it in a file named perf out in the current directory If a file named perf out already exists in the current directory it will be overwritten Therefore if you wish to save a performance measurement you must rename the perf out file before performing another measurement The performance_measurement_end command does not affect the current performance measurement data which exists within the emulation system In other words you can add more traces later to the existing performance measurement by entering another performance_measurement_run command Once you have entered the performance_measurement_end command you can use the perf
228. e up or down the information in the active window 24 Chapter 1 Getting Started Status line Displays the emulator and analyzer status Also when error and status messages occur they are displayed on the status line in addition to being saved in the error log Command line Commands are entered on the command line by pressing softkeys or by typing them in and executed by pressing the Return key The Tab and Shift Tab keys allow you to move the cursor on the command line forward or backward The Clear line key or CTRL e clears from the cursor position to the end of the line The CTRL u key clears the whole command line Softkey Interface Conventions Example Softkey Interface commands throughout the manual use the following conventions bold Commands options and parts of command syntax bold italic Commands options and parts of command syntax which may be entered by pressing softkeys normal User specified parts of a command Represents the UNIX prompt Commands which follow the are entered at the UNIX prompt lt RETURN gt The carriage return key 25 Chapter 1 Getting Started The Graphical User Interface Menu bar ____ File Display Modify Execution Breakpoints Trace Settings Action keys Entry buffer Memory mnemonic file main module main c S S lt 73 3 SCS void update_system
229. ea Allows you to enter commands from the command line e Softkey pushbuttons Clicking on these pushbuttons or pressing softkeys places the command in the command line entry area You can press and hold the select mouse button to access the Command Line popup menu e Command buttons includes command recall button The command Return button is the same as pressing the carriage return key it sends the command in the command line entry area to the emulator analyzer 27 Chapter 1 Getting Started The command Recall button allows you to recall previous or predefined commands When you click on the command Recall button a dialog box appears that allows you to select a command e Cursor buttons for command line area control Allow you to move the cursor in the command line entry area forward or backward clear to the end of the command line or clear the whole command line entry area You can choose not to display the command line area by turning it off For the most common emulator analyzer operations the pulldown menus popup menus and action keys provide all the control you need Choosing menu items that require use of the command line will automatically turn the command line back on Graphical User Interface Conventions Choosing Menu Commands This chapter uses a shorthand notation for indicating that you should choose a particular menu item For example the following instruction Choose File gt Load Configuration
230. eakpoints enable disable Breakpoints Permanent modify software_breakpoints set EXPR permanent Breakpoints Temporary modify software_breakpoints set EXPR temporary Breakpoints Set All modify software_breakpoints set Breakpoints Clear modify software_breakpoints clear EXPR Breakpoints Clear All modify software_breakpoints clear Trace Display display trace Trace Trace Spec N A browses recall buffer for trace commands Trace A fter trace after STATE Trace Before trace before STATE Trace About trace about STATE Trace Only trace only STATE Trace Only Prestore trace only STATE prestore anything Trace gt Again trace again Trace Repetitively lt previous trace spec gt repetitively Trace gt Everything trace Trace Until trace before STATE break_on_trigger Trace Until Stop trace on_halt Trace Stop stop_trace 335 Chapter 11 Emulator Analyzer Interface Commands Pulldown Command Line Settings Source Symbol Modes Absolute Settings Source Symbol Modes Symbols Settings Source Symbol Modes Source Mixed Settings Source Symbol Modes Source Only Settings Display Modes Source Only Settings Pod Command Keyboard Settings Simulated IO Keyboard Settings Command Line set source off symbols off set source off symbols on set source on inverse_video on symbols on set source only inverse_video off symbols on set display pod_comm
231. ean 0 00 Sdv 0 00 Time Percent Rel 0 00 Abs 0 00 Graph of Memory Activity relative state percents gt 1 prog 57 7173 D ie ae E Ea Ea Eo Ea BE E Ea E Ea E Eo Ea FE Eo DE Ea DE E Eo Ea DE Eo SEa E AE G data 30 51 KAKKKKKKK KKK KKK KK stack LAST 23 RR Graph of Memory Activity relative time percents gt 1 prog 60 97 KEKE KKK KKK KKK KK KKK KKK KKK KKK KK KK data 28 09 KKKKKKKK KKK KKK stack 1 0 94 oR Re Graph of Program Activity relative state percents gt 1 prog 99 82 EE IE Seo RR RAE ARHA RAKE EERARERERERERAREREEEEARAEREE Graph of Program Activity relative time percents gt 1 prog 99 84 KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KK KK KK KKK KKK KK Summary Information for 10 traces Memory Activity State count Relative count 5120 Mean sample 170 67 Mean Standard Dv 29 30 95 Confidence 12 28 Error tolerance Time count Relative Time Us 2221 20 Program Activity State count Relative count 5120 Mean sample 170 67 Mean Standard Dv 0 58 95 Confidence 0 24 Error tolerance Time count Relative Time Us 2221 20 Absolute Totals 270 Chapter 8 Making Software Performance Measurements Activity Performance Measurements Absolute count state 5120 Absolute count time Us 2221 20 This section describes how to e Set up the trace command for activity measurements e Initialize activity performance measurements e Interpret activity measurement reports To set up the trace command for act
232. ear panel to trigger an external instrument for example a logic analyzer or oscilloscope when the analyzer finds its trigger condition Also you can allow an external instrument to arm the analyzer or break emulator execution into the monitor The coordinated measurement tasks you can perform are grouped into the following sections e Setting up for coordinated measurements e Starting and stopping multiple emulators e Driving trigger signals to the CMB or BNC e Stopping program execution on trigger signals e Arming analyzers on trigger signals 298 CMB Connector BNC Connector The location of the CMB and BNC connectors on the HP 64700 rear panel is shown in the following figure sl p E o 5 g s ai AU JUU Awar CA NANY No ie CD WARNING groune eleclrical shock 7 NAANA A hitan eth U VU WY VY U Z K Line 5V 230V 00 64700820 Signal Lines on the CMB There are three bi directional signal lines on the CMB connector on the rear panel of the emulator These CMB signals are TRIGGER The CMB TRIGGER line is low true This signal can be driven or received by any HP 64700 connected to the CMB This signal can be used to trigger an analyzer It can be used as a break source for the emulator READY The CMB READY line is high true It is an open collector and performs an ANDing of
233. ecifications are Loaded 499 Scheme Files 501 Installation Guide Installation Installing Hardware 510 Step 1 Connect the Emulator Probe Cables 512 Step 2 Install Boards into the HP 64700 Card Cage 515 Step 3 Install emulation memory modules on emulator probe 527 Step 4 Plug the emulator probe into the demo target system 531 Step 5 Apply power to the HP 64700 533 Connecting the HP 64700 to a Computer or LAN 537 Installing HP 9000 Software 538 Step 1 Install the software from the media 538 Step 2 Verify the software installation 540 Step 3a Start the X server and the Motif Window Manager mwm 541 Step 3b Start HP VUE 541 Step 4 Set the necessary environment variables 541 16 Contents Installing Sun SPARCsystem Software 544 Step 1 Install the software from the media 544 Step 2 Start the X server and OpenWindows 545 Step 3 Set the necessary environment variables 545 Step 4 Verify the software installation 547 Step 5 Map your function keys 548 Verifying the Installation 549 Step 1 Determine the logical name of your emulator 549 Step 2 Start the interface with the emul700 command 550 Step 3 Exit the Graphical User Interface 553 Installing Updating Emulator Firmware To update emulator firmware with progflash 557 To display current firmware version information 560 If there is a power failure during a firmware update 561 Glossary Index 19 20 Part 1 Quick Start Guide
234. ecified value or to a single or repeated sequence This type of memory modification is done by entering the limits of the memory range to be modified EXPR thru EXPR and the value or list of values EXPR EXPR to which the contents of all locations in the range are to be changed Note that if the specified address range is not large enough to contain the new data only the specified addresses are modified If the address range contains an odd number of bytes and a word operation is being executed the last word of the address range will be modified Thus the memory modification will stop one byte after the end of the specified address range If an error occurs in writing to memory to guarded memory or target memory with no monitor the modification is aborted at the address where the error occurred 380 Chapter 11 Emulator Analyzer Interface Commands modify Memory modifications of integer values use the currently set display memory mode Byte is the default Memory modifications of real values use the currently set display memory mode Short is the default permanent Sets a permanent breakpoint The software breakpoint instruction remains in the program until the breakpoint is inactivated or removed real Modify memory as real number values lt REAL gt This prompts you to enter a real number as the value register Lets you to modify the contents of the emulation processor internal registers The mo
235. ect the cables to the HP 64700 CMB ports TWO vi I EMULATORS MALE ENY ANE FE NC MALE THREE EMULATORS E C FEMALE NC 64700E14 302 Chapter 9 Making Coordinated Measurements Setting Up for Coordinated Measurements Number of HP 64700 Series Maximum Total Length of Restrictions on the CMB Emulators Cable Connection 2 to8 100 meters None 9 to 16 50 meters None 9 to 16 100 meters Only 8 emulators may have rear panel pullups connected 17 to 32 50 meters Only 16 emulators may have rear panel pullups connected A modification must be performed by your HP Customer Engineer Emulators using the CMB must use background emulation monitors At least 3 4 of the HP 64700 Series emulators connected to the CMB must be powered up before proper operation of the entire CMB configuration can be assured To connect to the rear panel BNC Caution The BNC line on the HP 64700 accepts input and output of TTL levels only TTL levels should not be less than 0 volts or greater than 5 volts Failure to observe these specifications may result in damage to the HP 64700 Card Cage 303 Chapter 9 Making Coordinated Measurements Setting Up for Coordinated Measurements 1 Connect one end of a 50 ohm coaxial cable with male BNC connectors to the HP 64700 BNC receptacle and the other end t
236. ective conductor terminal For protection against electrical shock in case of a fault Used with field wiring terminals to indicate the terminal which must be connected to ground before operating the equipment Low noise or noiseless clean ground earth terminal Used for a signal common as well as providing protection against electrical shock in case of a fault A terminal marked with this symbol must be connected to ground in the manner described in the installation operating manual before operating the equipment Trame or chassis terminal A connection to the frame chassis of the equipment OR thich normally includes all exposed metal structures ff Alternating current power line Direct current power line Alternating or direct current power line Caution The Caution sign denotes a hazard It calls your attention to an operating procedure practice condition or similar situation which if not correctly performed or adhered to could result in damage to or destruction of part or all of the product Warning The Warning sign denotes a hazard It calls your attention to a procedure practice condition or the like which if not correctly performed could result in injury or death to personnel
237. ectory for platform SunOS specific schemes This resource should be custom set to the platform on which the X server is running and displaying the Graphical User Interface if it is different than the platform where the application is running HP64_Softkey colorScheme BW Names the color scheme file Color custom HP64_Softkey sizeScheme Small Names the size scheme file which defines Large the fonts and the spacing used custom HP64_Softkey labelScheme Label Names to use for labels and button text LANG The default uses the LANG environment custom variable if it is set and if a scheme file named Softkey SLANG exists in one of the directories searched for scheme files otherwise the default is Label HP64_Softkey inputScheme Input Specifies mouse and keyboard operation custom 316 Chapter 10 Setting X Resources To modify the Graphical User Interface resources Commonly Modified Application Resources Resource Values Description HP64_Softkey lines 24 Specifies the number of lines in the main min 18 display area HP64_Softkey columns 100 Specifies the number of columns in min 80 characters in the main display area HP64_Softkey enableCmdline True Specifies whether the command line area is False displayed when you initially enter the Graphical User Interface editFile example vi Specifies the command used to edit files
238. ed 173 Chapter 6 Using the Emulator Executing User Programs Executing User Programs You can use the emulator to run programs break program execution into the monitor step through the program by high level source lines or by assembly language instructions and reset the emulation processor When displaying memory in mnemonic format a highlighted bar shows the current program counter address When you step the mnemonic memory display is updated to highlight the new program counter address When displaying resisters the register display is updated to show you the contents of the registers after each step You can open multiple interface windows to display memory in mnemonic format and registers at the same time Both windows are updated after stepping This section describes how to e Start the emulator running the user program e Stop break from user program execution e Step through user programs e Reset the emulation processor To run programs from the current PC Choose Execution Run gt from PC Using the command line enter the run command When the emulator is executing the user program the message Running user program is displayed on the status line 174 Chapter 6 Using the Emulator Executing User Programs To run programs from an address e Position the mouse pointer in the entry buffer and enter the address you want to run from then choose Execution Run from
239. egisters and therefore doesn t let you set bit 6 in the MBAR or CF_MBAR register Action Modify the MBAR or CF_MBAR registers with values that do not set bit 6 168 Can t access module regs mbar sd bit 6 is set Can t access module regs cf_mbar sd bit 6 is set Cause These errors occur if the user program sets bit 6 of the MBAR register whose contents can be copied into the CF_MBAR register with the sync_sim_registers to_m68340_sims command and the emulator needs to access other SIM or emulator configuration registers Action Modify the MBAR or CF_MBAR registers with values that do not set bit 6 177 BDM communication failed Cause There was some problem with the serial communication interface with the emulation processor s Background Debug Mode BDM Action Initialize the emulator or cycle power Then reenter the command If the same failure occurs call your HP sales and service office 178 Unable to run performance verification tests Cause The emulator was unable to run the performance verification tests Action Make sure the emulator probe is connected correctly and that all cables are secured Make sure that the emulator probe is plugged into the demo target system and that the demo target system power cable is connected to the HP 64700 461 Chapter 12 Error Messages Terminal Interface Messages 179 179 204 205 208 206 312 M68340 probe not connected or configured incorrectly C
240. elow Part 1 Quick Start Guide Chapter presents an overview of emulation and analysis and quickly shows you how to use the emulator and analyzer Part 2 User s Guide Chapter 2 shows how to plug the emulator into a target system Chapter 3 shows you how to start and exit the HP 64700 interfaces Chapter 4 shows you how to enter commands Chapter 5 shows how to configure the emulator Chapter 6 shows how to use the emulator Chapter 7 shows how to use the analyzer Chapter 8 shows how to use the Software Performance Measurement Tool SPMT with the analyzer Chapter 9 shows how to make coordinated measurements Chapter 10 shows how to change X resource settings for the Graphical User Interface Part 3 Reference Chapter 11 describes emulator analyzer interface commands Chapter 12 lists the error messages that can occur while using the emulator analyzer interface Chapter 13 lists the emulator specifications and characteristics Part 4 Concept Guide Chapter 14 contains conceptual information on various topics Part 5 Installation Guide Chapter 15 outlines the installation of the Graphical User Interface and shows you how to start and exit the interface Chapter 16 shows you how to install or update emulator firmware Part 1 Contents Quick Start Guide Getting Started The Emulator Analyzer Interface Ata Glance 24 The Softkey Interface 24 Softkey Interface Conventions 25 The Graphical
241. ements The following is a set of minimum hardware and system recommendations for operation of the Graphical User Interface on HP 9000 Series 300 400 and Series 700 workstations HP UX For Series 9000 300 and Series 9000 400 workstations the minimum supported version of the operating system is 7 03 or later For Series 9000 700 workstations the minimum supported version of the operating system is version 8 01 Motif OSF For Series 9000 700 workstations you must also have the Motif 1 1 dynamic link libraries installed They are installed by default so you do not have to install them specifically for this product but you should consult your HP UX documentation for confirmation and more information Hardware and Memory Any workstation used with the Graphical User Interface should have a minimum of 16 megabytes of memory Series 300 workstations should have a minimum performance equivalent to that of a HP 9000 350 A color display is also highly recommended 508 Chapter 15 Installation From here you should proceed to the section titled Installation for HP 9000 Hosted Systems for instructions on how to install verify and start the Graphical User Interface on HP 9000 systems Minimum Sun SPARCsystem Hardware and System Requirements The following is a set of minimum hardware and system recommendations for operation of the Graphical User Interface on Sun SPARCsystem workstations SunOS The Graphical User Interface software is d
242. emory is available Action Split the address range into one 4 Kbyte range that will be mapped to dual port emulation memory and another range that will be mapped to single port emulation memory Dual ported memory already in use Cause You attempted to map a second address range to dual port emulation memory Only one address range can be mapped to dual port emulation memory Action If both ranges can fit into one 4 Kbyte range delete the term currently mapped to dual port emulation memory and map the larger range If both ranges 456 Chapter 12 Error Messages Terminal Interface Messages cannot fit into one 4 Kbyte range you must map one of the ranges to single port emulation memory 143 Dual ported memory in use by foreground monitor Cause You attempted to map an address range to the 4 Kbyte block of dual port emulation memory when it has already been allocated to the foreground monitor Action When using a foreground monitor only single port emulation memory is available when mapping memory 144 Dual ported memory not mapped to lt abs_file_address_range gt for downloaded monitor Continuing with default foreground monitor Cause You attempted to load a custom foreground monitor absolute file whose address range does not agree with the range defined in response to the Monitor address configuration question The second message tells you the default foreground monitor resident in the emulator firmware continue
243. enable disable breaks on writes to ROM 150 To trace background cycles 151 Using the Emulator Using the Emulator Configuration Registers 155 To view the SIM register differences 158 To synchronize to the 68340 SIM registers 158 To synchronize to the emulator configuration registers 159 Loading and Storing Absolute Files 160 To load absolute files 160 To load absolute files without symbols 161 To store memory contents into absolute files 162 Using Symbols 163 To load symbols 163 To display global symbols 164 To display local symbols 165 To display asymbol s parent symbol 169 To copy and paste a full symbol name to the entry buffer 170 Using Context Commands 171 To display the current directory and symbol context 172 To change the directory context 172 To change the current working symbol context 173 11 Contents Executing User Programs 174 To run programs from the currentPC 174 To run programs from an address 175 To run programs from the transfer address 175 To run programs from reset 175 To run programs until an address 176 To stop break from user program execution 176 To step high level source lines 177 To step assembly level instructions 178 To reset the emulation processor 178 Using Software Breakpoints 179 To display the breakpoints list 180 To enable disable breakpoints 181 To set a permanent breakpoint 184 To set a temporary breakpoint 185 To set all breakpoints 186 To deactivate a brea
244. enu appears Type a and press lt RETURN3 gt to apply the patch You can step through the program to view execution of the patch 46 Chapter 1 Getting Started Step 13 Exit the emulator analyzer interface Step 13 Exit the emulator analyzer interface e To exit the emulator analyzer interface and release the emulator choose File gt Exit Released Or using the command line enter end release_system lt RETURN gt 47 48 Part 2 User s Guide A complete set of task instructions and problem solving guidelines with a few basic concepts 49 Part 2 50 Plugging into a Target System CAUTION Plugging the Emulator into a Target System This chapter describes the steps you must perform when connecting the emulator to a target system 1 Turn OFF power 2 If the emulator is currently connected to the demo target system or a different target system unplug the emulator probe 3 Select the emulator clock source 4 Plug the emulator probe into the target system 5 Turn ON power first the HP 64700 then the target system After you plug the emulator into your target system you must configure the emulator so that it operates properly with your target system refer to the Configuring the Emulator chapter Possible Damage to the Emulator Probe The emulation probe contains devices that are susceptible to damage by static discharge Therefore precautionary
245. eparate product lets you view the stack backtrace and high level data structures and it lets you use C language expressions and macros These features are most useful when debugging software The Software Performance Analyzer interface which is also a separate product lets you make measurements that can help you improve the performance of your software These interfaces can operate at the same time with the same emulator When you perform an action in one of the interfaces it is reflected in the other interfaces Up to 10 interface windows may be started for the same emulator Only one C debugger interface window and one SPA window are allowed but you can start multiple emulator analyzer interface windows The tasks associated with starting and exiting HP 64700 interfaces are grouped into the following sections e Starting the emulator analyzer interface e Opening other HP 64700 interface windows e Exiting HP 64700 interfaces 64 Chapter 3 Starting and Exiting HP 64700 Interfaces Starting the Emulator Analyzer Interface Starting the Emulator Analyzer Interface Before starting the emulator analyzer interface the emulator and interface software must have already been installed as described in the Installation chapter This section describes how to e Start the interface e Start the interface using the default configuration e Runacommand file on interface startup e Display the status of emulators defined
246. er a background daemon process is necessary to coordinate actions in the interfaces This background process also allows commands to be forwarded from one interface to another Commands are forwarded using the forward command available in the command line The general syntax is forward lt interface_name gt lt command_string gt lt RETURN gt This section shows you how to e Forward commands to the high level debugger e Forward commands to the software performance analyzer To forward commands to the high level debugger e Enter the forward debug lt command string gt command using the command line Examples To send the Program Run command to the debugger forward debug Program Run lt RETURN gt Or since only the capitalized key is required forward debug P R lt RETURN gt 105 Chapter 4 Entering Commands Forwarding Commands to Other HP 64700 Interfaces To forward commands to the software performance analyzer e Enter the forward perf lt command string gt command using the command line Examples To send the profile command to the software performance analyzer forward perf profile lt RETURN gt 106 Configuring the Emulator 107 Configuring the Emulator This chapter describes how to configure the emulator You must map memory whenever you use the emulator When you plug the emulator into a target system you must configure the emulator so
247. er 8 Making Software Performance Measurements Activity Performance Measurements Examples Error Tolerance and Confidence Level An approximate error may exist in displayed information Error tolerance for a level of confidence is calculated using the mean of the standard deviations and the mean of the means Error tolerance gives an indication of the stability of the information For example if the error is 5 for a confidence level of 95 then you can be 95 confident that the information has an error of 5 or less The Student s T distribution is used in these calculations because it improves the accuracy for small samples As the size of the sample increases the Student s T distribution approaches the normal distribution The following equation is used to calculate error tolerance error pct Nx Pa 100 Where Om Mean of the standard deviations t Table entry in Student s T table for a given confidence level N Number of traces in the measurement Pm Mean of the means i e mean sample Consider the following activity measurement report generated with the commands shown display trace depth 512 lt RETURN gt trace counting time lt RETURN gt performance_measurement_initialize addr_ranges lt RETURN gt performance_measurement_run 20 lt RETURN gt performance_measurement_end lt RETURN gt perf32 more 278 Chapter 8 Making Software Performance Measurements Activity Perfor
248. er Messages 1105 Unable to delete label used by emulation analyzer lt label gt Cause This error occurs when you attempt to delete an emulation trace label which is currently being used as a qualifier in the emulation trace specification or is currently specified in the emulation trace format Action You stop the trace or must change the trace command before you can delete the label 1108 Unable to redefine label used by emulation analyzer lt label gt Cause This error occurs when you attempt to redefine an emulation trace label which is currently used as a qualifier in the emulation trace specification Action You stop the trace or must change the trace command before you can redefine the label 1305 CMB execute emulation trace started Cause This status message informs you that an emulation trace measurement has started as a result of a CMB execute signal as specified by the specify trace command 475 476 13 Specifications and Characteristics 477 Chapter 13 Specifications and Characteristics Emulator Specifications and Characteristics Emulator Specifications and Characteristics This section contains the following types of emulator specifications and characteristics e Electrical characteristics including emulator timing e Physical characteristics e Environmental characteristics Electrical This section describes the electrical characteristics of the HP 64751 68340 Emulator and
249. eric values symbols operators and parentheses used to specify address data status executed address or any other value used in the emulation commands The function of an expression EXPR is to let you define the address data status or executed address expression that fits your needs You can combine multiple values to define the expression Certain emulation commands will allow the option of lt tEXPR gt after pressing a thru softkey This allows you to enter a range without retyping the original base address or symbol For example you could specify the address range disp_buf thru disp_buf 25 as disp_buf thru 25 The parameters are as follows You can include don t care numbers in expressions These are indicated by a number containing an x These numbers may be defined as binary octal decimal or hexadecimal For example 1fxxh 17x70 and 011xxx10b are valid Note that Don t care numbers are not valid for all commands This appears as a softkey label to enable you to return to the EXPR key The NORMAL label can be accessed whenever defining an expression but is only valid when C appears on the status line which indicates a valid expression has been defined 366 Chapter 11 Emulator Analyzer Interface Commands EXPR lt NUMBER gt This can be an integer in any base binary octal decimal or hexadecimal or can be a string of characters enclosed with quotation marks lt OP gt
250. ernal clock source is made with the Micro processor clock source configuration question as described in the Configuring for Operation with Your Target System section of the Configuring the Emulator chapter For 64751 66508 and higher numbered active probe printed circuit boards the selection of the internal or external clock source is made by positioning a jumper module on the board If your active probe board number is 64751 66506 or lower go on to Step 4 otherwise perform the following steps 55 Chapter 2 Plugging into a Target System Step 3 Select the emulator clock source cover 1 Remove plastic rivets that secure the plastic cover on the top of the emulator probe and remove the TO INSTALL RIVET PUSH DOWN ON RIVET HEAD TO REMOVE RIVET PUSH UP ON CENTER SHAFT ADD PLASTIC WASHERS TO THESE TWO POSITIONS ONLY 56 Chapter 2 Plugging into a Target System Step 3 Select the emulator clock source 2 To select the 32 768 KHz crystal internal to the emulator insert the jumper module such that pin of the module aligns with pin 1 of the socket The target system MUST drive MODCK high or allow a pullup resistor in the emulator to pull it high during reset to enable the 68340 VCO and programmable clock mode To select an external target system TTL oscillator rotate the jumper module 180 degrees such that pin 8 of the module aligns with pin
251. ers team usr hp64000 usr hp64000 If you do not wish to establish a symbolic link you can set the HP64000 variable to the full path that contains the HP 64000 software also set the LD_LIBRARY_PATH variable to the directory containing run time libraries used by the HP 64000 products Again if you installed relative to users team you would enter setenv HP64000 users team usr hp64000 setenv LD_LIBRARY_PATH LD_LIBRARY_PATH HP64000 lib Set the PATH environment variable to include the usr hp64000 bin directory by entering setenv PATH PATH HP64000 bin Including usr hp64000 bin in your PATH relieves you from prefixing HP 64700 executables with the directory path 546 Chapter 15 Installation Installing Sun SPARCsystem Software 4 Set the MANPATH environment variable to include the usr hp64000 man and usr hp64000 contrib man directories by entering setenv MANPATH MANPATH HP64000 man setenv MANPATH MANPATH HP64000 contrib man Including these directories in your MANPATH variable lets you access the on line man page information included with the software 5 If the Graphical User Interface is to run on a SPARCsystem computer that is not running OpenWindows include the usr openwin lib directory in LD_LIBRARY_PATH setenv LD_LIBRARY_PATH LD_LIBRARY_PATH usr openwin lib Step 4 Verify the software installation A number of product filesets were installed on your system during the software inst
252. es and classes This option erases the specified breakpoint address and restores the original content of the memory location The location must not have changed by loading a file or modifying memory after the breakpoint was set If no breakpoints are specified in the command all currently specified breakpoints are cleared and the memory locations are restored to their original values A comma is used as a delimiter between values when modifying multiple memory addresses or breakpoints Lets you view and edit the current emulation configuration items The configuration questions are presented in sequence with either the default response or the previously entered response You can select the currently displayed response by pressing lt RETURN gt Otherwise you can modify the response as you desire then press lt RETURN gt This option turns off the software breakpoint capability This option allows you to modify the software breakpoint specification An expression is a combination of numeric values symbols operators and parentheses specifying a memory address register or software breakpoint value See the EXPR description 379 Chapter 11 Emulator Analyzer Interface Commands modify FCODE keyboard_to_simio long memory The function code used to define the address space being referenced See the syntax diagram for FCODE to see a list of the function codes available and for an explanation of those
253. ese resource settings so that your customized scheme files are used instead of the default scheme files For example to use the SHOME HP64_schemes HP UX Softkey MyColor color scheme file you would set the HP64_Softkey colorScheme resource to MyColor HP64_Softkey colorScheme MyColor Refer to the previous To customize Graphical User Interface resources section for more detailed information on modifying resources 321 Chapter 10 Setting X Resources To set up custom action keys Examples To set up custom action keys Modify the actionKeysSub keyDefs resource The actionKeysSub keyDefs resource defines a list of paired strings The first string defines the text that should appear on the action key pushbutton The second string defines the command that should be sent to the command line area and executed when the action key is pushed A pair of parentheses with no spaces that is can be used in the command definition to indicate that text from the entry buffer should replace the parentheses when the command is executed Action keys that use the entry buffer should always include the entry buffer symbol in the action key label as a visual cue to remind you to place information in the entry buffer before clicking the action key Shell commands can be executed by using an exclamation point prefix A second exclamation point ends the command string and allows additional options on the command lin
254. esigned to run on a Sun SPARCsystem with SunOS version 4 1 or 4 1 1 or greater The tape uses the QIC 24 data format 64700 Operating Environment The Graphical User Interface requires version A 04 10 or greater of the 64700 Operating Environment The Graphical User Interface version is A 04 00 Hardware and Memory Any workstation used with the Graphical User Interface should have a minimum of 16 megabytes of memory A color display is also highly recommended From here you should proceed to the section titled Installation for Sun SPARCsystems for instructions on how to install verify and start the Graphical User Interface on SPARCsystem workstations 509 Chapter 15 Installation Installing Hardware Installing Hardware This section describes how to install emulation and analysis hardware and how to connect the emulator probe to the demo target system Equipment supplied The minimum system contains e HP 64751A 68340 PGA Emulator Probe which includes the demo target system e HP 64748C Emulation Control card e HP 64704A 80 Channel Emulation Bus Analyzer card e HP 64700 Card Cage Optional parts are e HP 64171A 256 Kbyte Memory Modules or HP 64171B 1 Mbyte Memory Modules 0 wait state emulation memory through 16 7 MHz 1 wait state above 16 7 MHz e HP 64172A 256 Kbyte Memory Modules or HP 64172B 1 Mbyte Memory Modules 0 wait state emulation memory through 25 MHz e HP 64173A 4 Mbyte Memory Module
255. ess_port BLOCK_1 i2 which would not be found The symbol utilities would then strip BLOCK_1 from the current working symbol yielding porthand c process_port i2 which is a valid symbol You also can specify the symbol type if conflicts arise Although not shown in the tree assume that a procedure called port_one is also defined in control c This would conflict with the identifier port_one which declares an integer pointer SRU can resolve the difference You must specify control c port_one static to reference the variable and control c port_one procedure to reference the procedure address The copy local_symbols_in and display local_symbols_in commands Also refer to the Symbolic Retrieval Utilities User s Guide for further information on symbols 418 Chapter 11 Emulator Analyzer Interface Commands sync_sim_registers sync_sim_registers lt RE TURN gt sync_sin_registers from_68340_to_config to_68340_from_config difference The sync_sim_registers command synchronizes the 68340 s system integration module SIM registers to the emulator s CF_SIM registers The parameters are as follows from_68340_to_conf Copies the microprocessor s SIM registers into the emulator s CF_SIM registers ig to_68340_from_conf Copies the emulator s CF_SIM registers into the microprocessor s SIM registers ig difference Displays the differences between the microp
256. etely then start a new session Make sure the host system is operating properly that all Softkey Interface software has been loaded correctly and the data communication switch settings on the emulator rear panel match the settings in the usr hp64000 etc 64700tab net or 64700tab file Unknown expression type Cause While entering your command you included an unknown expression type Action See the EXPR command syntax for more information about expressions Then try entering your command again with a known expression type Unload trace data failed Cause An unexpected error occurred while waiting for a trace to be completed Action End and release the session and then try again Wait time failure could not determine system time Cause The system call failed Action Verify that date executes correctly from the UNIX prompt Warning at least one integer truncated to 32 bits Warning at least one integer truncated to 16 bits Warning at least one integer truncated to 8 bits Cause The number entered was too large for the currently specified display or access size Action Try entering the command again using the correct size of number Width not in range 1 lt valid width lt 80 Cause You tried to specify the width of the field outside the range from 1 to 80 Action Try entering the command again using a valid number for the width 449 Chapter 12 Error Messages Graphical Softkey Interface Messages N
257. etting Started Step 1 Start the demo j Step 1 Start the demo A demo program and its associated files are provided with the Graphical User Interface Change to the demo directory cd usr hp64000 demo debug_env hp64751 lt RETURN gt Refer to the README file for more information on the demo program Check that usr hp64000 bin and are in your PATH environment variable To see the value of PATH echo PATH lt RI ETURN gt If the Graphical User Interface software is installed on a different type of computer than the computer you Xdefaults emul file are using edit the platformScheme resource setting in the For example if the Graphical User Interface will be run on a HP 9000 computer and displayed on a Sun SPARCsystem computer change the platform scheme to SunOS Start the emulator analyzer demo Startemul lt logical_emul_name gt lt RETURN gt This script starts the emulator analyzer interface with a customized set of action keys loads a configuration file for the demo program and then loads the demo program The lt logical_emul_name gt in the command above is the logical emulator name given in the HP 64700 emulator device table file usr hp64000 etc 64700tab net 32 Chapter 1 Getting Started Step 2 Display the program in memory Step 2 Display the program in memory 1 Ifthe symbol main is not already in the entry buffer move the mouse poin
258. ey are made 268 initialize 385 386 initializing 272 287 initializing default 272 initializing duration measurements 287 initializing user defined ranges 273 287 initializing with global symbols 273 initializing with local symbols 273 memory activity 269 276 module duration 284 module usage 284 program activity 269 276 recursion 284 relative information 276 586 Index restoring the current measurement 274 288 run 387 388 running 293 trace command setup 271 trace display depth 271 source lines set command 401 symbol display 165 trace display 257 trace display number of 257 source symbol modes setting 206 SPARCsystems installing software 544 548 minimum system requirements overview 509 SunOS minimum version 509 specifications emulator 478 492 specify command 404 405 SPMT Software Performance Measurement Tool See software performance measurements sq adv captured sequence state 246 SRU Symbolic Retrieval Utilities 412 414 stack pointer defining supervisor 148 static discharge protecting the emulator probe against 52 status copy command 346 display command 224 353 status analyzer state qualifier softkey 235 392 predefined values for 235 status line 27 69 status messages CPU in wait state 128 136 status emulator copying to file 216 step command 35 177 178 406 407 step over 199 stop_trace command 227 408 storage qualifiers 240 store comm
259. f Fs A More data off Label Address Opcode or Status w Source Lines time count Base symbols mnemonic w symbols relative 010 combsor 4 08 0E NOP 68a n5 HHHHHHHHHHmain c line 239 thru 241 RHHHHRHHHHRRHHHHRHHHHRHHHHHHHHH 1 gap 1 g top sq adv combsor 4 MOVEA L 03 AG 720 ns HHHHHHHHHHmain c line 227 thru 229 HHHHHHHHRHHHHRHERHR RHE to conform to combll switc p sq adv combsor H444 A3 DO 013 combsor 0 0 9R CMPI L AOOAOHAB DA 014 dalmain switches 8088 supr data long wr ds16 015 switchet agaag82 4880 supr data word wr ds16 016 data main gap 8aa supr data long rd ds16 Notice in the resulting trace you have to press the lt NEXT gt key that the enable and disable states have the sq adv string in the line number column This is because the windowing feature uses the analyzer s sequencer 249 Chapter 7 Using the Emulation Analyzer Modifying the Trace Display Modifying the Trace Display This section describes the options available when displaying trace lists This section describes how to Display a dequeued trace Display the trace about a line number Display the trace disassembling from a line number Display instruction cycles only Display the trace in absolute format Display the trace in mnemonic format Display the trace with high level source lines Display the trace with symbol information Change the column widths in the trace display Display time co
260. f you do not wish to establish a symbolic link you can set the HP64000 variable to the full path that contains the HP 64000 software Again if you installed relative to users team you would enter HP64000 users team usr hp64000 export HP64000 542 Chapter 15 Installation Installing HP 9000 Software 3 Set the PATH environment variable to include the usr hp64000 bin directory by entering PATH PA TH HP64000 bin export PATH Including usr hp64000 bin in your PATH relieves you from prefixing HP 64700 executables with the directory path 4 Set the MANPATH environment variable to include the usr hp64000 man and usr hp64000 contrib man directories by entering MANPATH MA NPA TH HP64000 man HP64000 contrib man export MANPATH Including these directories in your MANPATH variable lets you access the on line man page information included with the software 543 Chapter 15 Installation Installing Sun SPARCsystem Software Installing Sun SPARCsystem Software This section shows you how to install the Graphical User Interface on Sun SPARCsystem workstations These instructions also tell you how not to install the Graphical User Interface if you want to use just the conventional Softkey Interface This section shows you how to 1 Install the software from the media 2 Start the X server and OpenWindows 3 Set the necessary environment variables 4 Verify the software installation 5 Map your function keys
261. factory with a power cord appropriate for your country You should verify that you have the correct power cable for installation by comparing the power cord you received with the HP 64700 with the drawings under the Plug Type column of the following table If the cable you received is not appropriate for your electrical power outlet type contact your Hewlett Packard sales and service office 533 Chapter 15 Installation Installing Hardware Power Cord Configurations Plug Type Cable Part No Plug Description Length in cm Color Opt 903 8120 1378 Straight 90 228 Jade Gray 124V NEMAS 15P 8120 1521 90 90 228 Jade Gray Opt 900 8120 1351 Straight 90 228 Gray 250V BS136A if 8120 1703 90 90 228 Mint Gray Opt 901 8120 1369 Straight 79 200 Gray 250V NZSS198 ASC Te 8120 0696 90 87 221 Mint Gray Opt 902 812001689 Straight 79 200 Mint Gray 250V CEE7 Y11 8120 1692 90 79 200 Mint Gray la Soa Straight E Ne x 8120 2857 Shielded 79 200 Coco SON Brown Part number shown for plug is industry identifier for plug only Number shown for cable is HP part number for complete cable including plug These cords are included in the CSA certification approval for the equipment 534 Chapter 15 Installation Installing Hardware Power Cord Configurations Cont d Plug Type Cable Part No Plug Description Length in cm Color Opt 906 8120 2104
262. failed Cause The host system could not continue the previous emulation session because it could not load the continue file Action Try again If the failure continues call your HP Service Representative Continuing previous session continue file loaded Cause This is a status message An emulation session which was ended earlier with the end command has been restarted The host system reported that the session was continued using settings from the previous session and that the continue file loaded properly Continuing previous session user interface defaulted Cause The previous emulation session was continued and the Softkey Interface was set to the default state Could not create default configuration Cause The host system could not create a default configuration for the emulation session Action Check disk space under usr hp64000 and verify proper software installation 434 Chapter 12 Error Messages Graphical Softkey Interface Messages Unnumbered Could not create lt CONFIGURATION BINARY FILENAME gt Cause The system could not create a binary emulation configuration file file EB Action Check the file EB write permission and verify that the specified directory exists and is writeable Could not exec configuration process Cause The host system could not fork the configuration process or could not execute the configuration process Action Make sure that the host system is operating properly and tha
263. file is stored The memory map specifies that the locations of the file are in user target system memory or emulation memory This command also allows you to access and display previously stored trace data load a previously created configuration file and load absolute files with symbols Note that any file specified by lt FILE gt cannot be named configuration emul_mem user_mem symbols trace or trace_spec because these are reserved words and are not recognized by the emulator analyzer interface as ordinary file names The absolute file is loaded into emulation memory by default The parameters are as follows This option specifies that a previously created emulation configuration file will be loaded into the emulator You can follow this option with a file name Otherwise the previously loaded configuration will be reloaded 374 Chapter 11 Emulator Analyzer Interface Commands load FCODE The function code used to define the address space being referenced See the syntax diagram for FCODE to see a list of the function codes available and for an explanation of those codes lt FILE gt This represents the absolute file to be loaded into either target system memory emulation memory X files are assumed or the trace memory TR files are assumed lt memory_type gt This indicates the type of memory that you choose for the load operation The memory type can be emulation or user memory You also can load a ba
264. file you wish to execute Using the command line enter the name of the command file and press lt RETURN gt If you enter the name of the command file in the command line and the interface cannot find the command file in the current directory it searches the directories specified in the HP64KPATH environment variable To interrupt playback of a command file press the lt CTRL gt c key combination The mouse pointer must be within the interface window If you press lt CTRL gt c to stop execution of a command file while the wait command is being executed from the command file the lt CTRL gt c will terminate the wait command but will not terminate command file execution To do this press lt CTRL gt c again 102 Chapter 4 Entering Commands Using Pod Commands Using Pod Commands Pod commands are Terminal Interface commands The Terminal Interface is the low level interface that resides in the firmware of the emulator A pod command used in the Graphical User Interface bypasses the interface and goes directly to the emulator Because some pod commands can cause the interface to become out of sync with the emulator or even cause the interface to terminate abnormally they must be used with care For example if you change configuration items the actual state of the emulator will no longer match the internal record the interface keeps about the state of the emulator Issuing certain communications related commands
265. gerous voltages may exist even with the power cable removed To avoid injuries always disconnect power and discharge circuits before touching them WARNING Do Not Service Or Adjust Alone Do not attempt internal service or adjustment unless another person capable of rendering first aid and resuscitation is present Do Not Substitute Parts Or Modify Instrument Because of the danger of introducing additional hazards do not install substitute parts or perform any unauthorized modification of the instrument Return the instrument to a Hewlett Packard Sales and Service Office for service and repair to ensure that safety features are maintained Dangerous Procedure Warnings Warnings such as the example below precede potentially dangerous procedures throughout this manual Instructions contained in the warnings must be followed Dangerous voltages capable of causing death are present in this instrument Use extreme caution when handling testing and adjusting IH an gt H Safety Symbols Used In Manuals The following is a list of general definitions of safety symbols used on equipment or in manuals Instruction manual symbol the product is marked with this symbol when it is necessary for the user to refer to the instruction manual in order to protect against damage to the instrument Indicates dangerous voltage terminals fed from the interior by voltage exceeding 1000 volts must be marked with this symbol Prot
266. get_temp 0047 supr data word ds1B _target_temp 0047 supr data word ds16 _target_temp 0047 supr data word ds16 _target_temp 0047 supr data word ds16 _target_temp 0047 supr data word ds1B _target_temp 0047 supr data word ds1B _target_temp 0046 supr data word ds16 _target_temp 8846 supr data word ds16 _target_temp 0046 supr data word ds16 Notice the trigger state line 0 labeled after is included in the trace list trigger states are always stored 240 Chapter 7 Using the Emulation Analyzer Qualifying Trigger and Store Conditions To prestore states before qualified store states e Enter a storage state specification in the entry buffer then choose Trace Only Prestore e Use the prestore option in the trace command Prestore allows you to save up to two states which precede a normal store state Prestore is turned off by default However you can use the trace command s prestore option to specify a prestore qualifier Prestore is useful when you want to find the cause of a particular state For example if a variable is accessed from many different places in the program you can qualify the trace so that only accesses of that variable are stored Then you can turn on prestore to find out where accesses of that variable originate from States which satisfy the prestore qualifier and the storage qualifier at the same time are stored as normal states Examples To storing only write
267. h 64700 firmware version Cause The installed interface firmware combination is incorrect or incompatible 451 Chapter 12 Error Messages Graphical Softkey Interface Messages Numbered Action Upgrade the interface software of product firmware 10360 Analyzer limitation all range resources in use Analyzer limitation all pattern resources in use Analyzer limitation all expression resources in use Cause Your trace specification would use more than the maximum number of resources available to the analyzer Action Simplify the trace specification 10371 64700 command aborted Cause User abort occurred due to emulator being monopolized by another command Action Don t issue an abort 452 20 21 40 Chapter 12 Error Messages Terminal Interface Messages Terminal Interface Messages This section contains descriptions of error messages that can occur while using the Terminal Interface The error messages are listed in numerical order and each description includes the cause of the error and the action you should take to remedy the situation The emulator can return messages to the display only when it is prompted to do so Situations may occur where an error is generated as the result of some command but the error message is not displayed until the next command or a carriage return is entered A maximum number of 8 error messages can be displayed at one time If more than 8 errors are generated on
268. he command 91 Chapter 4 Entering Commands Using the Command Line with the Mouse To edit the command line using the command line pushbuttons To clear the command line click the Clear pushbutton To clear the command line from the cursor position to the end of the line click the Clear to end pushbutton To move to the right one command word or token click the Forward pushbutton To move to the left one command word or token click the Backup pushbutton To insert characters at the cursor position press the insert key to change to insertion mode and then type the characters to be inserted To delete characters to the left of the cursor position press the lt BACKSPACE gt key When the cursor arrives at the beginning of a command word or token the softkey labels change to display the possible choices at that level of the command When moving by words left or right the Forward pushbutton becomes halfbright and unresponsive when the cursor reaches the end of the command string Similarly the Backup pushbutton becomes halfbright and unresponsive when the cursor reaches the beginning of the command See To edit the command line using the mouse and the command line popup menu and To edit the command line using the keyboard for information about additional editing operations you can perform 92 Chapter 4 Entering Commands Using the Command Line with the Mouse To edit the command line using the command
269. he Emulator Displaying and Modifying Registers Register Class Register Description SERIAL SERIAL_MCR Module Configuration Register ILR Interrupt Level Serial Module IVR Interrupt Vector MRIA Mode Register 1A SRA Status Register A CSRA Clock Select Register A CRA Command Register A RBA Receiver Buffer A TBA Transmitter Buffer A IPCR Input Port Change Register ACR Auxiliary Control Register ISR Interrupt Status Register IER Interrupt Enable Register MRIB Mode Register 1B SRC Status Register B CSRB Clock Select Register B CRB Command Register B RBB Receiver Buffer B TBB Transmitter Buffer B IP Input Port Register OPCR Output Port Control Register OP_SET Output Port Bit Set OP_RST Output Port Bit Reset MR2A Mode Register 2A MR2B Mode Register 2B TIMER 1 2 TIMER_MCR1 2 Module Configuration Register IR1 2 Interrupt Register Timer Modules CR1 2 Control Register 1 and 2 SR1 2 Status Prescaler Register CNTRI 2 Counter Register PREL11 2 Preload 1 Register PREL21 2 Preload 2 Register COM1 2 Compare Register 194 Chapter 6 Using the Emulator Displaying and Modifying Registers Register Class Register Description CF_SIM CF_MBAR Module Base Address Register CF_SIM_MCR Module Configuration Register Emulator CF_PPARAI1 Port A Pin Assignment 1 Configuration CF_PPARA2 Port A Pin Assignment 2 Registers CF_CSOMASK Address Mask CSO CF_CSOADDR Base Address CSO
270. he emulation session are displayed 211 Chapter 6 Using the Emulator Using System Commands To edit files Choose File gt Edit File and use the dialog box to specify the file name To edit a file based on an address in the entry buffer place an address reference either absolute or symbolic in the entry buffer then choose File gt Edit At Location To edit a file based on the current program counter choose File gt Edit At PC Location To edit a file associated with a symbol when you are displaying symbols position the mouse pointer over the symbol press and hold the select mouse button and choose Edit File At Symbol from the popup menu To edit a file when displaying memory in mnemonic format position the mouse pointer over the line of source where you want to begin the edit press and hold the select mouse button and choose Edit Source from the popup menu When editing files at addresses the interface determines which source file contains the code generated for the address and opens an edit session on the file The interface will issue an error if it cannot find a source file for the address The interface will choose the vi editor as its default editor unless you specify another editor by setting an X resource Refer to the Setting X Resources chapter for more information about setting this resource You must load symbols before most commands will work because symbol information is needed to be able
271. her a symbolic database has been loaded If a symbolic database has been loaded the performance measurement is set up with the addresses of all global procedures and static symbols If a valid database has not been loaded the system will default to a predetermined set of addresses which covers the entire emulation processor address range The measurement will default to activity mode Default values will vary depending on the type of operation selected and whether symbols have been loaded The parameters are as follows activity This option causes the performance measurement process to operate as though an option is not specified duration This option sets the measurement mode to duration Time ranges will default to a predetermined set unless a user defined file of time ranges is specified 385 Chapter 11 Emulator Analyzer Interface Commands performance_measurement_initialize lt FILE gt global_symbols local_symbols_in restore SYMB Examples See Also This represents a file you specify to supply user defined address or time ranges to the emulator This option specifies that the performance measurement will be set up with the addresses of all global symbols and procedures in the source program This causes addresses of the local symbols to be used as the default ranges for the measurement This option restores old measurement data so that a measurement can be continued when using the same t
272. here you want to route the output of the copy command UNIX commands must be preceded by an exclamation point An exclamation point following the UNIX command continues command line execution after the UNIX command executes Emulation is not affected when using an UNIX command that is a shell intrinsic This allows you to copy a list of memory contents formatted in various data types see display data This allows you to copy the display to a selected destination This allows you to copy the most recent errors that occurred This allows you to copy the most recent events that occurred An exclamation point specifies the delimiter for UNIX commands An exclamation point must precede all UNIX commands A trailing exclamation point should be used if you want to return to the command line and specify noheader Otherwise the trailing exclamation point is optional If an exclamation point is part of the UNIX command a backslash must precede the exclamation point An expression is a combination of numeric values symbols operators and parentheses specifying a memory address or offset value See the EXPR syntax diagram 344 Chapter 11 Emulator Analyzer Interface Commands copy FCODE The function code used to define the address space being referenced See the syntax diagram for FCODE to see a list of the function codes available and for an explanation of those codes lt FILE gt This prompts you for the name of a file where you w
273. highlighted ENTRY gaaa1892 prog bol by ch a EXIT EEGEN prog symbol by choosing EXTRANGE 88001977 proa this menu item Local Symbols Display Display Local Symbols Display Parent Symbols Cut Full Symbol Name Edit File Defining Symbol STATUS M68340 Running in monitor Emulation trace complete 169 Chapter 6 Using the Emulator Using Symbols Examples Copy the full name of the highlighted symbol to the entry buffer by choosing this menu item To copy and paste a full symbol name to the entry buffer When displaying symbols position the mouse pointer over the symbol press and hold the select mouse button and choose Cut Full Symbol Name from the popup menu Once the full symbol name is in the entry buffer you can use it with pulldown menu items or paste it to the command line area By cutting the full symbol name you get the complete names of symbols that have been truncated Also you are guaranteed of specifying the proper scope of the symbol Ele Display Modify Execution Bre kpoints race Settings Simbole in updatezsus module Procedure symbols Procedure name Address range __ Segment get_targets 44661654 4 881600 prog graph_data 00001937E GAG 1A3 prog read conditions aenn ipt 8841773 prog ANNIG prog Display Local Symbols write_hd Display Parent Symbols Filename symbols Fi lename Cut Full Symbol Name Upderensuese Edit
274. his file will have NULL results Action Either edit the file to add events or use the default setup to start a new measurement perf out file could not be opened created Cause The performance analyzer failed to open or create a file named perf out in response to your performance_measurement_end command Action Free up some file space or correct the write permissions in your current working directory 445 Chapter 12 Error Messages Graphical Softkey Interface Messages Unnumbered Performance tool must be initialized Cause You tried to make a performance measurement when the Software Performance Measurement Tool SPMT was not initialized Action The Software Performance Measurement Tool SPMT must be initialized before making performance measurements on your software Use the performance_measurement_initialize command to initialize the SPMT Performance tool not initialized Cause The Software Performance Measurement Tool SPMT has not been initialized Action To make accurate activity or duration measurements on current data use the performance_measurement_initialize command to initialize the SPMT before running a performance measurement Question file missing or invalid Cause Some of the Softkey User Interface files are missing or are corrupted Action Reinstall the host software and try starting the emulation session again Range crosses segment boundary Cause On a segment offset processor an
275. his question becomes Enter monitor after configuration using external clock and the default answer becomes no To restrict to real time runs Answer yes to the Restrict to real time runs question While running programs temporary breaks to the monitor state are not allowed The emulator refuses the following commands e Display or modify registers e Display modify copy load store or breakpoint commands that access single port emulation memory or target system memory The emulator contains one 4 Kbyte block of dual port emulation memory which can be accessed while runs are restricted to real time This block of 120 Chapter 5 Configuring the Emulator Modifying the General Configuration Items dual port emulation memory is reserved for foreground monitor programs when they are used e Synchronize SIM registers If you want to enter one of these commands you must first make an explicit break into the monitor using the break command CAUTION Target system damage could occur If your target system circuitry is dependent on constant execution of program code be aware that the following commands still cause breaks from running programs even when you have restricted the emulator to real time runs e reset e run e break e step Use caution in executing these commands To turn OFF the restriction to real time runs e Answer no to the Restrict to real time runs question Temporary break
276. ib X11 app defaults HP64_Softkey HP64_Softkey tmp NOTE The HP64_Softkey application defaults file is re created each time Graphical User Interface software is installed or updated You can use the UNIX diff command to check for differences between the new HP64_Softkey application defaults file and the old application defaults file that is saved as usr hp64000 ib X 1 1 HP64_schemes old HP64_Softkey Modify the temporary file Modify the resource that defines the behavior or appearance that you wish to change For example to change the number of lines in the main display area to 36 vi HP64_Softkey tmp Search for the string HP64_Softkey lines You should see lines similar to the following The lines and columns set the vertical and horizontal dimensions of the main display area in characters respectively Minimum values are 18 lines and 80 columns These minimums are silently enforced The application cannot be resized by using the window manager HP64_Softkey lines 24 HP64_Softkey columns 85 318 Chapter 10 Setting X Resources To modify the Graphical User Interface resources Edit the line containing HP64_Softkey lines so that it is uncommented and is set to the new value The lines and columns set the vertical and horizontal dimensions of the main display area in characters respectively Minimum values are 18 lines and 80 columns These minimums are silently enforced Note The application ca
277. if addresses are in target system or single port emulation memory modify memory modify register modify software_breakpoints name_of_module performance_measurement_end performance_measurement_init performance_measurement_run pod_command pwd print working directory pws print working symbol reset run set specify step stop_trace store memory store trace store trace_spec sync_sim_registers trace wait 339 Chapter 11 Emulator Analyzer Interface Commands bbaunld bbaunld This command is available when the HP Branch Validator product is installed This basis branch analyzer BBA product is used to analyze the testing of your programs create more complete test suites and quantify your level of testing The HP Branch Validator records branches executed in a program and generates reports that provide information about program execution during testing It uses a special C preprocessor to add statements that write to a data array when program branches are taken After running the program in the emulator using test input you can use the bbaunload command to store the BBA information to a file Then you can generate reports based on the stored information See Also Refer to the HP Branch Validator BBA User s Guide for complete details on the bbaunload command syntax 340 Chapter 11 Emulator Analyzer Interface Commands break break C break y lt RETURN gt
278. ify memory configuration yes Entering the following mapper commands Specify unmapped ranges as guarded memory to show that the fetches of the supervisor stack pointer and program counter values after reset really come from the boot ROM address range Off000000h thru Off00ffffh emulation rom csO lt RETURN gt default guarded lt RETURN gt Configuration file name boot_cfg 145 Chapter 5 Configuring the Emulator Mapping Memory To modify the emulator configuration registers so appropriate information is sent to the analyzer modify register CF_SIM CF_MBAR to 100001h lt RETURN gt modify register CF_SIM CF_CSOADDR to O0ff000001h lt RETURN gt modify register CF_SIM CF_CSOMASK to Offfdh lt RETURN gt To load the supervisor stack pointer and program counter values that will be fetched from the boot ROM after reset modify memory O0ff000000h long to 0 Off001000h lt RETURN gt To load the boot ROM program into emulation memory NOP NOP BRA B OFFO01000H modify memory Off001000h words to 4e71h 4e71h 60fah lt RETURN gt To trace execution after reset trace lt RETURN gt To run from reset run from reset lt RETURN gt To display the trace display trace lt RETURN gt 146 Chapter 5 Configuring the Emulator Mapping Memory race List Label Address Opcode or Status time count Base ___hex _ Mnemonic re ative FF Gaea ORI B 00 08 001 FF pgpa2 pa
279. igger the analyzer Sequencing provides you with parameters for the trace command that let you define branching conditions for the analyzer trigger You are limited to a total of seven sequence terms including the trigger if no windowing specification is given If windowing is selected you are limited to a total of four sequence terms The analyzer default is no sequencing terms If you select the sequencer using the find_sequence parameter you must specify at least one qualifying sequence term The parameters are as follows find_sequence Specifies that you want to use the analysis sequencer You must enter at least one qualifier QUALIFIER Specifies the address data status value or value range that will satisfy this sequence term if looking for a sequence find_sequence or will restart at the beginning of the sequence restart See the QUALIFIER syntax pages for further information occurs Selects the number of times a particular qualifier must be found before the analyzer proceeds to the next sequence term or the trigger term This option is not available when trace windowing is in use See the WINDOW syntax pages 397 Chapter 11 Emulator Analyzer Interface Commands SEQUENCING lt TIMES gt Prompts you for the number of times a qualifier must be found then Allows you to add multiple sequence terms each with its own qualifier and occurrence count restart Selects global restart If the analyzer finds the
280. iguration to a temporary file and locks the emulator to prevent other users from accessing it When you again start the interface with the emul700 command the temporary file is reloaded and therefore you return to the configuration you were using when you quit the interface locked Also saved when you exit the interface locked are the contents of the entry buffer and command recall buffer These recall buffer values will be present when you restart the interface In contrast if you end released you must have saved the current configuration to a configuration file if the configuration has changed or the changes will be lost 72 Entering Commands Entering Commands When an X Window System that supports OSF Motif interfaces is running on the host computer the emulator analyzer interface is the Graphical User Interface which provides pull down and pop up menus point and click setting of breakpoints cut and paste on line help customizable action keys and pop up recall buffers etc The emulator analyzer interface also provides the Softkey Interface for several types of terminals terminal emulators and bitmapped displays When using the Softkey Interface commands are entered from the keyboard When using the Graphical User Interface the command line portion of the interface gives you the option of entering commands in the same manner as they are entered in the Softkey Interface If you are using the Softkey Interfac
281. iles 320 To set up custom action keys 322 To set initial recall buffer values 323 To set up demos or tutorials 325 Reference Emulator Analyzer Interface Commands How Pulldown Menus Map to the Command Line 332 How Popup Menus Map to the Command Line 336 Syntax Conventions 338 Commands 339 bbaunld 340 break 341 cmb_execute 342 copy 343 COUNT 348 display 350 display memory 356 display trace 360 end 364 EXPR 366 FCODE 369 forward 371 help 372 load 374 log commands 376 modify 378 performance_measurement_end 384 performance_measurement_initialize 385 performance_measurement_run 387 pod_command 389 QUALIFIER 391 12 13 reset 394 run 395 SEQUENCING 397 set 399 specify 404 step 406 stop_trace 408 store 409 SYMB 411 sync_sim_registers 419 trace 420 TRIGGER 424 wait 426 WINDOW 428 Error Messages Contents Graphical Softkey Interface Messages Unnumbered 433 Graphical Softkey Interface Messages Numbered 450 Terminal Interface Messages 453 Emulator Messages 453 68340 Emulator Messages 456 General Emulator and System Messages 462 Analyzer Messages 475 Specifications and Characteristics Emulator Specifications and Characteristics Electrical 478 Physical 490 Environmental 492 478 17 Contents Part 4 Concept Guide 14 Concepts Part 5 15 X Resources and the Graphical User Interface 497 X Resource Specifications 497 How X Resource Sp
282. ill override 2 but only for the specifically mentioned type of microprocessor When modifying resources your resource paths must either match or be more specific than those found in the application defaults file How X Resource Specifications are Loaded When the Graphical User Interface starts up it loads resource specifications from a set of configuration files located in system directories as well as user specific locations 499 Chapter 14 Concepts X Resources and the Graphical User Interface Application Default Resource Specifications Default resource specifications for an application are placed in a system directory HP UX usr lib X 1 1 app defaults SunOS ust openwin lib X 1 1 app defaults The name of the Graphical User Interface application defaults file is HP64_Softkey same as the application class name This file is well commented and contains information about each of the X resources you can modify You can easily view this file by choosing Help Topic and selecting the X Resources App Default File topic Do not modify the application defaults file any changes to this file will affect the appearance and behavior of the application for all users User Defined Resource Specifications User defined resources for any X application are located in the X server s RESOURCE_MANAGER property or in the user s HOME Xdefaults file Load Order Resource specifications are loaded from the following places
283. in Technical Data and Computer Software Clause at DFARS 252 227 7013 Hewlett Packard Company 3000 Hanover Street Palo Alto CA 94304 U S A Rights for non DOD U S Government Departments and Agencies are as set forth in FAR 52 227 19 c 1 2 Printing History New editions are complete revisions of the manual The date on the title page changes only when a new edition is published A software code may be printed before the date this indicates the version level of the software product at the time the manual was issued Many product updates and fixes do not require manual changes and manual corrections may be done without accompanying product changes Therefore do not expect a one to one correspondence between product updates and manual revisions Edition 1 B1442 97000 March 1992 Edition 2 B 1442 97001 September 1992 Edition 3 B 1442 97002 March 1993 Edition 4 B1442 97003 December 1993 Safety Certification and Warranty Safety and certification and warranty information can be found at the end of this manual on the pages before the back cover 68340 Emulation and Analysis The HP 64751 68340 emulator replaces the microprocessor in your embedded microprocessor system also called the target system so that you can control execution and view or modify processor and target system resources The emulator can be used with the HP 64704 Emulation Bus Analyzer or the HP 64794 Deep Memory Emulation Bus Analyzer which capt
284. in the 64700tab net file e Unlock an interface that was left locked by another user To start the emulator analyzer interface Use the emul700 lt emul_name gt command If usr hp64000 bin is specified in your PATH environment variable as shown in the Installation chapter you can start the interface with the emul700 lt emul_name gt command The emul_name is the logical emulator name given in the HP 64700 emulator device table usr hp64000 etc 64700tab net If you are running a window system on your host computer for example the X Window System you can run the interface in up to 10 windows This capability provides you with several views into the emulation system For example you can display memory in one window registers in another an analyzer trace in a third and data in the fourth 65 Chapter 3 Starting and Exiting HP 64700 Interfaces Starting the Emulator Analyzer Interface Examples To start the emulator analyzer interface for the 68340 emulator emul700 em68340 lt RETURN gt The em68340 in the command above is the logical emulator name given in the HP 64700 emulator device table file usr hp64000 etc 64700tab net Blank and the rest of each line after a character are ignored The information in each line must be in the specified order with one line for each HP series 64700 emulator Use blanks or tabs to separate fields 4
285. information If there is no previous display memory command the format used is a blocked hex byte format beginning at address zero Data Values Copies the contents of the defined data values last displayed An error occurs if you try to copy data values to a file if you have not yet displayed data values Trace The most recently captured trace is copied to the file The copied trace listing is formatted according to the current display mode You can set the display mode with the Settings Source Symbols Modes or Settings Display Modes pulldown menu items See the Changing the Interface Settings section Registers Copies the current values of the BASIC register class to a file To copy the contents of the other register classes first display the registers in that class and then use the File gt Copy Display command Breakpoints Copies the breakpoints list If no breakpoints are present in the list only the enable disable status is copied 215 Chapter 6 Using the Emulator Using System Commands Status Copies the emulator analyzer status display Global Symbols Copies the global symbols If symbols have not been loaded this menu item is grayed out and unresponsive Local Symbols Copies the local symbols from the symbol scope named by an enclosing symbol in the entry buffer If symbols have not been loaded this menu item is grayed out and unresponsive Pod Commands Copies the las
286. ing the above message is printed along with the specific address or addresses accessed Action Re enter the command and specify only addresses or address ranges within emulation or target RAM or ROM Or you can remap memory so that the desired addresses are no longer mapped as guarded 710 Memory range overflow Cause Accessing a word or short word for example display memory Offffffff blocked word will cause a rounding error that overflows physical memory Action Reduce memory display request 725 Unable to load new memory map old map reloaded Cause There is not enough emulation memory left for this request Action Reduce the amount of emulation memory requested 726 Unable to reload old memory map hardware state unknown Cause System failure Action Run performance verification Terminal Interface py command 754 Memory modify aborted next address s Cause This message is displayed if a break occurs during processing of a modify memory command The break could result from any of the break conditions except a software breakpoint or could have resulted from a lt CTRL gt c break 473 Chapter 12 Error Messages Terminal Interface Messages 901 902 903 904 911 912 913 Action Retry the operation If breaks are occurring continuously you may wish to disable some of the break conditions Invalid firmware for emulation subsystem Cause This error occurs when the HP 64700 system controlle
287. ins an opcode that causes a stack push which results in multiple write operations to the stack area outside the range The memory activity measurement will count only the stack push opcode cycle However the program activity measurement will count the stack push opcode cycle and the write operations to the stack By comparing the program activity and the memory activity in an address range you can get an idea of how much activity in other areas is caused by the code being measured An activity measurement report of the code prog data and stack sections of a program is shown below Label prog Address Range ADEH thru 1261H Memory Activity State Percent Rel 57 77 Abs 57 77 Mean 295 80 Sdv 26 77 Time Percent Rel 60 97 Abs 60 97 Program Activity State Percent Rel 99 82 Abs 99 82 Mean 511 10 Sdv 0 88 Time Percent Rel 99 84 Abs 99 84 data Address Range 6007AH thru 603A5H Memory Activity State Percent Rel 30 51 Abs 30 51 Mean 156 20 Sdv 31 87 Time Percent Rel 28 09 Abs 28 09 269 Chapter 8 Making Software Performance Measurements Activity Performance Measurements Program Activity State Percent Rel 0 18 Abs 0 18 Mean 0 90 Sdv 0 88 Time Percent Rel 0 16 Abs 0 16 stack Address Range 40000H thru 43FFFH Memory Activity State Percent Rel 11 72 Abs 11 72 Mean 60 00 Sdv 29 24 Time Percent Rel 10 94 Abs 10 94 Program Activity State Percent Rel 0 00 Abs 0 00 M
288. interrupt_sim function trace after interrupt_sim start or interrupt_sim end only interrupt_sim start or interrupt_sim end counting time lt RETURN gt The trace specification sets up the analyzer to capture only the states that contain the start address of the interrupt_sim function or the end address of the interrupt_sim function Since the trigger state is also stored the analyzer is set up to trigger on the entry or exit address of the interrupt_sim function With these states in memory the analyzer will derive two measurements time from start to end of interrupt_sim and time from end to start of interrupt_sim 286 Chapter 8 Making Software Performance Measurements Duration Performance Measurements To initialize duration performance measurements e Use the performance_measurement_initialize command with the duration option After you set up the trace command you must tell the SPMT the time ranges to be used in the duration measurement This is done by initializing the performance measurement You can initialize the performance measurement in the following ways e Initialize with user defined files e Restore a previous performance measurement if the emulation system has been exited and reentered Initialization with User Defined Ranges You can specifically give the SPMT time ranges to use by placing the information in a file and entering the file name in the performance_measurement_initialize command Tim
289. ion about using dialog boxes To get help about the command line To display the help topic explaining the operation of the command line press the Help pushbutton located near the bottom right corner of the Command Line area 94 Chapter 4 Entering Commands Using the Command Line with the Keyboard Using the Command Line with the Keyboard When using the command line with the keyboard you enter commands by pressing softkeys whose labels appear at the bottom of the screen Softkeys provide for quick command entry and minimize the possibility of errors The command line also provides command completion You can type the first few characters of a command enough to uniquely identify the command and then press lt Tab gt The interface completes the command word for you Entering commands with the keyboard is easy However the interface provides other features that make entering commands even easier For example you can e Enter multiple commands on one line e Recall commands e Fdit commands e Access on line help information To enter multiple commands on one command line e Separate the commands with semicolons More than one command may be entered in a single command line if the commands are separated by semicolons Examples To reset the emulator and break into the monitor reset break lt RETURN gt 95 Chapter 4 Entering Commands Using the Command Line with the Keyboard
290. ions of the resources they contain follow Softkey Label Defines the labels for the fixed text in the interface Such things as menu item labels and similar text are in this file If the LANG environment variable is set the scheme file Softkey SLANG is loaded if it exists otherwise the file Softkey Label is loaded Softkey BW Defines the color scheme for black and white displays This file is chosen if the display cannot produce at least 16 colors Softkey Color Defines the color scheme for color displays This file is chosen if the display can produce 16 or more colors Softkey Large Defines the size scheme that is the window dimensions and fonts for high resolution displays 1000 pixels or more vertically Softkey Small Defines the size scheme that is the window dimensions and fonts for low resolution displays less than 1000 pixels vertically Softkey Input Defines the input scheme that is the button and key bindings for the mouse and keyboard 502 Chapter 14 Concepts X Resources and the Graphical User Interface Load Order for Scheme Files Scheme files are searched for in the following directories and in the following order 10 System scheme files in directory usr hp64000 lib X 1 1 HP64_schemes 11 System wide custom scheme files located in directory X APPLRESDIR HP64_schemes 12 User defined scheme files located in directory HOME HP64_schemes note the dot in the directory name Custom Sche
291. is M ABABAFCA main module main c temporary QGG08FCA Esp main module main c pending agaeer D2 main module main c permanent BBABAFFC main module main c inactivated The status of a breakpoint can be temporary Which means the temporary breakpoint has been set but not encountered during program execution These breakpoints are removed when the breakpoint is encountered 180 Chapter 6 Using the Emulator Using Software Breakpoints pending Which means the temporary breakpoint has been set but not encountered during program execution These breakpoints are inactivated when the breakpoint is encountered permanent Which means the permanent breakpoint is active inactivated Which means the breakpoint has been inactivated somehow Temporary breakpoints are inactivated when they are encountered during program execution Both temporary and permanent breakpoints may be inactivated using the breakpoints display popup menu In the breakpoints display a popup menu is available You can set inactivate or clear breakpoints as well as enable or disable the breakpoints feature from the popup menu To enable disable breakpoints Choose the Breakpoints Enable toggle When displaying the breakpoint list press and hold the select mouse button and then choose Enable Disable Software Breakpoints from the popup menu Using the command line enter the modify software_breakpoints enable or modify software_breakpoints d
292. isable command The breakpoints feature must be enabled before you can set inactivate or clear breakpoints If breakpoints were set when the feature was disabled they are inactivated when the feature is re enabled and you must set them again The emulator analyzer interface will enable software breakpoints whenever the XEnv_68k_except symbol is present in the symbol data base The run time library provided with the 68332 C Cross Compiler uses software breakpoints to interrupt program execution when exceptions for example divide 181 Chapter 6 Using the Emulator Using Software Breakpoints by zero are encountered If software breakpoints are disabled exception processing may result in access to guarded memory errors and or other unpredictable behavior To prevent this a special global symbol XEnv_68k_except is included in the library When the XEnv_68k_except symbol is present the 68340 emulator writes a value to this location The value tells the run time library to use the BGND instruction to perform a software break 182 Chapter 6 Using the Emulator Using Software Breakpoints Examples To enable software breakpoints using the breakpoints display popup menu Software breakpoints disabled address label BOOOAFCA main module main c inactivated Bring up menu and GGGGFCA Esp main module main c inactivated h this i aaeaero2 main module main c inactivated choose this item t
293. isplay increase the widths of the label and or mnemonic fields This lets you specify the address width in columns of the address field in the trace list or label symbols field in any of the other displays This lets you specify the width in columns of the mnemonic field in memory mnemonics trace list and register step mnemonics displays It also changes the width of the status field in the trace list This lets you specify the maximum width of symbols in the mnemonic field of the trace list memory mnemonic and register step mnemonic displays This prompts you for the column width of the source label mnemonic or symbols field Note that lt CTRL gt f and lt CTRL gt g may be used to shift the display left or right to display information which is off the screen set source on inverse_video on tabs_are 2 lt RE set symbols on width label 30 mnemonic 20 lt RE set PRINTER lp s lt RETURN gt set HP64KSYMBPATH filel procl file2 proc2 code_block_1 lt RI ETURN gt aa ry URN gt URN gt The display data display memory display software_breakpoints and display trace commands 403 Chapter 11 Emulator Analyzer Interface Commands specify specify run lt RETURN gt disable EXPR transfer_address until i EXPR FCODE U Aall TRACE This comma
294. isplays toggles whether memory displays are automatically updated after commands that change memory contents or whether you must enter memory display commands to update the display You may wish to turn off memory display updates for example when displaying memory mapped I O Trace Displays toggles whether trace displays are automatically updated when trace measurements complete or whether you must enter trace display commands to update the display You may wish to turn off trace display updates in one emulator analyzer window in order to compare the display with a new trace display in another emulator analyzer window 208 Chapter 6 Using the Emulator Using System Commands Using System Commands With the system commands you can e Set UNIX environment variables while in the Softkey Interface e Display the name of the emulation module e Display the event log e Display the error log e Edit files e Copy information to a file or printer e Open a terminal emulation window To set UNIX environment variables e Using the command line enter the set lt VAR gt command You can set UNIX shell environment variables from within the Softkey Interface with the set lt environment_variable gt lt value gt command Examples To set the PRINTER environment variable to Ip s set PRINTER lp s lt RETURN gt After you set an environment variable from within the Softkey Interface you can verify the
295. it s in emulation ROM or target system RAM mapped as ROM When breaks on writes to ROM are disabled The emulator will not break to the monitor upon a write to ROM 150 Chapter 5 Configuring the Emulator Setting the Debug Trace Options To trace background cycles Answer background or both to the Trace background or foreground operation question Answering background specifies that the analyzer trace only background cycles This is rarely a useful setting for user program debugging Because the background monitor is implemented using the 68340 background debug mode BDM only memory accesses are captured when tracing background cycles Answering both specifies that the analyzer trace both foreground and background cycles You may wish to specify this option so that all emulation processor cycles may be viewed in the trace display 151 152 Using the Emulator 153 Using the Emulator This chapter describes general tasks you may wish to perform while using the emulator These tasks are grouped into the following sections Using the emulator configuration registers Loading absolute files Using symbols Using context commands Executing user programs starting stopping stepping and resetting the emulator Using software breakpoints Displaying and modifying registers Displaying and modifying memory Displaying data values Changing the interface settings Using system c
296. itor occurs 243 Chapter 7 Using the Emulation Analyzer Qualifying Trigger and Store Conditions Examples To break emulator execution on the analyzer trigger Enter a trigger state specification in the entry buffer then choose Trace gt Until Using the command line use the break_on_trigger option to the trace command The break_on_trigger option to the trace command allows you to cause the emulator to break when the analyzer finds the trigger state Note that the actual break may be several cycles after the analyzer trigger To trace before source line 102 and cause the emulator to break into the monitor when the analyzer triggers trace before address main main c line 102 break_on_trigger lt RETURN gt 244 Chapter 7 Using the Emulation Analyzer Using the Sequencer Using the Sequencer When you use the analyzer s sequencer you can specify traces that trigger on a series or sequence of states You can specify a state which when found causes the analyzer to restart the search for the sequence of states Also the analyzer s sequencer allows you to trace windows of code execution This section describes how to e Trigger on a sequence of states e Specify a global restart state e Trace windows of program execution The sequencing and windowing capabilities from within the Softkey Interface are not as powerful or flexible as they are from within the Terminal Interface For ex
297. ivity measurements 1 Specify a trace display depth of 512 2 Trace after any state store all states and count time Before you initialize and run performance measurements the current trace command in other words the last trace command entered must be properly set up In general you want to give the SPMT as many trace states as possible to post process so you should increase the trace depth to the maximum number as shown in the following command If you wish to measure activity as a percentage of all activity the current trace command should be the default in other words trace lt RETURN gt The default trace command triggers on any state and all captured states are stored It is important that time be counted by the analyzer otherwise the SPMT measurements will not be correct Also since states are stored after the trigger state the maximum number of captured states appears in each trace list You can qualify trace commands any way you like to obtain specific information However when you qualify the states that get stored in the trace memory your SPMT results will be biased by your qualifications the percentages shown will be of only those states stored in the trace list 271 Chapter 8 Making Software Performance Measurements Activity Performance Measurements Examples To specify a trace depth of 512 display trace depth 512 lt RETURN gt To trace after any state store all states and coun
298. kpoint 186 To re activate a breakpoint 187 To clear a breakpoint 189 To clear all breakpoints 191 Displaying and Modifying Registers 192 To display register contents 196 To modify register contents 197 Displaying and Modifying Memory 198 To display memory 198 To display memory in mnemonic format 199 To return to the previous mnemonic display 199 To display memory in hexadecimal format 200 To display memory in real number format 201 To display memory at an address 202 To display memory repetitively 203 To modify memory 203 Displaying Data Values 204 To display data values 204 To clear the data values display and add a new item 205 To add items to the data values display 205 Contents Changing the Interface Settings 206 To set the source symbol modes 206 To set the display modes 207 Using System Commands 209 To set UNIX environment variables 209 To display the name of the emulation module 210 To display the event log 210 To display the errorlog 211 To edit files 212 To copy information to a file or printer 215 To open a terminal emulation window 216 Using Simulated O 217 To display the simulated I O screen 217 To use simulated I O keyboard input 218 Using Basis Branch Analysis 219 To store BBA data to a file 219 Using the Emulation Analyzer The Basics of Starting Stopping and Displaying Traces 223 To start a trace measurement 224 To display the trace status 224 To stop a trace measurement
299. l Action Display memory mnemonic using a large address range or no address range at all Perfinit Absolute file database must be loaded line lt LINE NUMBER gt Cause No symbolic data base has been opened or exists for the target file when you executed the performance_measurement_initialize command Action Make sure a data base has been loaded for the target file 444 Chapter 12 Error Messages Graphical Softkey Interface Messages Unnumbered Perfinit error in input file line lt LINE NUMBER gt invalid symbol You included a label file name with your performance_measurement_initialize command and that file contains an invalid symbol Action Edit the file and correct the invalid symbol Perfinit error in input file line lt NUMBER gt Cause You included an input file name with your performance_measurement_initialize command and that file contains a syntax error Action Edit the file and correct the syntax error Perfinit lt EXPR ERROR gt line lt LINE NUMBER gt Perfinit File could not be opened Cause You specified a file as an option to performance_measurement_initialize and the file you specified could not be found or opened by SPMT software Action Make sure you entered the correct file name Perfinit No events in file Cause You specified a file along with your performance_measurement initialize command that contained no events Any measurement displayed from t
300. lator Analyzer window should appear on your screen The window will be similar to the following 551 Chapter 15 Installation Verifying the Installation File Display Modify Execution Breakpoints Trace Settings Starting new session 552 j Chapter 15 Installation Verifying the Installation Step 3 Exit the Graphical User Interface Position the mouse pointer over the pulldown menu named File on the menu bar at the top of the interface screen Press and hold the command select mouse button until the File menu appears While continuing to hold the mouse button down move the mouse pointer down the menu to the Exit menu item Display the Exit cascade menu by moving the mouse pointer to the right edge of the Exit menu choice There is an arrow on the right edge of the menu item Choose Released from the cascade menu The interface will terminate and release the emulator for use by others 553 554 16 Installing Updating Emulator Firmware 555 Installing Updating Emulator Firmware If you ordered the HP 64751A 68340 emulator probe and the HP 64748C emulation control card together the control card contains the correct firmware for the HP 64751A However if you ordered the HP 64751A and the HP 64748C separately or if you are using a HP 64748C that has been used previously with a different emulator probe you must download the correct firmware i
301. le e Stop logging commands to a command file e Playback execute a command file Nesting Command Files You can nest a maximum of eight levels of command files Nesting command files means one command file calls another Comments in Command Files Text that follows a pound sign up to the end of the line is interpreted as a comment Using the wait Command When editing command files you can insert wait commands to pause execution of the command file at certain points If you press lt CTRL gt c to stop execution of a command file while the wait command is being executed from the command file the lt CTRL gt c will terminate the wait command but will not terminate command file execution To do this press lt CTRL gt c again 98 Chapter 4 Entering Commands Using Command Files Use the wait measurement_complete command after changing the trace depth By doing this when you copy or display the trace after changing the trace depth the new trace states will be available Otherwise the new states won t be available Passing Parameters Command files provide a convenient method for passing parameters by using a parameter declaration line preceding the commands in the command file When the command file is called the system will prompt you for current values of the formal parameters listed Parameters are defined as Passed Parameters These are ASCII strings passed to a command file Any continuous set of
302. lects and generating internal DSACKx signals for an 8 bit port You must place the appropriate values into the emulator configuration CF_SIM versions of the chip select address and mask registers so that emulation memory is accessed correctly Using Chip Selects to Access Emulation Memory When using chip selects to access emulation memory the DSACKx signals can be generated internally or externally If the DSACKx signals are generated externally as defined by the CF_CSXMASK register emulation memory must be interlocked with the target system use the dsi attribute when mapping the emulation memory range otherwise there will be no DSACKx response Fast Termination Mode Emulation memory does not support the fast termination mode 1 wait state that can be defined in the chip select registers If a chip select is programmed for this mode it will override the mapper and force access to the target system External DMA Access to Emulation Memory External direct memory access DMA to emulation memory is not permitted The HP 64751 emulator supports operation of the two 68340 on chip DMA channels in both single and dual address modes Dual address transfers can access emulation memory single address transfers must be between peripherals and memory in the target system only 134 Chapter 5 Configuring the Emulator Mapping Memory To map memory ranges 1 Access the configuration questions 2 Answer yes to the Modify
303. libe aaaa _startup B GGG5FC BAAO 1IB env falala _swrite agaa471C 86884751 libe poaa _wrtchk 00004752 68847E9 libe aaaa _xf Isbuf 6847EA 6884876 libe pagg atexit G6265E 44882689 libc pagg calloc B G62BC6 AAAA2BF libc B412 clear_screen GBBB89FE GB686A33 env BICA close G8G8CE AAAAAIAI env g 3A combsort 94861244 888143B prog 28A do_sort 48801442 48014E1 prog 4488 164 Chapter 6 Using the Emulator Using Symbols To display local symbols When displaying symbols position the mouse pointer over a symbol on the symbol display screen and click the select mouse button When displaying symbols position the mouse pointer over the symbol press and hold the select mouse button and choose Display Local Symbols from the popup menu Position the mouse cursor in the entry buffer and enter the module whose local symbols are to be displayed then choose Display Local Symbols Using the command line enter the display local_symbols_in lt module gt command To display the address ranges associated with the high level program s source file line numbers you must display the local symbols in the file 165 Chapter 6 Using the Emulator Using Symbols Examples To use the Symbols Display popup menu File Display Modify Execution Breakpoints Trace Settings lt Your Key gt SELCI Make bo Sre aaa xfer to a Break aa Step Asm Global symbols in ecs x Procedure symbols
304. lify the trace so that only accesses of that variable are stored and turn on prestore to find out where accesses of that variable originate from primary sequencer branch Occurs when the analyzer finds the primary branch state specified at a certain level and begins searching for the states specified at the primary branch s destination level real time Refers to continuous execution of the user program without interference from the emulator Such interference occurs when the emulator temporarily breaks into the monitor so that it can access register contents or target system memory or I O secondary sequencer branch Occurs when the analyzer finds the secondary branch state specified at a certain level before it found the primary branch state and begins searching for the states specified at the secondary branch s destination level sequence terms Individual levels of the sequencer The analyzer provides 8 sequence terms sequencer The part of the analyzer that allows it to search for a certain sequence of states before triggering sequencer branch Occurs when the analyzer finds the primary or secondary branch state specified at a certain level and begins searching for the states specified at another level target system The microprocessor system which the emulator plugs into 564 Glossary trace A collection of states captured on the emulation bus in terms of the emulation bus analyzer or on the analyzer trace signals in
305. lized Action Make sure your data communication switch settings are correct and that all Softkey Interface software has been loaded properly Cycle power on the emulator then try starting up the emulation session again Initialization load failed Cause The emulator could not be initialized Action Make sure your data communication switch settings are correct and that all Softkey Interface software has been loaded properly Cycle power on the emulator then try starting up the emulation session again Initializing emulator with default configuration Cause This is a status message The host system started the emulation session and initialized the emulator using the default configuration The emulator is probably operating correctly Initializing user interface with default config file Cause This is a status message The host system started the emulation session and Softkey Interface using the default configuration file The emulator is probably operating correctly 440 Chapter 12 Error Messages Graphical Softkey Interface Messages Unnumbered Insufficient emulation memory memory map may be incomplete Cause You can map only the amount of emulation memory available in your emulator Trying to map additional unavailable memory may cause information to be missing from your memory map Action Modify your configuration and update the memory map to correctly reflect the amount of emulation memory available Invalid
306. lp or on the command line You will notice a new set of softkeys By pressing one of these softkeys and lt RETURN3 gt you can display information on that topic Examples To display information on the system commands help system_commands lt RETURN gt Or 2 system_commands lt RETURN gt The help information is scrolled on to the screen If there is more than a screen full of information you will have to press the space bar to see the next screen full or the lt RETURN gt key to see the next line just as you do with the UNIX more command After all the information on the particular topic has been displayed or after you press q to quit scrolling through information you are prompted to press lt RETURN gt to return to the command line 97 Chapter 4 Entering Commands Using Command Files Using Command Files You can execute a series of commands that have been stored in a command file You can create command files by logging commands while using the interface or by using an editor on your host computer Once you create a command file you can execute the file in the emulation environment by typing the name of the file on the command line and pressing lt RETURN gt Command files execute until an end of file is found or until a syntax error occurs You can stop a command file by pressing lt CTRL gt c or the lt Break gt key This section shows you how to e Start logging commands to a command fi
307. ls mean number of intervals 289 Chapter 8 Making Software Performance Measurements Duration Performance Measurements Standard Deviation Deviation from the mean of time The following equation is used to calculate standard deviation N std dev x gt 3 sumq N mean g 1 Where N Number of intervals mean Average time Ssumq Sum of squares of time in the intervals Error Tolerance and Confidence Level An approximate error may exist in displayed information Error tolerance for a level of confidence is calculated using the mean of the standard deviations and the mean of the means Error tolerance gives an indication of the stability of the information For example if the error is 5 for a confidence level of 95 then you can be 95 confident that the information has an error of 5 or less The Student s T distribution is used in these calculations because it improves the accuracy for small samples As the size of the sample increases the Student s T distribution approaches the normal distribution The following equation is used to calculate error tolerance error pct NxP 100 Where Om Mean of the standard deviations in each time range t Table entry in Student s T table for a given confidence level N Number of intervals 290 Chapter 8 Making Software Performance Measurements Duration Performance Measurements Pm Mean of the means i e mean of the average times in each
308. ly the last 8 are displayed Emulator Messages Attempt to change foreground monitor map term Cause When configuring the emulator to use a foreground monitor a memory range is automatically mapped for the monitor s use You attempted to alter that term when mapping memory Action Try using another memory range for the new map term If you need to have the range used by the foreground monitor then switch to a background monitor delete the old foreground monitor map term and add the new term Now you can return to using a foreground monitor remember you will need to reload the monitor code Insufficient emulation memory Cause You have attempted to map more emulation memory than is available Action Reduce the amount of emulation memory that you are trying to map Restricted to real time runs Cause While the emulator is restricted to real time execution you have attempted to use a command that requires a temporary break in execution to the monitor The emulator does not permit the command and issues this error message 453 Chapter 12 Error Messages Terminal Interface Messages 61 80 81 82 Action You must break the emulator s execution into the monitor before you can enter the command Emulator is in the reset state Cause You have entered a command that requires the emulator to be running in the monitor for example displaying registers Action Enter the break command to cause the emulator to
309. mance Measurements Label set_outputs Address Range 177AH thru 180AH Memory Activity State Percent Rel 31 31 Abs 25 00 Mean 128 00 Sdv 227 46 Time Percent Rel 31 30 Abs 24 95 Program Activity State Percent Rel 28 61 Abs 25 00 Mean 128 00 Sdv 227 46 Time Percent Rel 28 57 Abs 24 95 strcpy8 Address Range 10A6H thru 1100H Memory Activity State Percent Rel 21 77 Abs 17 38 Mean 89 00 Sdv 149 70 Time Percent Rel 21 76 Abs 17 34 Program Activity State Percent Rel 26 39 Abs 23 06 Mean 118 05 Sdv 190 05 Time Percent Rel 26 47 Abs 23 11 interrupt_sim Address Range 1014H thru 109EH Memory Activity State Percent Rel 18 78 Abs 15 00 Mean 76 80 Sdv 187 57 Time Percent Rel 18 78 Abs 14 97 Program Activity State Percent Rel 17 17 Abs 15 00 Mean 76 80 Sdv 187 57 Time Percent Rel 17 14 Abs 14 97 write_hdwr Address Range 1812H thru 188AH Memory Activity State Percent Rel 12 52 Abs 10 00 Mean 51 20 Sdv 157 59 Time Percent Rel 12 52 Abs 9 98 Program Activity State Percent Rel 11 44 Abs 10 00 Mean 51 20 Sdv 157 59 Time Percent Rel 11 43 Abs 9 98 get_targets Address Range 1654H thru 16DCH Memory Activity State Percent Rel 6 26 Abs 5 00 279 Chapter 8 Making Software Performance Measurements Activity Performance Measurements Mean 25 Time Percent Rel 6 Program Activity State Percent Rel 54 Mean
310. mands in the command file will not execute while the command file is paused You can verify whether the interrupt signal is defined as lt CTRL gt c by typing set at the system prompt 426 Chapter 11 Emulator Analyzer Interface Commands wait The parameters are as follows measurement This causes the system to pause until a pending measurement completes a trace _ complete data upload process completes or until a lt CTRL gt c signal is received If a measurement is not in progress the wait command will complete immediately or This causes the system to wait for a lt CTRL gt c signal or for a pending measurement to complete Whichever occurs first will satisfy the condition seconds This causes the system to pause for a specific number of seconds lt TIME gt This prompts you for the number of seconds to insert for the delay Examples wait lt RETURN gt wait 5 wait measurement_complete lt RETURN gt 427 Chapter 11 Emulator Analyzer Interface Commands WINDOW disable enable QUALIFIER Examples WINDOW From trace syntax diagram enable Y QUALIFIER S disable QUALIFIER J Lets you select which states are stored by the analyzer WINDOW allows you to selectively toggle analyzer operation When enabled the analyzer will recognize sequence terms trigger terms and will store states When disabled the analyzer is effectively off and only looks f
311. mands that are executed during an emulation session A command file is an ASCII file containing Softkey Interface commands The interface can read a command file and execute its commands as if they were typed into the command line Simply type the filename on the command line This interface command lets you create command files by logging When the interface is in logging mode all commands entered and executed on the command line are also copied to the named file Once started logging continues until either logging is turned off or the emulation session is ended The log_commands command is not on the softkeys You must type it into the command line to access the remainder of the log_commands softkeys The parameters are as follows This represents the file where you want to store interface commands If the file does not exist a new file is created If the file already exists the new commands are appended to the present content in the file unless the noappend option is specified This option stops command logging If the named file is an existing file this option causes the new commands to overwrite any information present in the file If this option is not specified new commands are appended to the existing contents of the file 376 Chapter 11 Emulator Analyzer Interface Commands log_commands Examples log_commands to logfile lt RETURN gt log_commands off lt RETURN gt See Also The wait command 377
312. me Files You can modify scheme files by copying them to the directory for user defined schemes and changing the resource specifications in the file For example if you wish to modify the color scheme and your platform is HP UX you can copy the ust hp64000 lib X 1 1 HP64_schemes HP UX Softkey Color file to HOME HP64_schemes HP UX Softkey Color and modify its resource specifications You can create custom scheme files by modifying the X resource for the particular scheme and by placing the custom scheme file in the directory for user defined schemes For example if the following resource specifications are made HP64_Softkey platformScheme HP UX HP64_Softkey colorScheme MyColor The custom scheme file would be SHOME HP64_schemes HP UX Softkey MyColor 503 504 Part 5 Installation Guide Instructions for installing and configuring the product 505 Part 5 506 15 Installation 507 Installation This chapter shows you how to install emulation and analysis hardware and interface software It also shows you how to verify installation by starting the emulator analyzer interface for the first time These installation tasks are described in the following sections e Installing hardware e Connecting the HP 64700 to a computer or LAN e Installing HP 9000 software e Installing Sun SPARCsystem software e Verifying the installation Minimum HP 9000 Hardware and System Requir
313. means to first display the File pulldown menu then display the Load cascade menu then select the Configuration item from the Load cascade menu Based on this explanation the general rule for interpreting this notation can be stated as follows e The leftmost item in bold is the pulldown menu label e If there are more than two items then cascade menus are involved and all items between the first and last item have cascade menus attached e The last item on the right is the actual menu choice to be made 28 Chapter 1 Getting Started Mouse Button and Keyboard Bindings Because the Graphical User Interface runs on different kinds of computers which may have different conventions for mouse buttons and key names the Graphical User Interface supports different bindings and the customization of bindings This manual refers to the mouse buttons using general or generic terms The following table describes the generic mouse button names and shows the default mouse button bindings Mouse Button Bindings and Description Bindings Generic Button Sun Name HP 9000 SPARCsystem Description paste left left Paste from the display area to the entry buffer command paste middle middle Paste from the entry buffer to the command line text entry area select right right Click selects first item in popup menus Press and hold displays menus command select left right Displays pulldown menus pushbutton left left A
314. ment lines are displayed preceding the actual source line The default value is oF lt NUMSRC gt This prompts you for the number of source lines to be displayed Values in the range through 50 may be entered source memory_only_ This provides a way to default the memory and trace displays to a setting that HP trace_on believes is the nicest possible formats for memory and trace displays Parameters such as source on only number of source lines to show display width and turning symbols on are all governed by this one selection With this selection memory displays will show the maximum available source lines preceding each block of code and trace lists will show five source lines preceding trace data 401 Chapter 11 Emulator Analyzer Interface Commands set off on only symbols off on high low all tabs are lt TABS gt update lt VALUE gt width This option prevents inclusion of source lines in the trace and memory mnemonic display lists This option displays source program lines preceding actual processor instructions with which they correlate This enables you to correlate processor instructions with your source program code The option works for both the trace list and memory mnemonic displays This option displays only source lines Processor instructions are only displayed in memory mnemonic if no source lines correspond to the instructions Processor instructions are never displaye
315. menu item simply move the mouse pointer off of the menu and click the mouse button Some menu items have an ellipsis as part of the menu label An ellipsis indicates that the menu item will display a dialog or other box when the menu item is chosen To choose a pulldown menu item using the keyboard To initially display a pulldown menu press and hold the menu select key for example the Extend char key on a HP 9000 keyboard and then type the underlined character in the menu label on the menu bar For example f for File Type the character in lower case only To move right to another pulldown menu after having initially displayed a menu press the right arrow key 77 Chapter 4 Entering Commands Using Menus the Entry Buffer and Action Keys To move left to another pulldown menu after having initially displayed a menu press the left arrow key To move down one menu item within a menu press the down arrow key To move up one menu item within a menu press the up arrow key To choose a menu item type the character in the menu item label that is underlined Or move to the menu item using the arrow keys and then press the lt RETURN gt key on the keyboard To cancel a displayed menu press the Escape key The interface supports keyboard mnemonics and the use of the arrow keys to move within or between menus For each menu or menu item the underlined character in the menu or menu item label is the keybo
316. mmand The set command allows you to include symbolic information in trace memory register and software breakpoint displays The set command affects all displays for the current window The set source on off only command allows you to include source file information in the trace list or memory mnemonic display The source only option specifies that only the source file information will be displayed When source lines are included comments that contain file and line information appear before the source lines Also when source lines are turned on three additional options are available in the set command inverse video tabs are and number of source lines The inverse_video option allows you to display source lines in inverse video The tabs_are option allows you to specify the number of spaces between tab stops so that the appropriate number of spaces can be inserted for source lines The default value is eight Values from two to 15 can be entered Typically there are lines in the source file that are not associated with actual instructions declarations comments etc The number_of_source_lines option allows you to specify the number of these source lines to be displayed for every source line that is associated with an actual instruction Only source lines up to the the previous source line that corresponds to actual code will be displayed The default value is five Values from one to 50 can be entered Examples To display the
317. mory sp long real update data ireal 8134788 187437GE 154 97554888 117483E 138 04709978053044E 154 6346648 10350686E 138 145200638 16813E 307 076 15524484636E 060 59148924067205E 016 address G0872DA _ascii_old_d agaa72E2 gae72EA agan72F2 agae72FA 66667382 880738A 9 a8731A agaa7322 aa732A a87332 8808733A 98087342 808734A 00007352 8735A 59148924867245E 8 16 59148924067 205E 016 59148924067 205E 016 59148924067 205E 016 59148924067 205E 016 59148924067 205E 016 59148924067 205E 016 59148924067 205E 016 59148924067 205E 016 6 1 6 1 3 1 1 agaa7312 2 348288308 1 12762E 007 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 To display memory at an address e Place an absolute or symbolic address in the entry buffer then choose Display Memory gt At This command displays memory in the same format as that of the last memory display command If no previous command has been issued memory is displayed as hexadecimal bytes 202 Chapter 6 Using the Emulator Displaying and Modifying Memory To display memory repetitively Choose DisplayMemory Repetitively Using the command line enter the display memory repetitively command The memory display is constantly updated The format is specified by the last memory display command This command is ignored if the last memory display command was a mnemonic display To modify memory Choose Modify Memory and co
318. mples See Also This causes selected memory locations to be stored in the specified HP64000 format file with a X extension This allows you to specify that ranges of memory be stored Use this in the store memory command to separate memory locations from the file identifier This option causes the current trace data to be stored in the specified file with a TR extension This option stores the current trace specification in the specified file with a TS extension A comma separates memory expressions in the command line store memory 800H thru 20FFH to TEMP2 lt RETURN gt store memory EXEC thru DONE to 12 10 lt RETURN gt store trace TRACE lt RETURN gt store trace_spec TRACE lt RETURN gt The display memory display trace and load commands 410 Chapter 11 Emulator Analyzer Interface Commands SYMB lt SEG_NAME gt 7 lt FILENAME gt L J SYMB lt SYMB gt entry _exit_range text_range N L segment J S N FLE J Ta line OH lt LINE gt FILE gt lt FILENAME gt SCOPE lt SYMB gt lt FILENAME gt SCOPE a SCOPE lt IDENTIFIER gt SCOPE m r lt TYPE gt 411 Chapter 11 Emulator Analyzer Interface Commands SYMB This paramete
319. mplete the command using the command line To modify memory at a particular address place an absolute or symbolic address in the entry buffer then choose Modify Memory at and complete the command using the command line Using the command line enter the modify memory command You can modify the contents of one memory location or a range of memory locations Options allow you to modify memory in byte short word and real number formats 203 Chapter 6 Using the Emulator Displaying Data Values Displaying Data Values The data values display lets you view the contents of memory as data types You can display data values in the following formats bytes 8 bit integers unsigned 8 bit integers chars words 16 bit integers unsigned 16 bit integers long words 32 bit integers unsigned 32 bit integers This section shows you how to e Display data values e Clear the data values display and add a new item e Add item to the data values display To display data values Choose Display Data Values Using the command line enter the display data command Items must be added to the data values display before you can use this command The data display shows the values of simple data types in the user program When the display mode setting turns ON symbols a label column that shows symbol values is added to the data display Step commands and commands that cause the emulator to enter the monitor for e
320. mulation bus analyzer The internal analyzer that captures emulator bus cycle information synchronously with the processor s clock signal emulation monitor program A program that is executed by the emulation processor which allows the emulation controller to access target system resources For example when you display target system memory locations the monitor program executes microprocessor instructions that read the target memory locations and send their contents to the emulation controller emulator An instrument that performs just like the microprocessor it replaces but at the same time it gives you information about the operation of the processor An emulator gives you control over target system execution and allows you to view or 563 Glossary modify the contents of processor registers target system memory and I O resources foreground The mode in which the emulator is executing the user program In other words the mode in which the emulator operates as the target microprocessor would global restart When the same secondary branch condition is used for all terms in the analyzer s sequencer and secondary branches are always back to the first term prestore The analyzer feature that allows up to two states to be stored before normally stored states This feature is useful when you want to find the cause of a particular state For example if a variable is accessed from many different places in the program you can qua
321. n You must enable software breakpoints before you can set them Specified breakpoint not in list s Cause You tried to clear a software breakpoint that was not previously set The string s prints the address of the breakpoint you attempted to clear Action You must first set a software breakpoint before it can be cleared Breakpoint list full not added s Cause The software breakpoint table is already reached the maximum of 32 breakpoints The breakpoint you just requested with address s was not inserted Action Clear breakpoints that are no longer in use Then set the new breakpoint Enable breakpoint failed s Cause System failure or target condition Action Check memory mapping and configuration questions Disable breakpoint failed s Cause System failure or target condition Action Check memory mapping and configuration questions 470 Chapter 12 Error Messages Terminal Interface Messages 667 Breakpoint code already exists s Cause You attempted to insert a breakpoint however there was already a software breakpoint instruction at that location which was not already in the breakpoint table Action Your program code is apparently using the same instructions as used by the software breakpoints feature Remove the breakpoint instructions from your program code and use the modify software_breakpoints set command to insert them 668 Breakpoint not added s Cause You tried to insert a break
322. n emulation ROM Cause Your stack pointer pointed to a location in memory mapped as emulation ROM you then attempted to run or step the emulation processor The emulator was unable to access the stack to complete the transition from the monitor to the user program or vice versa Action Either remap memory so the stack pointer points to a location in RAM or change the stack pointer value either with your program or by configuring the emulator s stack pointer value on reset to point to a location in RAM Program counter is odd Cause You attempted to modify the program counter to an odd value using the modify registers command on a processor which expects even alignment of opcodes Action Modify the program counter only to even numbered values Monitor failure no clock input Cause The monitor is unable to run because no emulation processor clock is available Action If running out of circuit select the internal clock during configuration if running in circuit select the external clock during configuration and make sure a clock meeting the microprocessor s specifications is input to the clock pin of the target system probe Monitor failure no processor cycles Cause The monitor is unable to run since the processor is not running The monitor is unable to determine the cause of the failure Action If running in circuit troubleshoot the target system If running out of circuit reinitialize the emulator and try the
323. n keys to use the contents of the entry buffer Entry Buffer Recall Button Allows you to recall entry buffer values that have been predefined or used in previous commands When you click on the entry buffer Recall button a dialog box appears that allows you to select values Display Area Can show memory data values analyzer traces registers breakpoints status simulated I O global symbols local symbols pod commands the emulator s underlying Terminal Interface error log or display log Whenever the mouse pointer changes from an arrow to a hand you can press and hold the select mouse button to access popup menus Scroll Bar A sticky slider that allows navigation in the display area Click on the upper and lower arrows to scroll to the top home and bottom end of the window Click on the inner arrows to scroll one line Drag the slider handle up or down to cause continuous scrolling Click between the inner arrows and the slider handle to page up or page down Status Line Displays the emulator and analyzer status Also when error and status messages occur they are displayed on the status line in addition to being saved in the error log You can press and hold the select mouse button to access the Status Line popup menu Command Line The command line area is similar to the command line in the Softkey Interface however the graphical interface lets you use the mouse to enter and edit commands e Command line entry ar
324. n updated your software to a new version number you will not be able to restore old perf out measurement files 274 Examples Chapter 8 Making Software Performance Meas urements Activity Performance Measurements Suppose the addr_ranges file contains the names of all the functions in the ecs demo program loop combsort do_sort gen_ascii_data get_targets graph_data interrupt_sim proc_specific read_conditions save_points set_outputs strcpy8 update_system write_hdwr Since these labels are program symbols you do not have to specify the address range associated with each label the SPMT will search the symbol database for the addresses of each label An easy way to create the addr_ranges file is to use the copy global_symbols command to copy the global symbols to a file named addr_ranges then fork a shell to UNIX by entering lt RETURN gt on the Softkey Interface command line and edit the file so that it contains the procedure names shown above Enter a lt CTRL gt d at the UNIX prompt to return to the Softkey Interface To initialize the activity measurement with a user defined address range file performance_measurement_initialize addr_ranges lt RI ETURN gt 275 Chapter 8 Making Software Performance Measurements Activity Performance Measurements To interpret activity measurement reports View the performance measurement report Activity measurements are me
325. n when the trace completed Because a branch out of the last sequence term constitutes the trigger the number displayed is what would be the next term 2 in the preceding example even though that term is not defined If the trace is halted the sequence term number just before the halt is displayed otherwise the current sequence term number is displayed If the current sequence term is changing too quickly to be read a question mark 7 is displayed The Occurrence left line of the trace status display shows the number of occurrences remaining before the primary branch can be taken out of the current sequence term If the occurrence left is changing too quickly to be read a question mark is displayed 226 Chapter 7 Using the Emulation Analyzer The Basics of Starting Stopping and Displaying Traces To stop a trace measurement e Choose Trace Stop e Using the command line enter the stop_trace command You can and most likely will specify traces whose trigger or storage states are never found When this happens the Emulation trace complete message is never shown and the trace continues to run Emulation trace running When these situations occur you can halt the trace measurement with the stop_trace command The stop_trace command is also useful to deactivate signals which are driven when the trigger is found refer to the Making Coordinated Measurements chapter Examples To halt a trace measurement
326. nal the emulator will use the internal 32 768 KHz crystal The target system MUST drive MODCLK high or allow a pullup resistor in the emulator to pull it high during reset to enable the 68340 voltage controlled oscillator VCO When you answer external the emulator will use the crystal or TTL oscillator in the target system MODCLK should be driven appropriately Generally you should select the external clock option when using the emulator in circuit to synchronize the emulator with your target system 119 Chapter 5 Configuring the Emulator Modifying the General Configuration Items Your target system clock must conform to the specifications for the 68340 microprocessor Note that changing the clock source drives the emulator into the reset state The emulator may later break into the monitor depending on how the Enter monitor after configuration question is answered To enable disable entry into the monitor after configuration Answer yes or no to the Enter monitor after configuration This question allows you to select whether the emulator will be running in the monitor or held in the reset state on completion of the emulator configuration The answer to this configuration question is important in some situations For example when you select the external clock and the target system is turned off do not select reset to monitor Otherwise configuration will fail When you select an external clock source t
327. nd fitness for a particular purpose Hewlett Packard shall not be liable for errors contained herein or for incidental or consequential damages in connection with the furnishing performance or use of this material Hewlett Packard assumes no responsibility for the use or reliability of its software on equipment that is not furnished by Hewlett Packard Copyright 1987 1992 1993 Hewlett Packard Company This document contains proprietary information which is protected by copyright All rights are reserved No part of this document may be photocopied reproduced or translated to another language without the prior written consent of Hewlett Packard Company The information contained in this document is subject to change without notice HP is a trademark of Hewlett Packard Company Microtec is a registered trademark of Microtec Research Inc MS DOS is a trademark of Microsoft Corporation OSF Motif and Motif are trademarks of the Open Software Foundation in the U S and other countries SunOS SPARCsystem OpenWindows and SunView are trademarks of Sun Microsystems Inc UNIX is a registered trademark of UNIX System Laboratories Inc in the U S A and other countries Hewlett Packard P O Box 2197 1900 Garden of the Gods Road Colorado Springs CO 80901 2197 U S A RESTRICTED RIGHTS LEGEND Use duplication or disclosure by the U S Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in subparagraph c 1 ii of the Rights
328. nd prepares a run or trace command for execution and is used with the cmb_execute command When you precede a run or trace command with specify the system does not execute your command immediately Instead it waits until until an EXECUTE signal is received from the Coordinated Measurement Bus or until you enter a cmb_execute command If the processor is reset and no address is specified a cmb_execute command will run the processor from the reset condition Note that the run specification is active until you enter specify run disable The trace specification is active until you enter another trace command without the specify prefix The emulator will run from the current program counter address if no address is specified in the command 404 Chapter 11 Emulator Analyzer Interface Commands specify The parameters are as follows disable This option turns off the specify condition of the run process from EXPR This is used with the specify run from command An expression is a combination of numeric values symbols operators and parentheses specifying a memory address See the EXPR syntax diagram FCODE The function code used to define the address space being referenced See the syntax diagram for FCODE to see a list of the function codes available and for an explanation of those codes This is used with the specify run from command and represents the address from transfer_address which the program will begin running
329. ne_number lt LINE gt memory Ta FCODE EXPR Toan EXPR ii Use this command with various parameters to save or print emulation and analysis information 343 Chapter 11 Emulator Analyzer Interface Commands copy lt CLASS gt lt CMDI gt data display error_log event_log EXPR The copy command copies selected information to your system printer or listing file or directs it to a UNIX process Depending on the information you choose to copy default values may be options selected for the previous execution of the display command For example if you display memory locations 10h through 20h then issue a copy memory to myfile command myfile will list only memory locations 10h through 20h The parameters are as follows A comma used immediately after memory in the command line appends the current copy memory command to the preceding display memory command The data specified in both commands is copied to the destination specified in the current command Data is formatted as specified in the current command The comma is also used as a delimiter between values when specifying multiple memory addresses Specifies a particular class of the emulator registers Refer to the Accessing Registers section in the Using the Emulator chapter for a list of the register names and classes This represents an UNIX filter or pipe w
330. nects from J2 of the emulation control card to J2 of the emulator probe The longest cable connects from J3 of the emulation control card to J1 of the emulator probe 1 Connect the emulator probe cables to the emulation control card EMULATION CONTROL CARD EGR PROBE CABL CABLE CLAMP ESS PANE 512 Chapter 15 Installation Installing Hardware 2 When inserting cable connectors into the sockets press inward on the connector clips so that they hook into the sockets as shown PUSH IN ON CLIPS SOQ THEY HOOK INTO SOCKET 513 Chapter 15 Installation Installing Hardware 3 Connect the other ends of the cables to the emulator probe PROBE CABLES TOP PLASTIC COVER BOTTOM PLASTIC COVER DEMO BOARD 514 Chapter 15 Installation Installing Hardware Step 2 Install Boards into the HP 64700 Card Cage WARNING Before removing or installing parts in the HP 64700 Card Cage make sure that the card cage power is off and that the power cord is disconnected CAUTION Do NOT stand the HP 64700 on the rear panel You could damage the rear panel ports and connectors 1 Use a ground strap when removing or installing boards into the HP 64700 Card Cage to reduce the chances of damage to the circuit cards from static discharge
331. nemonic format 256 offset by 262 positioning left right 229 positioning up down 229 source line inclusion 257 symbol information inclusion 259 width of columns 260 displaying simulated io screen 219 displays copying 344 don t care digits 232 downloading absolute files 5 160 DTACK interlock 136 dual port emulation memory 120 duration measurements SPMT 284 292 average time 289 confidence level 290 error tolerance 290 interpreting reports 289 maximum time 289 minimum time 289 number of intervals 289 recursion considerations 284 573 Index selecting 287 standard deviation 290 trace command setup 285 edit command line entry area with popup menu 93 command line entry area with pushbuttons 92 file 212 317 file at address 212 317 file at program counter 212 file at symbol from symbols screen 212 file from memory display screen 212 8 bit memory substituting emulation memory for 134 electrical characteristics of the emulator 478 embedded microprocessor system 563 emul700 command to start the emulator analyzer interface 65 emulation bus analyzer 563 emulation memory 133 8 bit substituting for 134 block size 133 dual port 120 loading absolute files 160 size of 133 synchronizing to target system 136 emulation monitor 563 function of 123 emulation session exiting 72 emulator 563 configuring the 108 device table file 32 65 66 dimensions 491 ele
332. nfiguration is stored becomes the current configuration file The emulator only recognizes configuration changes when they are stored or loaded When modifying a configuration using the graphical interface you can store your answers at any time This is useful for quickly verifying the effect a configuration change has on the emulator Configuration information is saved in two files with extensions of EA and EB The file with the EA extension is the source copy of the file and the file with the EB extension is the binary or loadable copy of the file 115 Chapter 5 Configuring the Emulator Using the Configuration Interface For more information on how to use dialog boxes refer to the To use dialog boxes description in the Using Menus the Entry Buffer and Action Keys section of the Entering Commands chapter To change the configuration directory context When answering the configuration questions choose File Directory from the pulldown menu and use the Directory Selection dialog box to specify the new directory The directory context specifies the directory to which configuration files are stored and from which they are loaded For more information on how to use dialog boxes refer to the To use dialog boxes description in the Using Menus the Entry Buffer and Action Keys section of the Entering Commands chapter 116 Chapter 5 Configuring the Emulator Using the Configuration Interfa
333. ng only assembly code may step forever To abort stepping press lt CTRL gt c When displaying memory mnemonic and stepping the next instruction that will step is highlighted The memory mnemonic display autopages to the new address if the next PC goes outside of the currently displayed address range This feature works even if stepping is performed in a different emulation window than one displaying memory mnemonic If no value is entered for lt NUMBER gt times only one step instruction is executed each time you press lt RETURN gt Multiple instructions can be executed by holding down the lt RETURN gt key Also the default step is for assembly code lines not source code lines If the from address option defined by EXPR or transfer_address is omitted stepping begins at the next program counter address 406 Chapter 11 Emulator Analyzer Interface Commands step The parameters are as follows EXPR An expression is a combination of numeric values symbols operators and parentheses specifying a memory address See the EXPR syntax diagram FCODE The function code used to define the address space being referenced See the syntax diagram for FCODE to see a list of the function codes available and for an explanation of those codes from Use this option to specify the address from which program stepping begins lt NUMBER gt This defines the number of instructions that will be executed by the step command The number
334. ng the logical name of the emulator as an argument to the command as in HP64000 bin emul700 lt logical_name gt amp or emul700 lt logical name gt amp if HP64000 bin is in your path If you are running the X server if the Graphical User Interface is installed and if your DISPLAY environment variable is set the emul700 command will start the 550 Chapter 15 Installation Verifying the Installation Graphical User Interface Otherwise emul700 starts the conventional Softkey Interface You should include an ampersand amp with the command to start the Graphical User Interface as a background process Doing so frees the terminal window where you started the interface so that the window may still be used 5 Optionally start additional Graphical User Interface windows into the same emulation session by repeating the previous step You can also choose to use the conventional Softkey Interface under X Windows but you must include a command line argument to emul700 to override the default Graphical User Interface Start the conventional interface by entering emul700 u skemul lt logical name gt Example Suppose you have discovered that the logical name for a 68340 emulator connected to the LAN is em68340 To start the Graphical User Interface and begin communicating with that emulator enter assuming your PATH includes HP64000 bin emul700 em68340 After a few seconds the Graphical User Interface Emu
335. ng the Interrupt Priority Level below The emulator breaks into the foreground monitor by using the emulation processor s background debug mode BDM except for single stepping which uses the trace exception The time spent in BDM is approximately 350 microseconds An exception stack frame of 7 to 13 words will be temporarily pushed onto the user s master and or interrupt stack s during monitor entry Selecting the Interrupt Priority Level The default foreground monitor can be configured to run at a lowered interrupt priority level to allow critical target system interrupts to be processed during monitor execution At the point it is safe to lower the interrupt priority level the foreground monitor will set the interrupt priority mask to the value specified or the interrupt level that was in effect before monitor entry whichever is greater During background monitor operation all target system interrupts including level 7 non maskable interrupts are blocked Modifying this configuration item will reset the processor Selecting the Monitor s Base Address Your response to the Monitor s base address question defines the starting address of the 4 Kbyte block of dual ported emulation memory This block of memory is reserved for the foreground monitor The address must reside on a 4 Kbyte boundary in other words an address ending in 000H and must be specified in hexadecimal Also the foreground monitor s base address m
336. nges and comments An example address range file is shown below Any line which starts with a is a comment All user s labels must be preceded by a Jusers_label 10H 1000H program_symbol A program symbol can be a procedure name or a static In the case of a pro cedure name the range of that procedure will be used Jusers_label2 program_symboll gt program_symbol2 gt means thru The above will define a range which starts with symboll and goes thru symbol2 If both symbols are procedures then the range will be defined as the start of symboll thru the end of symbol2 dirl dir2 source_file s local_symbol The above defines a range based on the address of local_symbol Initialization with Global Symbols When the performance_measurement_initialize command is entered with no options or with the global_symbols option the global symbols in the symbols database become the address ranges for which activity is measured If the symbols database is not loaded a default set of ranges that cover the entire processor address range will be used The global symbols database contains procedure symbols which are associated with the address range from the beginning of the procedure to the end and static symbols which are associated with the address of the static variable Initialization with Local Symbols When the performance_measurement_initialize command is entered with the local_symbols_in option and a sourc
337. nnot be resized by using the window manager HP64_Softkey lines 36 HP64_ Softkey columns 85 Save your changes and exit the editor 3 If the RESOURCE_MANAGER property exists as is the case with HP VUE if you re not sure you can check by entering the xrdb query command use the xrdb command to add the resources to the RESOURCE_MANAGER property For example xrdb merge nocpp HP64_Softkey tmp Otherwise if the RESOURCE_MANAGER property does not exist append the temporary file to your SHOME Xdefaults file For example cat HP64_Softkey tmp gt gt HOME Xdefaults 4 Remove the temporary file 5 Start or restart the Graphical User Interface After you have completed the above steps you must either start or restart by exiting and starting again the Graphical User Interface Starting and exiting the Graphical User Interface is described in the Using the Interface chapter 319 Chapter 10 Setting X Resources To use customized scheme files j To use customized scheme files Scheme files are used to set platform specific resources that deal with color fonts and sizes mouse and keyboard operation and labels and titles You can create and use customized scheme files by following these steps Create the HOME HP64_schemes lt platform gt directory For example mkdir HOME HP64_schemes mkdir HOME HP64_schemes HP UX Copy the scheme file to be modified to the HOME HP64_schemes lt platfo
338. nt 36 9g init_system 98 proc_spec_init E 99 100 while true 161 162 update_system 143 num_check siaa 184 interrupt_sim amp num_checks 105 if graph 106 graph_data 187 proc_specific STATUS cws main main c 82 j Chapter 4 Entering Commands Using Menus the Entry Buffer and Action Keys To recall entry buffer values Position the mouse pointer over the Recall button just to the right of the entry buffer text area click the mouse button to bring up the Entry Buffer Recall dialog box and then choose a string from that dialog box The Entry Buffer Recall dialog box contains a list of entries gained during the emulation session as well as any predefined entries present at interface startup If you exit the emulation analysis session with the interface locked recall buffer values are saved and will be present when you restart the interface You can predefine entries for the Entry Buffer Recall dialog box and define the maximum number of entries by setting X resources refer to the Setting X Resources chapter See the following To use dialog boxes section for information about using dialog boxes To use the entry buffer Place information into the entry buffer see the previous To place values into the entry buffer using the keyboard To copy and paste to the entry buffer or To recall entry
339. nto the emulation control card The 68340 emulator firmware is included with the emulator analyzer interface software and the program that downloads emulator firmware is included with the HP B1471 64700 Operating Environment product The firmware and the program that downloads it into the control card are also included with the 68340 emulator probe on an MS DOS format floppies The floppies are for users that do not have hosted interface software Before you can update emulator firmware you must have already installed the emulator into the HP 64700 connected the HP 64700 to a host computer or LAN and installed the emulator analyzer interface and HP B1471 software as described in the Installation chapter This chapter describes how to e Update firmware with the progflash command e Display current firmware version information 556 Chapter 16 Installing Updating Emulator Firmware To update emulator firmware with progflash To update emulator firmware with progflash Enter the progflash v lt emul_name gt lt products gt command The progflash command downloads code from files on the host computer into Flash EPROM memory in the HP 64700 The v option means verbose It causes progress status messages to be displayed during operation The lt emul_name gt option is the logical emulator name as specified in the usr hp64000 etc 64700tab net file The lt products gt option names the products who
340. nts you may wind up with invalid information This section describes how to e Set up the trace command for duration measurements e Initialize duration performance measurements e Interpret duration measurement reports To set up the trace command for duration measurements 1 Specify a trace display depth of 512 2 Trace after and store only function start and end addresses For duration measurements the trace command must be set up to store only the entry and exit points of the module of interest Since the trigger state is always stored you should trigger on the entry or exit points For example trace after symbol_entry or symbol_exit only symbol_entry or symbol_exit counting time lt RETURN gt CAUTION The previous command depends on the generation of correct exit address symbols by the software development tools 285 Chapter 8 Making Software Performance Measurements Duration Performance Measurements Examples Or trace after module_name start or module_name end only module_name start or module_name end counting time lt RETURN gt Where symbol_entry and symbol_exit are symbols from the user program Or where module_name is the name of a C function or Pascal procedure and is listed as a procedure symbol in the global symbol display To specify a trace display depth of 512 display trace depth 512 lt RETURN gt To set up the trace command for duration measurements on the
341. nus Map to the Command Line The following table shows the items available in the pulldown menus and the command line commands to which they map 332 Chapter 11 Emulator Analyzer Interface Commands Pulldown Command Line File gt Context Directory File gt Context Symbols File gt Load Emulator Config File gt Load Executable File gt Load Program Only File gt Load Symbols Only File Store Trace Data File gt Store Trace Spec File gt Store BBA Data File Copy Display File Copy Memory File gt Copy Data Values File gt Copy Trace File gt Copy Registers File Copy Breakpoints File gt Copy Status File Copy Global Symbols File Copy Local Symbols File Copy Pod Commands File gt Copy Error Log File gt Copy Event Log File gt Log Playback File gt Log Record File Log Stop File gt Emul700 High Level Debugger File gt Emul700 Performance Analyzer File gt Emul700 Emulator Analyzer File gt Emul700 Timing Analyzer File gt Edit File File gt Edit At Location File gt Edit At PC Location File gt Term File gt Exit Window save session cd cws load configuration load lt abs_file gt load lt abs_file gt nosymbols load symbols store trace store trace_spec bbaunload copy display to copy memory to copy data to copy trace to copy registers to copy software_breakpoints to copy status to copy global_symbols to copy local_symbols_in SYMB
342. o aQGF FC main module main c inactivated change states Choose Action for Highlighted Line Setinactivate Breakpoint Clear idelete breakpoint Choose Action for All Breakpoints Enable Disable Software Breakpoints Set All Breakpoints Clear delete All Breakpoints STATUS M68340 Running in monitor Software break 900000fcalsp 183 Chapter 6 Using the Emulator Using Software Breakpoints To set a permanent breakpoint When displaying memory in mnemonic format position the mouse pointer over the program line at which you wish to set the breakpoint and click the select mouse button Or press and hold the select mouse button and choose Set Clear Software Breakpoint from the popup menu Place an absolute or symbolic address in the entry buffer then choose Breakpoints Permanent Using the command line enter the modify software_breakpoints set lt address gt permanent command Permanent breakpoints are available if your version of HP 64700 system firmware is A 04 00 or greater The breakpoints feature must be enabled before individual breakpoints can be set Note that you must only set software breakpoints at memory locations which contain instruction opcodes not operands or data When displaying memory in mnemonic format asterisks appear next to breakpoint addresses An asterisk shows the breakpoint is active Also if assembly level code is being displayed the disa
343. o ROM 150 exiting the interface 118 loading from file 118 modifying a section 113 monitor entry after 120 monitor selection 123 132 program counter 148 restrict to real time runs 120 starting the interface 111 storing 115 supervisor stack pointer 148 570 Index context changing directory in configuration window 116 changing directory in emulator analyzer window 172 changing symbol 173 displaying directory from configuration window 117 displaying directory from emulator analyzer window 172 displaying symbol 172 coordinated measurements 307 break_on_trigger syntax of the trace command 307 definition 298 copy command 343 347 breakpoints 215 data 215 344 display 215 344 error_log 216 344 event_log 216 344 global symbols 216 345 help 345 local_symbols_in 216 345 memory 215 345 pod_command 216 346 registers 215 346 software breakpoints 346 status 216 346 trace 215 346 copy and paste addresses 81 from entry buffer 84 multi window 81 84 symbol width 81 to entry buffer 80 count absolute relative trace display option 261 COUNT option to trace command 348 349 count qualifiers 242 count occurrence 239 CPU in wait state status message 128 136 cursor buttons 28 data copy command 344 display command 351 data analyzer state qualifier softkey 235 392 571 Index data values 204 205 adding items to the existing display 205 clearing the displ
344. o debug_env hp64751 main c Symbolic Reference at interrupt_sim 8A To Address 1014 File main module users guest demo debug_env hp64751 main c Symbolic Reference at main interrupt_sim Number of intervals 2550 Maximum Time 182927 360 us Minimum Time 82534 400 us Avg Time 99593 389 us Statistical summary for 10 traces Stdv 25497 98 95 Confidence 0 99 Error tolerance Graph of relative percents us 10 us 0 00 0 1 us 100 us 0 00 00 1 us 500 us 0 00 500 1 us 1 ms 0 00 001 ms 5 ms 0 00 5 001 ms 10 ms 0 00 0 1 ms 20 ms 0 00 20 1 ms 40 ms 0 00 40 1 ms 80 ms 0 00 80 1 ms 160 ms 96 94 kkkxkxkxkxkxkkkkxkkxkxkxkxkkkkkkkxkxkxkxkxkkkkkkkkxkxkxkxkxkkkkkkkkxxkx k 60 1 ms 320 ms 3 06 320 1 ms 640 ms 0 00 640 1 ms 1 2 s 0 00 Two sets of information are given in the duration measurement report module duration and module usage The first set of information in the duration measurement report is the module duration measurement The module duration report shows that the amount of time it takes for the interrupt_sim function to execute varies from 65 64 microseconds to 648 4 milliseconds The average amount of time it takes for the interrupt_sim module to execute is roughly 67 13 milliseconds The second set is the module usage measurement Module usage measurements show how much time is spent outside the module of interest they indicate how often the module is used The information shown in the first
345. o the Terminal Interface There are certain commands that you should avoid while using the Terminal Interface through pod_command Do not use These commands will change the operation of the stty po xp a ee communications channel and are likely to hang the Softkey Interface and the channel echo mac Using these may confuse the communications protocols in use on the channel wait Do not use The pod will enter a wait state blocking access by the emulator analyzer interface init pv These will reset the emulator pod and force an end release_system command t Do not use The trace status polling and unload will become confused To see the results of a particular pod_command the information returned by the emulator pod you use display pod_command 389 Chapter 11 Emulator Analyzer Interface Commands pod_command keyboard lt POD_CMD gt suspend Examples See Also The parameters are as follows Enters an interactive mode where you can simply type Terminal Interface commands unquoted on the command line Use display pod_command to see the results returned from the emulator Prompts you for a Terminal Interface command as a quoted string Enter the command in quotes and press lt RETURN gt This command is displayed once you have entered keyboard mode Select it to stop interactive access to the Terminal Interface and return to the Graphical User Interface or Softkey Inte
346. o the appropriate BNC receptacle on the other measuring instrument t jou r In rgf ALIGN SLOTS ON SIDES OF PLUG WITH TABS ON SIDES OF JACK _ lO ri PUSH TOGETHER AND TURN UNTIL CONNECTORS LOCK 64700E15 The BNC connector is capable of driving TTL level signals into a 50 ohm load A positive rising edge is the trigger signal It requires a driver that can supply at least 4 mA at 2 volts when used as a receiver The BNC connector is configured as an open emitter structure which allows for multiple drivers to be connected It can be used for cross triggering between multiple HP 64700Bs when no other cross measurements are needed The output of the BNC connector is short circuit protected and is protected from TTL level signals when the emulator is powered down 304 Chapter 9 Making Coordinated Measurements Starting Stopping Multiple Emulators Starting Stopping Multiple Emulators When HP 64700 Card Cages are connected together via the Coordinated Measurement Bus CMB you can start and stop up to 32 emulators at the same time These are called synchronous measurements This section describes how to e Enable synchronous measurements e Start synchronous measurements e Disable synchronous measurements To enable synchronous measurements Enter the specify run command You can enable the emulator s interaction with the CMB by using the specify run comman
347. oaded correctly and the data communication switch settings on the emulator rear panel match the settings in the 436 Chapter 12 Error Messages Graphical Softkey Interface Messages Unnumbered ust hp64000 etc 64700tab net or 64700tab file You may have to cycle power and use emul700 u logical name gt to unlock the system Emul700dmn sem op failed perhaps kernel limits too low Cause The host system could not start the emulation session there may be too many processes running on the host system Action Make sure the host system is operating properly and is not overloaded with currently executing processes Stop or remove some processes on the system Also verify that the semaphore capabilities have been installed in the UNIX kernel Then try starting the emulation session again Emul700dmn version incompatible with this product Cause The emulation session could not begin because the version of the HP 64700 emulator daemon executable on host system is not compatible with the version of the Softkey Interface you are using Action Make sure the software has been properly installed Then try starting the emulator again lt LOGICAL NAME gt End continuing Cause This is a status message The emulation session is being exited with the end command When you restart the emulation session later it will continue using the same settings as in the session you just ended The emulator logical name is located in the usr hp6
348. ock input perhaps your target system is faulty It s also possible that you have configured the emulator to restrict to real time runs which will prohibit temporary breaks to the monitor 610 Unable to run Cause System failure or target condition Action Run performance verification Terminal Interface py command and check target system 611 Break caused by CMB not ready Cause This status message is printed during coordinated measurements if the CMB READY line goes false The emulator breaks to the monitor When CMB 465 Chapter 12 Error Messages Terminal Interface Messages 612 613 614 615 616 617 READY is false it indicates that one or more of the instruments participating in the measurement is running in the monitor Action None information only Write to ROM break Cause This status message will be printed if you have enabled breaks on writes to ROM and the emulation processor attempted a write to a memory location mapped as ROM Action None except troubleshooting your program Analyzer Break Cause Status message Guarded memory access break Cause This message is displayed if the emulation processor attempts to read or write memory mapped as guarded Action Troubleshoot your program or you may have mapped memory incorrectly Software breakpoint s Cause This status message will be displayed if a software breakpoint is encountered during a program run The emulator is
349. ock the emulators whose logical names are specified session in progress This command will fail if there currently is a To unlock the emulator whose logical name is em68340 emul700 U em68340 lt RI ETURN gt 68 Chapter 3 Starting and Exiting HP 64700 Interfaces Opening Other HP 64700 Interface Windows Opening Other HP 64700 Interface Windows The File gt Emul700 menu lets you open additional emulator analyzer interface windows or other HP 64700 interface windows if those products have been installed for example the software performance analyzer SPA interface and the high level debugger interface This section shows you how to e Open additional emulator analyzer interface windows e Open the high level debugger interface window e Open the software performance analyzer SPA interface window To open additional emulator analyzer windows To open additional Graphical User Interface windows choose File gt Emul700 Emulator Analyzer under Graphic Windows or enter the emul700 lt emul_name gt command in another terminal emulation window To open additional conventional Softkey Interface windows choose File gt Emul700 Emulator Analyzer under Terminal Windows or enter the emul700 u skemul lt emul_name gt command in another terminal emulation window You can open additional Graphical User Interface windows or terminal emulation windows containing the Softkey Interface When you open an
350. odify register CF_SIM CF_CSOADDR to 80001h lt RETURN gt modify register CF_SIM CF_CSOMASK to O0fffdh lt RETURN gt To load the supervisor stack pointer and program counter values that will be fetched from the boot ROM after reset modify memory 80000h long to 0 81000h lt RETURN gt To load the boot ROM program into emulation memory NOP NOP BRA B 81000H modify memory 81000h words to 4e71h 4e71h 60fah lt RETURN gt To trace execution after reset trace lt RETURN gt 144 Chapter 5 Configuring the Emulator Mapping Memory To run from reset run from reset lt RETURN gt To display the trace display trace lt RETURN gt Label Address Opcode or Status time count poppa ORI B aa 08 aaaeEeee pagA supr prgm word rd ds16 aageeee4 ORI B 1000 AG aaeeeee6 1888 supr prgm word rd ds16 6981688 NOP aaasiaa2e NOP 48081484 BRA 4088 1808 46881486 NOP aaa8iaea NOP aaasieae2 NOP 46681864 BRA 6088 1888 46431486 NOP aaa8iaaa NOP aag8iae2 NOP 46881404 BRA 9088 1008 46881686 NOP Notice the supervisor stack pointer and program counter values that were loaded at 80000H and 80004H are fetched from memory locations 0 through 7 and the program begins running at 81000H Suppose your boot ROM is at a higher address To map the boot ROM address range in emulation memory access the configuration questions and answer the questions as shown below Mod
351. oint remains in the breakpoint list and can be re activated later Deactivating a breakpoint is different than clearing a breakpoint because a cleared breakpoint is removed from the breakpoints list 186 Chapter 6 Using the Emulator Using Software Breakpoints To re activate a breakpoint When displaying breakpoints position the mouse pointer over the line displaying the inactivated breakpoint and click the select mouse button Or press and hold the select mouse button and choose Set Inactivate Breakpoint from the popup menu The inactivated breakpoint either becomes temporary or pending if it was set as a temporary breakpoint or permanent if it was set as a permanent breakpoint 187 Chapter 6 Using the Emulator Using Software Breakpoints Examples To re activate breakpoints using the breakpoints display popup menu File Display Modify Execution Breakpolnts Trace Settings lt Your Key gt SECIE Make EENI Sre Se xfer to a Break ae Step Asm Change status with a mouse click on this Software breakpoints enabled address label line menu and aaaaerFca main module main c i inactivated highlight do not G GGGFCA sp main module main c i permanent gaaaar 02 main module main c i permanent appear C main module main c A inactivated Choose Action for Highlighted Line Set Inactivate Breakpoint Choose this menu Clear delete Breakpoint item to change
352. ommand files Examples To start the emulator analyzer interface and run the startup command file emul700 c startup em68340 lt RETURN gt To display the status of emulators e Use the emul700 1 or emul700 lv command The l option of the emul700 command lists the status of all emulators defined in the 64700tab and 64700tab net files If a logical emulator name is included in the command just the status of that emulator is listed You can also use the v option with the l option for a verbose listing of the status information Examples To list verbosely the status of the emulator whose logical name is em68340 emul700 lv em68340 lt RETURN gt The information may be similar to em68340 m68340 running user guest description M68340 emulation w internal analysis 260Kb emul mem user interfaces xdebug xemul xperf skemul sktiming device channel dev emcom23 67 Chapter 3 Starting and Exiting HP 64700 Interfaces Starting the Emulator Analyzer Interface Or the information may be similar em68340 m68340 running user guest myhost M68340 emulation w internal analysis 260Kb emul mem description user interfaces internet address 21 17 9 143 Examples to xdebug xemul xperf skemul sktiming To unlock an interface that was left locked by another user Use the emul700 U lt emul_name gt command The U option to the emul700 command may be used to unl
353. ommands Using simulated I O Using Basis Branch Analysis 154 Chapter 6 Using the Emulator Using the Emulator Configuration Registers Using the Emulator Configuration Registers The 68340 processor contains a System Integration Module SIM which has the external bus interface four chip selects input output ports and other circuitry to reduce external logic in a typical microprocessor system The SIM can be programmed or configured in a variety of ways to suit the need of various systems The HP 64751A emulator contains circuitry that accommodates the flexibility of the 68340 SIM and maintains consistent emulation features 64731A EMULATOR 4 68340 PROCESSOR R 5 E RUN 4 T CONTROL gt A S 8 Y C S ANALYSIS T LATCH C H O N T R O 155 Chapter 6 Using the Emulator Using the Emulator Configuration Registers In the previous figure there is a block labeled DE SIM module It receives as inputs from the 68340 e Port A which can be address lines 31 24 interrupt acknowledge inputs or general purpose I O lines e Port B which can be interrupt requests chip selects or general purpose I O lines The DE SIM module provides as outputs e Address lines A31 A24 to the memory mapper and the analyzer e A qualified chip select 0 CSO to the memory mapper The 68340 S
354. on Save the configuration changes 129 Chapter 5 Configuring the Emulator Selecting the Emulation Monitor Examples 15 Modify the TRACE exception vector to point to the TRACE_ENTRY symbol in the monitor program so that you can step through the user program Using a custom foreground monitor program is the same as selecting the default foreground monitor except that the customized monitor program must be assembled linked and loaded into emulation memory Also the Interrupt priority level for default foreground monitor question is not asked because you can specify the interrupt priority level in the program A custom foreground monitor must be assembled and linked starting at the 4 Kbyte boundary specified as the monitor s base address An ORG statement in the foreground monitor source file defines the base address Refer to the foreground monitor source provided with the emulator for more information The custom foreground monitor is saved in the emulator until the monitor type is changed and reloaded every time the emulator breaks into the monitor state from the reset state The following examples of how to set up and use a foreground monitor program assume the HP 64870 or HP B 1464 68000 08 10 20 302 Assembler Linker Librarian is installed on the host computer To copy the foreground monitor program source file ep usr hp64000 monitor fm64751 s lt RETURN gt To edit the monitor program source
355. ons in your code before assembly and link and use the modify software_breakpoints set command to reinsert them after the program is loaded into memory 621 Unexpected step break Cause System failure Action Run performance verification Terminal Interface py command 622 Ps Cause Monitor specific message 623 CMB execute break Cause This message occurs when coordinated measurements are enabled and an EXECUTE pulse causes the emulator to run the emulator must break before running Action This is a status message no action is required 467 Chapter 12 Error Messages Terminal Interface Messages 624 626 628 628 630 631 632 Configuration aborted Cause Occurs when a lt CTRL gt c is entered while emulator configuration items are being set Configuration failed setting unknown s s Cause Target condition or system failure Action Check target system and run performance verification Terminal Interface pv command Guarded memory break s Cause A memory access to a location mapped as guarded memory has occurred during execution of the user program Action Investigate the cause of the guarded memory access by the user program Write to ROM break s Cause When the emulator is configured to break on writes to ROM a memory write access to a location mapped as ROM has occurred during execution of the user program Action Investigate the cause of the write to ROM by the user p
356. opic list popup tutorialTopic About tutorials Specifies the default topic in the tutorial popup selection buffer The mechanism for providing demos and tutorials in the graphical interface is identical The following steps show you how to set up demos or tutorials in the Graphical User Interface Create the demo or tutorial topic files and the associated command files Topic files are simply ASCII text files You can use I to produce inverse video in the text U to produce underlining in the text and N to restore normal text Command files are executed when the Press to perform demo or tutorial button in the topic popup dialog is pushed A command file must have the same name as the topic file with cmd appended Also a command file must be in the same directory as the associated topic file 326 Chapter 10 Setting X Resources To set up demos or tutorials 2 Create the demo or tutorial index file Each line in the index file contains first a quoted string that is the name of the topic which appears in the index popup and second the name of the file that is raised when the topic is selected For example About demos users guest gui_demos general Loading programs users guest gui_demos loadprog Running programs users guest gui_demos runprog You can use absolute paths for example users guest topic1 paths relative to the directory in which the interface was started for example mydir
357. or a particular enable term You specify windowing by selecting an enable qualifier term the analyzer will trigger or store all states after this term is satisfied If the disable term occurs after the analyzer is enabled the analyzer will then stop storing states and will not recognize trigger or sequence terms You may specify only one enable term and one disable term The analyzer defaults to recognizing all states If you specify enable you must supply a qualifier term If you then specify disable you must specify a qualifier term The parameters are as follows Allows you to specify the term which will stop the analyzer from recognizing states once the enable term has been found Allows you to specify the term which will enable the analyzer to begin monitoring states Specifies the actual address data status value or range of values that cause the analyzer to enable or disable recognition of states Note that the enable qualifier can be different from the disable qualifier Refer to the QUALIFIER syntax pages for further details on analyzer qualifier specification trace enable _rand disable Oecch lt RETURN gt 428 Chapter 11 Emulator Analyzer Interface Commands WINDOW See Also The trace command and the SEQUENCING and QUALIFIER syntax descriptions 429 430 12 Error Messages 431 Error Messages This chapter contains a list of error messages that may occur while operating the emula
358. orary Message N A Display Error Log display error_log Display Event Log display event_log Command Line On Off toggles command line Command Line Popup Command Line Position Cursor Replace Mode lt INSERT CHAR gt key when in insert mode Position Cursor Insert Mode lt INSERT CHAR gt key Execute Command lt RETURN3 gt key Clear to End of Line lt CTRL gt e Clear Entire Line lt CTRL gt u Command Line Off toggles command line 337 Chapter 11 Emulator Analyzer Interface Commands Syntax Conventions Conventions used in the command syntax diagrams are defined below Oval shaped Symbols Oval shaped symbols show options available on the softkeys and other commands that are available but do not appear on softkeys such as log_commands and wait These appear in the syntax diagrams as global_symbols Rectangular shaped Symbols Rectangular shaped symbols contain prompts or references to other syntax diagrams Prompts are enclosed with angle brackets lt and gt References to other diagrams are shown in all capital letters Also references to expressions are shown in all capital letters for example EXPR and SYMB see those syntax diagrams These appear in the following syntax diagrams as lt REGISTERS gt EXPR Circles Circles indicate operators and delimiters used in expressions and on the command line as you enter commands These appear in the synta
359. ory pare one E Symbol File users qguestidemo debug_envihp64751 ecs x Executable from Symbol Scope update_sys which symbols were last loaded Symbol context To change the directory context e Choose File gt Context Directory and use the dialog box to select a new directory e Using the command line enter the cd lt directory gt command The Directory Selection dialog box contains a list of directories accessed during the emulation session as well as any predefined directories present at interface startup 172 Chapter 6 Using the Emulator Using Context Commands You can predefine directories and set the maximum number of entries for the Directory Selection dialog box by setting X resources see the Setting X Resources chapter To change the current working symbol context Choose File gt Context Symbols and use the dialog box to select the new working symbol context Using the command line enter the cws lt symbol_context gt command Because cws is a hidden command and doesn t appear on a softkey label you have to type it in You can predefine symbol contexts and set the maximum number of entries for the Symbol Scope Selection dialog box by setting X resources see the Setting X Resources chapter Displaying local symbols or displaying memory in mnemonic format causes the working symbol context to change as well The new context will be that of the local symbols or memory locations display
360. p You can use function codes to cause these terms to be mapped to different blocks of memory Suppose also that the only things that exist in your target system at this time are the input and output ports and some control logic no memory is available You can reflect this by mapping the I O ports to target system memory space and the rest of memory to emulation memory space with the following mapper commands Oh thru Offfh target ram lt RETURN gt 1000h thru 1fffh supervisor program emulation rom lt RETURN gt 3000h thru 3fffh user program emulation ram lt RETURN gt 3000h thru 3fffh user data emulation ram lt RETURN gt After the configuration is saved display memory at 1000H by entering the following command using the command line display memory 1000h blocked bytes lt RETURN gt Notice that an ambiguous address error occurs because the sp function code was not included with the address The following command should have been entered instead display memory fcode sp 1000h blocked bytes lt RETURN gt 142 j Chapter 5 Configuring the Emulator Mapping Memory To emulate global chip select operation Use the cs0 attribute when mapping the boot ROM address range Make sure the CF_MBAR register is valid and modify the CF_CSOADDR and CF_CSOMASK registers to appropriate values Or Load a previously saved configuration that has appropriate values of CF_MBAR CF_CSOADDR and CF_CSOMASK
361. part of the duration report above shows that the average amount of time spent outside the interrupt_sim function is about 99 59 milliseconds 292 Chapter 8 Making Software Performance Measurements Running Measurements and Creating Reports Running Measurements and Creating Reports Several performance measurement tasks are the same whether you are making activity or duration measurements This section describes how to e Run performance measurements e End performance measurements e Create a performance measurement report To run performance measurements Use the performance_measurement_run command The performance_measurement_run command processes analyzer trace data When you end the performance measurement this processed data is dumped to the binary perf out file in the current directory The perf32 report generator utility is used to read the binary information in the perf out file If the performance_measurement_run command is entered without a count the current trace data is processed If a count is specified the current trace command is executed consecutively the number of times specified The data that results from each trace command is processed and combined with the existing processed data The STATUS line will say Processing trace lt NO gt during the run so you will know how your measurement is progressing The only way to stop this series of traces is by using lt CTRL gt c sig INT The mor
362. pdate If there is a power glitch during a firmware update some bits may be lost during the download process possibly resulting in an HP 64700 that will not boot up Repeat the firmware update process If the HP 64700 is connected to the LAN in this situation and you are unable to connect to the HP 64700 after the power glitch try repeating the firmware update with the HP 64700 connected to an RS 232 or RS 422 interface 561 562 Glossary access mode Specifies the types of cycles used to access target system memory locations For example a byte access mode tells the monitor program to use load store byte instructions to access target memory analyzer An instrument that captures data on signals of interest at discreet periods background The emulator mode in which foreground operation is suspended so the emulation processor can be used for communication with the emulation controller The background monitor does not occupy any processor address space background emulation monitor An emulation monitor that does not execute as part of the user program and therefore operates in the emulator s background mode display mode When displaying memory this mode tells the emulator the size of the memory locations to display When modifying memory the display mode tells the emulator the size of the values to be written to memory embedded microprocessor system The microprocessor system which the emulator plugs into e
363. pedance tCLDH 60 60 ns 31 DSACKx Asserted to Data In Valid tDADI 32 32 ns 32 HALT and RESET Input Transition Time tRHrf 0 140 0 140 ns 33 CLKOUT Low to BG Asserted tcea 20 20 ns 34 CLKOUT Low to BG Negated tCLBN 20 20 ns 35 BR Asserted to BG Asserted RMC Not tBRAGA 1 1 clks Asserted 37 BGACK Asserted to BG Negated tGAGN 1 2 5 1 2 5 clks 39 BG Width Negated tGH 2 2 clks 39A BG Width Asserted tGA 1 1 clks 46 R W Width Asserted Write or Read tRWA 100 100 ns 46A R W Width Asserted Sync Write or Read tRWAS 60 60 ns 47A Asynchronous Input Setup Time tAIST 5 5 ns 47B Asynchronous Input Hold Time tAIHT 10 10 ns 488 DSACKx Asserted to BERR HALT Asserted tDABA 20 20 ns 53 Data Out Hold from CLKOUT High tDOCH 0 0 ns 54 CLKOUT High to Data Out High Impedance tCHDH 20 20 ns 55 R W Asserted to Data Bus Impedance Change tRADC 25 25 ns 483 Chapter 13 Specifications and Characteristics Emulator Specifications and Characteristics AC Electrical Specifications 64751 66508 and higher active probe board numbers Read and Write Cycles Vcc 5 0 Vdc 5 GND 0 Vdc Ta TL to Tp MC68340 25 16 MHz HP 64751 Num Characteristic Symbol Min Max Min Max Unit 56 RESET Pulse Width Reset Instruction
364. play You can use the lt Up arrow gt lt Down arrow gt lt PREV gt and lt NEXT gt keys to view the displayed information For software_breakpoints data memory and trace displays you can use the lt CTRL gt g and lt CTRL gt f keys to scroll left and right if the information goes past the edge of the screen Depending on the information you select defaults may be the options selected for the previous execution of the display command The parameters are as follows A leading comma allows you to append additional expressions to the previous display data command Commas between expression data type specifications allow you to specify multiple variables and types for display with the current command Specifies a particular class of the emulator registers Refer to the Accessing Registers section in the Using the Emulator chapter for a list of the register names and classes You can display the values of simple data types in your program This command can save you time otherwise you would need to search through memory displays for the location and value of a particular variable The address identifier and data value of each symbol may be displayed You must issue the command set symbols on to see the symbol names displayed In the first display data command after you begin an emulation session you must supply at least one expression specifying the data item s to display Thereafter the display data command defaults to th
365. point 179 uploading memory 5 user target memory loading absolute files 160 user program 564 values 231 predefined for analyzer state qualifiers 235 version firmware 560 wait command 426 427 command files using in 98 warnings power must be OFF during installation 515 weight of the emulator 491 widget resource See X resource width of columns trace display option 260 WINDOW in trace command 428 429 windows exiting emulator analyzer 71 590 Index opening additional emulator analyzer 69 running the emulator analyzer interface in multiple 65 terminal emulation opening 216 workstation HP 9000 memory needs 508 HP 9000 minimum performance 508 SPARCsystem memory needs 509 SPARCsystem minimum performance 509 write to ROM break 150 X client 314 X resource 314 XAPPLRESDIR directory 500 XEN VIRONMENT variable 501 Xdefaults file 500 ust hp64000 lib X 1 1 HP64_schemes 503 app defaults file 500 class name for applications 498 class name for widgets 498 command line options 501 commonly modified graphical interface resources 316 defined 497 general form 497 instance name for applications 498 instance name for widgets 497 loading order 500 modifying resources generally 316 319 RESOURCE_MANAGER property 500 scheme file system directory 503 scheme files Graphical User Interface 501 scheme files named 502 schemes forcing interface to use certain 501 Softkey BW 502 Softke
366. point in a memory location which was not mapped or was mapped as guarded memory Action Insert breakpoints only within memory ranges mapped to emulation or target RAM or ROM 669 Breakpoint remove aborted Cause Occurs when lt CTRL gt c is entered when clearing a software breakpoint 670 Breakpoint enable aborted Cause Occurs when lt CTRL gt c is entered when setting software breakpoints 671 Breakpoint disable aborted Cause Occurs when lt CTRL gt c is entered when disabling software breakpoints 680 Stepping failed Cause Stepping has failed for some reason Action Usually this error message will occur with other error messages Refer to the descriptions of the accompanying error messages to find out more about why stepping failed 684 Failed to disable step mode Cause System failure Action Run performance verification Terminal Interface py command 471 Chapter 12 Error Messages Terminal Interface Messages 686 688 689 692 693 694 700 Stepping aborted number steps completed d Cause This message is displayed if a break was received during a step command with a step count greater than zero The break could have been due to any of the break conditions or a lt CTRL gt c break The number of steps completed is displayed Step display failed Cause System failure or target condition Action Check memory mapping and configuration questions Break due to cause other than step
367. procedure again Monitor failure bus grant Cause The monitor is unable to run The emulation processor is not running because it has granted the bus to another device Action Wait until the processor has regained bus control then retry the operation 455 Chapter 12 Error Messages Terminal Interface Messages 105 106 107 141 142 Monitor failure halted Cause The monitor is unable to run because the processor is halted due to an external halt line or a halt instruction Action Release the external halt and retry the operation If the processor halted due to a halt instruction try the reset command then retry the operation Monitor failure wait state Cause The monitor is unable to run because the processor is in a continuous wait state Action A continuous wait state may indicate target system problems Troubleshoot the wait line If you were running out of circuit try initializing the emulator then retry the procedure Monitor failure bus error Cause The monitor is unable to run because the processor has encountered a bus fault such as the 68340 BERR line Action Release the BERR line and determine why it was activated 68340 Emulator Messages The following error messages are unique to the 68340 emulator Dual ported memory limited to 4K bytes Cause You attempted to map an address range larger than 4 Kbytes to dual port emulation memory Only 4 Kbytes of dual port emulation m
368. pushbuttons you can use Application XmPushButton background red Note that resource names with wildcards are more general than those without wildcards 498 Chapter 14 Concepts X Resources and the Graphical User Interface Specific Names Override General Names A more specific resource specification will override a more general one when both apply to a particular widget or application The names for the application and the main window widget in HP64_Softkey applications have been chosen so that you may specify custom resource values that apply in particular situations 1 Apply to ALL HP64_Softkey applications HP64_Softkey lt resource gt lt value gt 2 Apply to specific types of HP64_Softkey applications emul lt resource gt lt value gt for the emulator perf lt resource gt lt value gt for the performance analyzer 3 Apply to all HP64_Softkey applications but only when they are connected to a particular type of microprocessor m68340 lt resource gt lt value gt for the 68340 m68020 lt resource gt lt value gt for the 68020 4 Apply to a specific HP64_Softkey application connected to a specific processor perf m68340 lt resource gt lt value gt for the 68340 perf analyzer emul m68020 lt resource gt lt value gt for the 68020 emulator If all four examples above are used for a particular resource 3 will override 2 for all applications connected to a 68340 emulator and 4 w
369. r determines that the emulation firmware ROM is invalid Action This message is not likely to occur unless you have upgraded the ROMs in your emulator Be sure that the correct ROM is installed in the emulation controller Invalid analysis subsystem product address s Cause This error occurs when the HP 64700 system controller determines that the analysis firmware ROM is invalid Action This message is not likely to occur unless you have upgraded the ROMs in your emulator Be sure that the correct ROMs are installed in the analyzer board Invalid ET subsystem product address s Cause Detects an invalid ET Used only internally Invalid auxiliary subsystem product address s Cause For future products Lab firmware for emulation subsystem Cause This message should never occur It shows that you have an unreleased version of emulation firmware Lab firmware analysis subsystem product address s Cause This message should never occur It shows that you have an unreleased version of analysis firmware Lab firmware subsystem product address s Cause This message should never occur It shows that you have an unreleased version of system controller firmware 474 Chapter 12 Error Messages Terminal Interface Messages 914 Lab firmware auxiliary subsystem product address s Cause This message should never occur It shows that you have an unreleased firmware version of the auxiliary subsystem Analyz
370. r is a symbolic reference to an address address range file or other value Symbols may be e Combinations of paths filenames and identifiers defining a scope or referencing a particular identifier or location including procedure entry and exit points e Combinations of paths filenames and line numbers referencing a particular source line e Combinations of paths filenames and segment identifiers identifying a particular PROG DATA or COMN segment or a user defined segment The Symbolic Retrieval Utilities SRU handle symbol scoping and referencing These utilities build trees to identify unique symbol scopes If you use the SRU utilities to build a symbol database before entering the emulation environment the measurements involving a particular symbol request will occur immediately If you then change a module and reenter the emulation environment without rebuilding the symbol database the emulation software rebuilds the changed portions of the database in increments as necessary Further information regarding the SRU and symbol handling is available in the Symbolic Retrieval Utilities User s Guide Also refer to that manual for information on the HP64KS YMBPATH environment variable The last symbol specified in a display local_symbols_in SYMB command or with the cws command is the default symbol scope The default is none if no current working symbol was set in the current emulation session You also can specify
371. r more detailed information on modifying resources 324 Chapter 10 Setting X Resources To set up demos or tutorials To set up demos or tutorials You can add demos or tutorials to the Graphical User Interface by modifying the resources described in the following tables Demo Related Component Resources Resource Value Description enableDemo False Specifies whether Help gt Demo True appears in the pulldown menu demoPopupSub indexFile Xdemo Index topics Specifies the file containing the list of topic and file pairs demoPopup textColumns 30 Specifies the width in characters of the of the demo topic list popup demoPopup listVisibleItemCount 10 Specifies the length in lines of the demo topic list popup demoTopic About demos Specifies the default topic in the demo popup selection buffer 325 Chapter 10 Setting X Resources To set up demos or tutorials Tutorial Related Component Resources Resource Value Description enableTutorial False Specifies whether True Help Tutorial appears in the pulldown menu tutorialPopupSub indexFile Xtutorial Index topics Specifies the file containing the list of topic and file pairs tutorialPopup textColumns 30 Specifies the width in characters of the of the tutorial topic list popup tutorialPopup listVisibleItemCount 10 Specifies the length in lines of the tutorial t
372. race command as previously used This represents the source file that contains the local symbols to be listed This also can be a program symbol name in which case all symbols that are local to a function or procedure are used See the SYMB syntax diagram performance_measurement_initialize lt RETURN gt performance_measurement_initialize duration lt RETURN gt performance_measurement_initialize local_symbols_in mod_name lt RETURN gt The performance_measurement_run and performance_measurement_end commands Refer to the Making Software Performance Measurements chapter for examples of performance measurement specification and use 386 lt COUNT gt Examples See Also Chapter 11 Emulator Analyzer Interface Commands performance_measurement_run performance_measurement_run 1 performance_measurement_run E lt COUNT gt J This command begins a performance measurement lt RETURN gt This command causes the emulation system to reduce trace data contained in the emulation analyzer which will then be used for analysis by the performance measurement software The default is to process data presently contained in the analyzer The parameters are as follows This represents the number of consecutive traces you specify The emulation system will execute the trace command process the resulting data and combine it with existing data This sequence will be
373. race commands e Save traces e Restore traces To save trace commands Choose File gt Store Trace Spec Using the command line enter the store trace_spec command You can save a trace command to a trace specification file and reload it at a later time The trace command is saved in a file named tspecfile TS in the current directory The extension TS is appended to trace specification files if no extension is specified in the store trace_spec command To store the current trace command store trace_spec tspecfile lt RETURN gt 264 Chapter 7 Using the Emulation Analyzer Saving and Restoring Traces To restore trace commands e Choose File Load Trace Spec e Using the command line enter the load trace_spec command Trace commands that are restored will always work even if symbols have been changed however once you modify the trace command it may no longer work Examples To bring back the trace command saved in tspecfile TS and perform a trace measurement using it load trace_spec tspecfile lt RETURN gt trace again lt RETURN gt To save traces e Choose File gt Store Trace Data e Using the command line enter the store trace command You can save a trace to a trace file and reload it at a later time The trace is saved in a file named trcfile TR in the current directory The extension TR is appended to trace files if it is not specified in the store tr
374. rchy This option allows you to display the contents of memory This option allows you to offset the listed software breakpoint address value from the actual address of the breakpoint By subtracting the offset value from the breakpoint address the system can cause the listed address to match that given in the assembler or compiler listing or symbols after code has been relocated This option lets you display the output of previously executed emulator pod commands This command displays the current contents of the emulation processor registers If a step command just executed the mnemonic representation of the last instruction is also displayed if the current display is the register display The display register command is not allowed when the emulator is configured for real time runs and is running the user program Symbols also may be displayed in the register step mnemonic string see set symbols With no options specified the basic register class is displayed as the default Specifies the name of an individual register Refer to the Accessing Registers section in the Using the Emulator chapter for a list of the register names and classes This optional part of the display status command causes the emulator status screen to be updated continuously This lets you display data written to the simulated I O display buffer after you have enabled polling for simulated I O in the emulation configuration For details about setting up
375. rd ds16 666 G leFs4 8081 supr data long wr ds16 258 Chapter 7 Using the Emulation Analyzer Modifying the Trace Display To display the trace with symbol information The set symbols on off command allows you to specify that address information be displayed in terms of program symbols Examples To display the trace with symbol information set source off symbols on lt RETURN gt display trace lt RETURN gt Opcode or Status time count mnemonic w symbols relative ini init_val_arr LINK W AB 0000 720 init_vat GaaGaeG2 6008 supr prgm word ds1B 680 sysstac 00007F84 8081 supr data long ds16 720 sysstact G4G7F86 2FaC supr data word ds 16 720 init_vat G Ga0084 MOVEA L 00007 156 AB 720 init_va G G80806 papa supr prgm word ds16 720 init_va G4a0888 7156 supr prgm word ds16 720 init_vat G8GaGA MOVEQ ts agaaeaad 01 720 init_va aaaaac NOP 720 init_va HE MOVE L 01 048 720 init_va 8000018 ADD 08 08 720 A t M innonDo0o0on0De ec L init_va iz L 01 08 68a init_vat 8G0006 14 L 2 08 720 init_va G000016 D L OVE W 0041 00 AB DA L 720 init_va G880818 8841 supr prgm word 720 init_va 40081A 8688 supr prgm word 728 259 Chapter 7 Using the Emulation Analyzer Modifying the Trace Display To change column widths in the trace display e Use the set width command The set width command allows you to change the width of
376. reen is shown below Emulation memory blocks available ER size bytes entry range F H BFFFH EMUL ROM 7 H 16FFFH EMUL RAM To synchronize emulation memory accesses in the range 0 through 6FFFH you would enter the following command in place of the command above 0O thru 6fffh emulation rom dsi lt RETURN gt To specify that the range 0 through 6FFFH is in supervisor program space you would enter 0 thru 6fffh supervisor program emulation rom lt RETURN gt To exit out of the memory mapper enter end lt RETURN gt 138 Chapter 5 Configuring the Emulator Mapping Memory To characterize unmapped ranges 1 Access the configuration questions 2 Answer yes to the Modify memory configuration question 3 Use the default softkey to characterize unmapped ranges The default softkey in the memory mapper allows you to characterize unmapped memory ranges Unmapped memory ranges are treated as target system RAM by default Unmapped memory ranges cannot be characterized as emulation memory Examples To characterize unmapped ranges as target RAM default target ram lt RETURN gt To characterize unmapped ranges as guarded memory default guarded lt RETURN gt To exit out of the memory mapper enter end lt RETURN gt 139 Chapter 5 Configuring the Emulator Mapping Memory j Examples To delete memory map ranges Access the configuration questions
377. rehabl d address label Bring up the menu ageeerFca main module main c i 96 inactivated ANE GGGGFCA bsp mainfmodule main c line 98 permanent cir ns this item gaaear D2 main module main c line 182 permanent to clear the highlighted Choose Action for Highlighted Line Set Inactivate Breakpoint breakpoint Clear delete Breakpoint Choose Action for All Breakpoints Enable Disable Software Breakpoints Set All Breakpoints Clear delete All Breakpoints STATUS M68340 Stepping complete Emulation trace complete 190 Chapter 6 Using the Emulator Using Software Breakpoints To clear all breakpoints e When displaying breakpoints position the mouse pointer within the Breakpoints Display screen press and hold the select mouse button and choose Clear delete All Breakpoints from the popup menu e Choose Breakpoints Clear All e Using the command line enter the modify software_breakpoints clear command 191 Chapter 6 Using the Emulator Displaying and Modifying Registers Displaying and Modifying Registers This section describes tasks related to displaying and modifying emulation processor registers You can display the contents of an individual register or of all the registers The register classes and names are listed in the following table Register Class Register Description BASIC PC Program Counter ST Status Register General USP User
378. res s if the next PC goes outside the currently displayed address range This feature works even if stepping is performed in a different emulation window than the one displaying memory mnemonic Pending software breakpoints are shown in the memory mnemonic display by an asterisk in the leftmost column of the assembly instruction or source line that has a pending breakpoint A label column symbols may be displayed for all memory displays except blocked mode Memory mnemonic may be displayed with source and assembly code intermixed or with source code only Symbols also can be displayed in the memory mnemonic string See the set command Initial values are the same as specified by the command display memory 0 blocked bytes offset_by 0 Defaults are values specified in a previous display memory command The symbols and source defaults are set source off symbols off The parameters are as follows Formats the memory listing in a single column Displays the memory at the address pointed to by the current program counter value Formats the memory listing in multiple columns Displays the absolute or blocked memory listing as byte values An expression is a combination of numeric values symbols operators and parentheses specifying a memory address or memory offset value See the EXPR syntax diagram 357 Chapter 11 Emulator Analyzer Interface Commands display memory FCODE long mnemonic offse
379. resses which precede these last addresses are assumed to be unused prefetches and are ignored during time measurements START assumed prefetch START assumed prefetch START assumed prefetch START last ENTRY address END assumed prefetch END assumed prefetch M Measure duration END assumed prefetch END last EXIT address START assumed prefetch START assumed prefetch Measure duration START assumed prefetch START last ENTRY address END assumed prefetch END assumed prefetch When measuring a recursive function module duration will be measured between the last recursive call and the true end of the recursive execution This will affect the accuracy of the measurement 284 Chapter 8 Making Software Performance Measurements Duration Performance Measurements If a module is entered at the normal point and then exited by a point other than the defined exit point the entry point will be ignored It will be judged the same as any other unused prefetch and no time duration measurement will be made Its time will be included in the measure of time spent outside the procedure or function If a module is exited from the normal point and then reentered from some other point the exit will also be assumed to be an unused prefetch of the exit state Note that if you are making duration measurements on a function that is recursive or one that has multiple entry and or exit poi
380. restart qualifier while searching for a sequence term the sequencer is reset and searching begins for the first sequence term Examples trace find_sequence Caller_3 then Write_Num restart anly anly c line 57 trigger after Results 0c4h lt RETURN gt See Also The trace command and the QUALIFIER and WINDOW syntax descriptions 398 Chapter 11 Emulator Analyzer Interface Commands set set lt ENV_VAR gt EH lt VALUE gt J lt RETURN gt default langinfo C_IEE695 source inverse _video off a lt TABS gt N memory_only_troce_on ee lt NUMSRC gt z symbols F width label H lt WIDTH gt X f J j N Cinnemonic Bi lt WIDTH gt i symbols J lt wiDTH gt Ve lt source lt WIDTH gt r Ro Controls the display format for the data memory register software breakpoint and trace displays With the set command you can adjust the display format results for 399 Chapter 11 Emulator Analyzer Interface Commands set default lt ENV_VAR gt inverse video off on langinfo various measurements making them easier to read and interpret Formatting of source lines symbol display selection and width and update after meas
381. revious mnemonic display and run until the source line that follows the function call 36 Chapter 1 Getting Started Step 6 Run until an address Step 6 Run until an address When displaying memory in mnemonic format a selection in the popup menu lets you run from the current program counter address until a specific source line e Position the mouse pointer over the line proc_spec_init press and hold the select mouse button and choose Run Until from the popup menu Hewlett Packard Emulator Analyzer em68340 m68340 File Display Modify Execution Breakpoints Trace Settings Help Action keys lt Demo gt Run Xfer til Disp Sre amp Asmi Patch Make amp Load Step Asm Step Source Disp Var l Disp REG Il Disp Src Prev Il Trace Run Again Memory sp mnemonic file main module main c 31 extern void update_system update system variables 92 extern void interrupt_sim simulate an interrupt 93 extern void do_sort sets up ascii array and calls 94 d 95 maint 36 97 init_system proc_spec_init E Choose Action for Highlighted Line g ar ria te apes Set Clear Software Breakpoint 182 update_system J Edit Source 183 num_checkst 184 interrupt_sim Run Until Y 105 if graph 106 graph_data Trace After 18 proc_specific Trace Before STATUS cws main main c Trace About Trace Until
382. rface This example shows a simple interactive session with the Terminal Interface display pod_command lt RETURN gt pod_command keyboard lt RETURN gt cf lt RETURN gt tsq lt RETURN gt teq lt RETURN gt Enter suspend to return to the Graphical User Interface or Softkey Interface The display pod_command command The 68340 Emulator User s Guide for the Terminal Interface and the Terminal Interface on line help information 390 Chapter 11 Emulator Analyzer Interface Commands QUALIFIER QUALIFIER y EXPR data gt not 4 a range D ExPR H thru y status lt STATUS gt EXPR gt address long_ aligned F The QUALIFIER parameter is used with trace only trace prestore TRIGGER and trace counting to specify states captured during the trace measurement You may specify a range of states or specific states to be captured You can continue to or states until the analyzer resources are depleted You can use only one range statement in the entire trace command Wow You can include don t care numbers These contain an x preceded and or followed by a number Some examples include 1fxxh 17x70 and 011xxx10b Don t care numbers may be entered in binary octal or hexadecimal base Expression types are address when none is chosen The default is to qualify on all
383. rm gt directory Label scheme files are not platform specific therefore they should be placed in the HOME HP64_schemes directory All other scheme files should be placed in the HOME HP64_schemes lt platform gt directory For example cp usr hp64000 lib X11 HP64_schemes HP UX Softkey Color HOME HP64_schemes HP UX Softkey MyColor Note that if your custom scheme file has the same name as the default scheme file the load order requires resources in the custom file to explicitly override resources in the default file Modify the HOME HP64_schemes lt platform gt Softkey lt scheme gt file For example you could modify the HOME HP64_schemes HP UX Softkey MyColor file to change the defined foreground and background colors Also since the scheme file name is different than the default you could comment out various resource settings to cause general foreground and background color definitions to apply to the Graphical User Interface At least one resource must be defined in your color scheme file for it to be recognized 320 Chapter 10 Setting X Resources To use customized scheme files 4 If your custom scheme file has a different name than the default you must modify the scheme resource definitions The Graphical User Interface application defaults file contains resources that specify which scheme files are used If your custom scheme files are named differently than the default scheme files you must modify th
384. rocessor s SIM registers and the emulator s CF_SIM registers See Also The modify register commands 419 Chapter 11 Emulator Analyzer Interface Commands trace trace trace CETT J SEQUENCING AA s again a repetitively lt RET RN gt modify_command TRIGGER 4 MC only P N counting QUALIFIER COUNT AA oe Me prestore QUALIFIER anything break _on_ trigger 4 repetitively This command allows you to trace program execution using the emulation analyzer The options shown can be executed once for each trace command Refer to the COUNT QUALIFIER SEQUENCING TRIGGER and WINDOW diagrams for details on setting up a trace You can perform analysis tasks either by starting a program run and then specifying the trace parameters or by specifying the trace parameters first and then initiating the program run Once a trace begins the analyzer monitors the system busses of the emulation processor to detect the states specified in the trace command The analyzer will trace any state counting time by default 420 Chapter 11 Emulator Analyzer Interface Commands trace When the trace specification is satisfied and trace memory is filled a message will appear on the status line indicating the trace is complete You can
385. rogram You can configure the emulator so that it does not break on writes to ROM Register access aborted Cause Occurs when a lt CTRL gt c is entered during register display Unable to read registers in class s Cause The emulator was unable to read the registers you requested Action To resolve this you must look at the other status messages displayed Most likely the emulator was unable to break to the monitor to perform the register read See message 608 Unable to modify register s s Cause The emulator was unable to modify the register you requested 468 634 636 637 640 650 Chapter 12 Error Messages Terminal Interface Messages Action To resolve this you must look at the other status messages displayed It s likely that emulator was unable to break to the monitor to perform the register modification See message 608 Display register failed s Cause The emulator was unable to display the register you requested Action To resolve this you must look at the other status messages displayed It s likely that emulator was unable to break to the monitor to perform the register display See message 608 Register not writable s Cause This error occurs when you attempt to modify a read only register Action If this error occurs you cannot modify the contents of the register with the modify register command Register class cannot be modified s Cause You tried to modify
386. rols all access to input devices typically a mouse and a keyboard and all output devices typically a display screen It is an interface between application programs you run on your system and the system input and output devices An X resource controls an element of appearance or behavior in an X application For example in the graphical interface one resource controls the text in action key pushbuttons as well as the action performed when the pushbutton is clicked By modifying resource settings you can change the appearance or behavior of certain elements in the graphical interface When the graphical interface starts up it reads resource specifications from a set of configuration files Resources specifications in later files override those in earlier files Files are read in the following order 1 The application defaults file For example usr lib X1 1 app defaults HP64_Softkey when the operating system is HP UX or usr openwin lib X 1 app defaults HP64_Softkey when the operating system is SunOS 2 The XAPPLRESDIR HP64_Softkey file The XAPPLRESDIR environment variable defines a directory containing system wide custom application defaults 3 The server s RESOURCE_MANAGER property The xrdb command loads user defined resource specifications into the RESOURCE_MANAGER property If no RESOURCE_MANAGER property exists user defined resource settings are read from the SHOME Xdefaults file 4 The file named by the XENV
387. rom BNC Enter the modify configuration command Answer yes to the Modify interactive measurement specification question Answer drive to the Should BNC drive or receive Trig1 question You could also break emulator execution on a trigger signal from the BNC over the trig2 internal line by specifying that the BNC should drive trig2 and that the emulator break should receive trig2 To arm the emulation analyzer on signal from CMB Enter the modify configuration command Answer yes to the Modify interactive measurement specification question Answer drive to the Should CMBT drive or receive Trig2 question Answer receive to the Should Analyzer drive or receive Trig2 question Use the arm_trig2 option to the trace command Chapter 9 Making Coordinated Measurements Using Trigger Signals To arm the emulation analyzer on signal from BNC 1 Enter the modify configuration command 2 Answer yes to the Modify interactive measurement specification question 3 Answer drive to the Should BNC drive or receive Trig2 question 4 Answer receive to the Should Analyzer drive or receive Trig2 question 5 Use the arm_trig2 option to the trace command 312 10 Setting X Resources 313 Setting X Resources The Graphical User Interface is an X Window System application which means it is a client in the X Window System client server model The X server is a program that cont
388. rse assembly to begin with the opcode stored in the low word of the long word at the specified trace memory line number This field is isn t applicable for the 68340 because its data bus is 16 bits wide Lists trace information with opcodes in mnemonic format This option allows you to offset the listed address value from the address of the instruction By subtracting the offset value from the physical address of the instruction the system makes the listed address match that given in the assembler or compiler listing 362 Chapter 11 Emulator Analyzer Interface Commands display trace This option is also useful for displaying symbols and source lines in dynamically relocated programs Note that when using the set source only command the analyzer may operate more slowly than when using the set source on command This is an operating characteristic of the analyzer When you use the command set source on and are executing only assembly language code not high level language code no source lines are displayed The trace list will then fill immediately with the captured assembly language instructions When using set source only no inverse assembled code is displayed Therefore the emulation software will try to fill the display with high level source code This requires the emulation software to search for any captured analysis data generated by a high level language statement In conclusion you should not set the trace list to
389. rted on emulation memory accesses as they would be on target system memory accesses Refer to the Mapping Memory section later in this chapter Select the emulator s clock source Generally you should use the target system clock when plugging the emulator into a target system Also the emulator needs to know the following things Is there circuitry in the target system that requires programs to run in real time Some emulator commands cause temporary breaks to the monitor state typically to access microprocessor register values single port emulation memory or target system memory If the target system requires that programs run in real time you must restrict the emulator to real time runs Should the emulator respond to target system interrupts when running in the monitor program If so you must use a foreground monitor program since target system interrupts are always ignored during background operation refer to the Selecting the Emulation Monitor section later in this chapter If it s not important that the emulator respond to target system interrupts when running in the monitor you can use the background monitor 109 Chapter 5 Configuring the Emulator Using the Configuration Interface Using the Configuration Interface This section shows you how to modify store and load configurations using the emulator configuration interface This section shows you how to Start the configuration interface Modify
390. run in the monitor and enter the command that caused the error again Stack pointer is odd Cause You have attempted to modify the stack pointer to an odd value for a processor that expects the stack to be aligned on a word boundary such as the 68340 Action Modify the stack pointer to an even value Stack is in guarded memory Cause Your stack pointer pointed to a location in memory mapped as guarded you then attempted to run or step the emulation processor The emulator was unable to access the stack to complete the transition from the monitor to the user program or vice versa Action Either remap memory so the stack pointer points to a location in RAM or change the stack pointer value either with your program or by configuring the emulator s stack pointer value on reset to point to a location in RAM Stack is in target ROM Cause Your stack pointer pointed to a location in memory mapped as target ROM you then attempted to run or step the emulation processor The emulator was unable to access the stack to complete the transition from the monitor to the user program or vice versa Action Either remap memory so the stack pointer points to a location in RAM or change the stack pointer value either with your program or by configuring the emulator s stack pointer value on reset to point to a location in RAM 454 83 84 102 103 104 Chapter 12 Error Messages Terminal Interface Messages Stack is i
391. s 0 wait state emulation memory through 22 MHz wait state above 22 MHz Equipment and tools needed In order to install and use the 68340 emulation system you need e Flat blade screwdriver Installation overview The steps in the installation process are 1 Connect the HP 64751 emulator probe to the HP 64748C emulator control card 2 Install cards into the HP 64700 card cage 3 Install emulation memory modules on the emulator probe 4 Connect the emulator probe to the demo target system 5 Apply power to the HP 64700 Your emulation and analysis system may already be assembled depending on how parts of the system were ordered 510 Chapter 15 Installation Installing Hardware Antistatic precautions Integrated circuit boards contain electrical components that are easily damaged by small amounts of static electricity To avoid damage to the emulator cards follow these guidelines e If possible work at a static free workstation e Handle the boards only by the edges do not touch components or traces e Use a grounding wrist strap that is connected to the HP 64700 s chassis Chapter 15 Installation Installing Hardware Step 1 Connect the Emulator Probe Cables probe Three ribbon cables connect the HP 64748C emulation control card to the HP 64751 68340 emulator The shortest cable connects from J1 of the emulation control card to J3 of the emulator probe The medium length cable con
392. s are as follows EXPR An expression is a combination of numeric values symbols operators and parentheses specifying a memory address See the EXPR syntax diagram 395 Chapter 11 Emulator Analyzer Interface Commands run FCODE from reset transfer_address until Examples See Also The function code used to define the address space being referenced See the syntax diagram for FCODE to see a list of the function codes available and for an explanation of those codes This specifies the address from which program execution is to begin This option resets the processor prior to running from the reset vector address This represents the starting address of the program loaded into emulation or target memory The transfer address is defined in the linker map and is part of the symbol database associated with the absolute file Causes a software breakpoint to be set at the specified address before the program is run run lt RETURN gt run from 810H lt RETURN gt run from COLD _START lt RETURN gt run from transfer_address until 910H lt RETURN gt The step command 396 Chapter 11 Emulator Analyzer Interface Commands SEQUENCING SEQUENCING From trace d a syniax diagram S 4 ag occurs j lt TIMES gt then restart QUALIFIER ee Lets you specify complex branching activity that must be satisfied to tr
393. s command ends the interface but leaves the emulator in a continue state The interface if restarted will reload the last configuration used If the interface instance is one of several into the same emulation session then the end command ends the interface instance where the end is issued Other interface instances into the same emulation session are not affected The parameters are as follows This option allows you to stop all active instances of an emulator analyzer interface session in one or more windows and or terminals When the emulation session ends control returns to the UNIX shell but the emulator is still locked to your user id and is not available to others This option stops all instances of the emulator analyzer interface in one or more windows or terminals The emulation system is released for other users If you do not release the emulation system others cannot access it 364 Chapter 11 Emulator Analyzer Interface Commands end Examples end lt RETURN gt end release_system lt RETURN gt See Also The Exiting the Emulator Analyzer Interface section in the Using the Emulator Analyzer Interface chapter 365 Chapter 11 Emulator Analyzer Interface Commands EXPR DON T CARE NUMBER NORMAL EXPR es lt DON T CARE NUMBER gt j lt NUMBER gt Co S end lt OP gt nd An expression is a combination of num
394. s larger than the other place the larger module in bank 0 to give yourself more evenly proportioned blocks The HP 64171A B memory modules provide 0 wait state emulation memory through 16 7 MHz and 1 wait state above 16 7 MHz The HP 64172A B memory modules provide 0 wait state emulation memory through 25 MHz The HP 64173A memory modules provide 0 wait state emulation memory through 22 MHz and 1 wait state above 22 MHz The 68340 processor is programmed for the correct number of wait states by user code If memory modules are mixed the performance characteristics of the slower module should be used 528 Chapter 15 Installation Installing Hardware 3 Install emulation memory modules on emulator probe There is a cutout on one side of the memory modules so that they can only be installed one way To install memory modules place the memory module into the socket groove at an angle Firmly press the memory module into the socket to make sure that itis completely seated Once the memory module is seated in the connector groove pull the memory module forward so that the notches on the socket fit into the holes on the memory module There are two latches on the sides of the socket that hold the memory module in place NOTE CUTOUT TILT BOARD BACK SLIGHTLY AND SEAT INTO GROOVE ALIGN PULL BOARD FORWARD SO NOTCHES ON SOCKET FIT INTO HOLES ON BOARD 529 Chapter 15 In
395. s to monitor memory while running user code since it is very CPU intensive To allow updates to the current memory display whenever memory is modified a file is loaded software breakpoint is set etc use the set update command Formats the memory list as 32 bit real numbers This option lets you specify a range of memory locations to be displayed Use the lt Up arrow gt lt Down arrow gt lt NEXT gt and lt PREV gt keys to view additional memory locations Displays the absolute or blocked memory listing as 16 bit word values A comma after memory in the command line appends the current display memory command to the preceding display memory command The data specified in both commands is displayed The data will be formatted as specified in the current 358 Chapter 11 Emulator Analyzer Interface Commands display memory command The comma is also a delimiter between values when specifying multiple addresses Examples You can display memory in real number and mnemonic formats display memory 2000h thru 202fh 2100h real long lt RETURN gt display memory 400h mnemonic lt RETURN gt set symbols on lt RETURN gt set source on lt RETURN gt display memory main mnemonic lt RETURN gt See Also The copy memory modify memory set and store memory commands 359 Chapter 11 Emulator Analyzer Interface Commands display trace display trace depth D lt DEPTH gt
396. s to be used Action Either assemble and link your foreground monitor at the address specified during configuration or change the answer to the Monitor address configuration question so that it agrees with the monitor program absolute file 145 Downloaded monitor spans multiple 4K byte block boundaries Cause You attempted to load a custom foreground monitor absolute file that does not fit into one 4 Kbyte address range Action Edit your foreground monitor program source file so that it fits into one 4 Kbyte address range 146 Monitor must be mapped on a 4K byte boundary Cause You attempted to define a foreground monitor base address that is not on a 4 Kbyte boundary Action Specify the monitor program base address that is on a 4 Kbyte boundary in other words ending in 000H 457 Chapter 12 Error Messages Terminal Interface Messages 147 148 149 150 cs0 can be used on one term only Cause You attempted to map a second address range for global chip select operation Only one address range can be mapped for this purpose Action You must remove the current mapper term that is assigned the cs0 attribute before you can map a different range for global chip select operation Bus activity required to access dual ported memory Cause In order for the system controller to be able to access dual port emulation memory the 68340 emulation processor s AS signal must not remain active for too long a time more
397. s to the monitor while running programs are allowed and the emulator accepts commands normally 121 Chapter 5 Configuring the Emulator Reconfiguring the Emulator Configuration Registers Reconfiguring the Emulator Configuration Registers In order to modify the general configuration items you must first start the configuration interface and access the Reconfigure Internal Registers configuration section refer to the previous Using the Configuration Interface section This section shows you how to e Define values for the emulator configuration registers To define values for the emulator configuration registers e Answer the Initial value of the configuration copy of lt CF_SIM_REGISTER gt questions These questions allow you to specify the initial values of the following CF_SIM registers CF_MBAR CF_SIM_MCR CF_PPARA1 CF_PPARA2 CF_CSOADDR CF_CSOMASK CF_CS1 ADDR CF_CSIMASK CF_CS2ADDR CF_CS2MASK CF_CS3ADDR CF_CS3MASK Refer to the Using the Emulator Configuration Registers section in the Using the Emulator chapter for information on how these registers are used 122 Chapter 5 Configuring the Emulator Selecting the Emulation Monitor Selecting the Emulation Monitor This section shows you how to e Select the background monitor implemented with the 68340 Background Debug Mode BDM e Select the foreground monitor program e Use a custom foreground monitor program When
398. sage measurements SPMT 284 monitor emulation address of 126 129 comparison of foreground background 124 foreground monitor filename 129 foreground or background 123 132 function of 123 selecting 123 132 selecting entry after configuration 120 Motif HP 9000 700 requirements 508 mouse buttons 29 choosing menu items 76 77 multi window copy and paste from entry buffer 84 copy and paste to entry buffer 81 multiple commands 95 multiple emulator start stop 5 Index Index name_of_module command 210 nesting command files 98 NORMAL key 338 366 nosymbols 163 notes perf out file is in binary format 294 breakpoint locations must contain opcodes 184 186 CMB EXECUTE and TRIGGER signals 300 measurement errors on recursive multiple entry routines 285 re assignment of emulation memory blocks by mapper 140 selecting internal clock forces reset 120 some compilers emit more than one symbol for an address 277 step command doesn t work when CMB enabled 305 trigger found but trace memory not filled 229 number bases 231 number of source lines trace display option 257 numerical values 231 occurrence counts 239 245 octal numbers 231 offset by trace display option 262 on line help 97 on_halt trace command option 243 only trace command storage qualifier 240 operating system HP 64700 Series minimum version 509 HP UX minimum version 508 SunOS minimum version 509 operators 23
399. same with the sync_sim_registers difference command Any differences between the two register sets will be listed It should be noted that the DE SIM module is programmed solely from the CF_SIM register set and is therefore static with respect to the application program No attempt is made to update the programming of the DE SIM by tracking instructions that will program the 68340 SIM This section shows you how to e View the SIM register differences e Synchronize to the 68340 SIM registers e Synchronize to the emulator configuration registers 157 Chapter 6 Using the Emulator Using the Emulator Configuration Registers Examples To view the SIM register differences Enter the sync_sim_registers difference command Before displaying the SIM configuration register differences make sure the contents of the MBAR register is valid in other words its least significant bit should be 1 To display the SIM register differences modify register SIM MBAR to 40001h lt RETURN gt Sync_sim_registers difference lt RETURN gt MBAR CSOMASK CSOADDR CS1MASK CS1ADDR CS2MASK CS2ADDR CS3MASK CS3ADDR 40001 ffffffff 18515e60 fffffffb 8830fcc8 fff7ffff e41lcff24 fffffffd 54005ca0 CF_MBAR CF_CSOMASK CF_CSOADDR CF_CS1MASK CF_CS1ADDR CF_CS2MASK CF_CS2ADDR CF_CS3MASK CF_CS3ADDR 100001 ffff000d 000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 To synchronize to the 68340
400. se firmware is to be updated If you enter the progflash command without options it becomes interactive If you don t include the lt emul_name gt option it displays the logical names in the ust hp64000 etc 64700tab net file and asks you to choose one If you don t include the lt products gt option it displays the products which have firmware update files on the system and asks you to choose one In the interactive mode only one product at a time can be updated You can abort the interactive progflash command by pressing lt CTRL gt c progflash will print Flash programming SUCCEEDED and return 0 if it is successful otherwise it will print Flash programming FAILED and return a nonzero error You can verify the update by displaying the firmware version information 557 Chapter 16 Installing Updating Emulator Firmware To update emulator firmware with progflash Examples To update the em68340 emulator firmware progflash lt RETURN gt HPB1471 19309 A 05 00 03Jan94 64700 SERIES EMULATION COMMON FILES A Hewlett Packard Software Product Copyright Hewlett Packard Co 1988 All Rights Reserved Reproduction adaptation or translation without prior written permission is prohibited except as allowed under copyright laws RESTRICTED RIGHTS LEGEND Use duplication or disclosure by the Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in subparagraph c 1 II of the Rights in Technical Data an
401. session already in progress user interface defaulted Cause When operating the emulator in multiple windows a new emulation session is joined to a current session In this case the new session used the user interface default selections Load aborted Cause While loading a file into the emulator an event occurred that caused the host system to stop the load process Action Use the display error_log command to view any errors If the problem persists make sure the host system and emulator are operating properly and that you are trying to load an acceptable file See the Emulator Analyzer Interface Commands chapter for information about the load command Load completed with errors Cause While loading a file into the emulator one or more events occurred that caused errors during the load process Action Use the display error_log command to view any errors You may need to modify the configuration and map memory before you load the file again If the problem persists make sure the host system and emulator are operating properly and that you are trying to load an acceptable file Measurement system not found Cause You tried to end the current emulation session and select another measurement system module which could not be located by the host system Action Either try the end select measurement_system command again or end and release the emulation session Memory allocation failed ending released Cause This is a fa
402. shipping charges to HP and HP shall pay shipping charges to return the product to Buyer However Buyer shall pay all shipping charges duties and taxes for products returned to HP from another country HP warrants that its software and firmware designated by HP for use with an instrument will execute its programming instructions when properly installed on that instrument HP does not warrant that the operation of the instrument or software or firmware will be uninterrupted or error free Limitation of Warranty The foregoing warranty shall not apply to defects resulting from improper or inadequate maintenance by Buyer Buyer supplied software or interfacing unauthorized modification or misuse operation outside of the environment specifications for the product or improper site preparation or maintenance No other warranty is expressed or implied HP specifically disclaims the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose Exclusive Remedies The remedies provided herein are buyer s sole and exclusive remedies HP shall not be liable for any direct indirect special incidental or consequential damages whether based on contract tort or any other legal theory Product maintenance agreements and other customer assistance agreements are available for Hewlett Packard products For any assistance contact your nearest Hewlett Packard Sales and Service Office Safety Summary of Safe Procedures
403. simulated I O refer to the Simulated I O User s Guide This option lets you display the current list of software breakpoints 352 Chapter 11 Emulator Analyzer Interface Commands display If the emulation session is continued from a previous session the listing will include any previously defined breakpoints The column marked status shows whether the breakpoint is pending inactivated or unknown A pending breakpoint causes the processor to enter the emulation monitor upon execution of that breakpoint Executed breakpoints are listed as inactivated Entries that show an inactive status can be reactivated by executing the modify software_breakpoints set command A label column also may be displayed for addresses that correspond to a symbol See the set command for details status This displays the emulator and trace status SYMB This option represents the symbol whose children are to be listed See the SYMB syntax diagram and the Symbolic Retrieval Utilities User s Guide for more information on symbol hierarchy and representation thru EXPR Allows you to specify a range of addresses for which you want data display Typically you use this to display the contents of an array You can display both single dimensioned and multi dimensioned arrays Arrays are displayed in the order specified by the language definition typically row major order for most Algol like languages trace This displays the current trace lis
404. sing the Emulation Analyzer Modifying the Trace Display To display time counts in absolute or relative format e Use the count option to the display trace command Count information may be displayed two ways relative which is the default or absolute When relative is selected count information is displayed relative to the previous state When absolute is selected count information is displayed relative to the trigger condition The count absolute relative trace display option is not available when counting is turned off in the trace command Examples To display the trace with absolute time counts display trace count absolute lt RETURN gt Label Address Opcode or Status time count Base __hex _ 8G154E LINK W AB aaaa 46861556 00 supr prgm word rd ds16 a812F84 6881 supr data long wr ds16 6612F86 8 2F8C supr data word wr ds16 agis52 MOVEA L 807156 AG 86861554 4808 supr prgm word rd ds16 86861556 7156 supr prgm word rd ds16 00001558 MOVEQ ggaaGaG D1 6155A NOP agissc MOVE L 01 08 8155E ADD L 04 08 156 ADD L 01 08 1i562 LSL L 2 08 61564 MOVE W 0041 08 AB DA L G881566 0041 supr prgm word ds16 BG 81566 4688 supr prgm word ds16 28 36 68 44 sle 54 56 28 BB 72 44 12 84 56 28 48 4 261 Chapter 7 Using the Emulation Analyzer Modifying the Trace Display
405. ssemble_from_line_number 66 lt RETURN gt race List Label Address Opcode or Status time count Base __hex _ relative mnie or amme 066 80154E LINK W AB 0000 720 067 6881556 4888 supr prgm word rd ds16 680 668 G8812F84 8881 supr data long wr ds16 728 069 6812F86 2F8C supr data word wr ds16 728 6070 88081552 MOVEA L 9807156 AB 720 071 86861554 4848 supr pram word rd ds16 720 072 6681556 7156 supr prgm word rd ds16 720 073 0001558 MOVEQ agaaaaaa D1 720 474 6155A NOP 720 475 8155C MOVE L 01 08 720 076 8155E ADD L 04 08 720 47 606156 ADD L 01 08 668 078 81562 LSL L 2 08 720 079 061564 MOVE W 0041 00 AB DA L 720 686 8881566 8841 supr prgm word ds16 728 461 46841568 0500 supr prgm word ds16 728 253 Chapter 7 Using the Emulation Analyzer Modifying the Trace Display To display instruction cycles only e Use the disassemble_from_line_number lt LINE gt instructions_only option to the display trace command Only the lines that contain an instruction opcode are displayed in the trace Examples To display the trace about line number 66 displaying only instruction cycles display trace disassemble_from_line_number 66 instructions_only lt RETURN gt Label Address Opcode or Status time count 666 G 8G154E 4 AG 0000 37 uS 070 8881552 00007 156 AG uS 073 468681558 gaaaaGaa 01 3 uS 474 G 4155A ns 4888 15
406. ssembled instruction mnemonic at the breakpoint address will show the breakpoint instruction 184 Examples Click this line to set a breakpoint Click this line to clear a breakpoint Asterisks mark set breakpoints Bring up menu and choose this item to set or clear a breakpoint on the highlighted line To set permanent breakpoints using the mnemonic memory display popup menu Chapter 6 Using the Emulator Using Software Breakpoints Hewlett Packard Emulator Analyzer em68340 m68340 Bi Eile Display Modify Eeecuuon Breakpolnts Trace Settings Help l lt Your Key gt SELIN Make pos Sre SR Xfer to i Break as Step Asm E Memory sp mnemonic file main module main c address label data 31 extern void update_system update system variables 32 extern void interrupt_sim simulate an interrupt he 93 extern void do_sort sets up ascii array and calls 94 95 maint 36 97 init_system f 98 proc_spec_init E 99 1 100 while true 181 update_system 183 num_checks Choose Action for Highlighted Line 184 int t_sim amp 105 a Geach MT SetClear Software Breakpoint 7 106 graph_data Edit Source a proc_specific Run Until STATUS M68340 Stepping complete Trace After To set a temporary breakpoint Place an absolute or symbolic address in the entry buffer then choose Breakpoints gt Temporary or Breakpoints Se
407. stallation Installing Hardware 4 Replace the plastic cover and insert new plastic rivets supplied with the emulator to secure the cover TO INSTALL RIVET PUSH DOWN ON RIVET HEAD TQ REMOVE RIVET PUSH UP ON CENTER SHAFT ADD PLASTIC WASHERS TO THESE TWO POSITIONS ONLY 530 Chapter 15 Installation Installing Hardware Step 4 Plug the emulator probe into the demo E target system 1 With HP 64700 power OFF connect the emulator probe cables to the demo target system EMULATOR PROBE PGA SOCKET PIN A1 F Chapter 15 Installation Installing Hardware 2 Connect the power supply wires from the emulator to the demo target system The 3 wire cable has 1 power wire and 2 ground wires When attaching the 3 wire cable to the demo target system make sure the connector is aligned properly so that all three pins are connected POWER CONNECTION FOR DEMO BOARD FROM HP 64700 ALIGN AND CONNECT 64751E05 532 Chapter 15 Installation Installing Hardware Step 5 Apply power to the HP 64700 The HP 64700B automatically selects the 115 Vac or 220 Vac range In the 115 Vac range the HP 64700B will draw a maximum of 345 W and 520 VA In the 220 Vac range the HP 64700B will draw a maximum of 335 W and 600 VA The HP 64700 is shipped from the
408. t lt TYPE gt Specifies the format in which to display the information as shown in the following table Data type information is not available from the symbol database so you must specify it 353 Chapter 11 Emulator Analyzer Interface Commands display lt TYPE gt Meaning byte Hex display of one 8 bit location word Hex display of one 16 bit location long Hex display of one 32 bit location int8 Display of one 8 bit location as a signed integer using two s complement notation intl6 Display of two bytes as a signed integer using two s complement notation int32 Display of four bytes as a signed integer using two s complement notation u_int8 Display of one byte as an unsigned positive integer u_intl6 Display of two bytes as an unsigned positive integer u_int32 Display of four bytes as an unsigned positive integer char Displays one byte as an ASCII character in the range 0 127 Control characters and values in the range 128 255 are displayed as a period Examples display event_log lt RETURN gt display local_symbols_in mod_name lt RETURN gt display data Msg_A thru 17 char Stack long lt RETURN gt set symbols on lt RI KE TURN gt set width label 30 lt RETURN gt display data Msg_B thru 17 char Msg_Dest thru 17 char lt RETURN gt display local_symbols_in mod_name lt RETURN gt display local_symbols_in mod_name main lt RETUR
409. t copy trace to tlist lt RETURN gt copy trace from_line_number 0 thru_line_number 5 to longtrac lt RETURN gt See Also The display modify and store commands 347 Chapter 11 Emulator Analyzer Interface Commands COUNT anystate off QUALIFIER state time COUNT To output of COUNT on TRACE diagram From COUNT on TRACE diagram state QUALIFIER anystate The analyzer trace depth is 1024 states A state is a unique combination of address data and status values occurring on the emulation bus simultaneously When counting is off the analyzer can store 1024 states in the trace buffer When counting is on the analyzer can only store 512 states in the trace buffer That is because the analyzer must now use two states in the trace buffer for each state captured on the analyzer bus One of the two states stores the state information itself The other state stores the count information associated with the state information By default all stored states are displayed You can decrease the depth of the trace display buffer to speed the display of the trace The following command decreases the trace display depth to 256 states display trace depth 256 lt RETURN gt By default the analyzer counting function is turned off This option allows you to set up the counting parameter for the analyzer to count on any state This option turns off trace counting cap
410. t if your version of HP 64700 system firmware is less than A 04 00 Using the command line enter the modify software_breakpoints set lt address gt temporary or modify software_breakpoints set lt address gt command The breakpoints feature must be enabled before individual breakpoints can be set 185 Chapter 6 Using the Emulator Using Software Breakpoints Note that you must only set software breakpoints at memory locations which contain instruction opcodes not operands or data When displaying memory in mnemonic format asterisks appear next to breakpoint addresses An asterisk shows the breakpoint is active Also if assembly level code is being displayed the disassembled instruction mnemonic at the breakpoint address will show the breakpoint instruction To set all breakpoints When displaying the breakpoint list position the mouse pointer within the breakpoints display screen press and hold the select mouse button and choose Set All Breakpoints from the popup menu Choose Breakpoints Set All Using the command line enter the modify software_breakpoints set command Breakpoints must be enabled before being set To deactivate a breakpoint When displaying breakpoints position the mouse pointer over the line displaying the active breakpoint and click the select mouse button Or press and hold the select mouse button and choose Set Inactivate Breakpoint from the popup menu A deactivated breakp
411. t Resource names show a path in the widget hierarchy Each widget in the hierarchy is a member of a widget class and the particular instance of the widget is named by the application programmer 497 Chapter 14 Concepts X Resources and the Graphical User Interface Class Names or Instance Names Can Be Used When specifying resource names you can use either instance names or class names For example a Done pushbutton may have an instance name of done and a class name of XmPushButton To set the background color for a hypothetical Done pushbutton you can use Application form row done background red Or you can use Application form row XmPushButton background red Applications also have class and instance names For example an application may have an instance name of applic and a class name of Application To set the background color for a hypothetical Done pushbutton only in the applic1 application you can use applicl form row done background red Note that instance names are more specific than class names That is class names may apply to many instances of the widget The class and instance names for the widgets in the Graphical User Interface can be displayed by choosing Help X Resource Names and clicking on the All names button Wildcards Can Be Used A wildcard may be used to match a resource specification to many different widgets at once For example to set the background color of all
412. t 100 lines from the pod commands display Error Log Copies the last 100 lines from the error log display Event Log Copies the last 100 lines from event log display To open a terminal emulation window Choose File gt Term This command opens a terminal window into the current working directory context 216 Chapter 6 Using the Emulator Using Simulated I O Using Simulated I O Simulated I O is a feature of the emulator analyzer interface that lets you use the same keyboard and display that you use with the interface to provide input to programs and display program output To use simulated I O your programs must communicate with the simulated I O control address and the buffer locations that follow it The Hewlett Packard AxLS compilers if your program uses I O automatically link with environment dependent routines that communicate with the simulated I O control address and buffer Also before simulated I O can work the emulator must be configured to enable polling of the simulated I O control address and to define the control address location This section shows you how to e Display the simulated I O screen e Use simulated I O keyboard input Refer to the Simulated I O User s Guide for complete details on how simulated I O works To display the simulated I O screen Choose Display Simulated IO Before you can display simulated I O polling for simulated I O must be enabled in the em
413. t all Softkey Interface files were loaded properly during the installation process Try starting the emulation session again Could not load default configuration Cause The host system could not load the default configuration into the emulator Action Cycle power on the emulator and run the Terminal Interface pv performance verification command on the emulator to verify that it is functioning properly Also verify proper software installation If loading default configuration still fails then call your HP 64000 representative lt CONFIGURATION FILENAME does not exist Cause The configuration file you are trying to load does not exist Action Try the load configuration command again using a valid configuration file name Don t care number unexpected Cause While defining an expression in your command you included a don t care number a binary octal decimal or hexadecimal number containing x which was not expected Don t care numbers are not valid for all commands See the EXPR command syntax for more information about expressions Emulation analyzer defaulted to delete label Cause Analyzer trace labels were changed or modified while labels were in use in the trace specification 435 Chapter 12 Error Messages Graphical Softkey Interface Messages Unnumbered Action Enter the previous trace specification and try again Emul700dmn continuation failed Cause Communication between the emulator and th
414. t time trace counting time lt RETURN gt To initialize activity performance measurements Use the performance_measurement_initialize command After you set up the trace command you must tell the SPMT the address ranges on which you wish to make activity measurements This is done by initializing the performance measurement You can initialize the performance measurement in the following ways e Default initialization using global symbols if the symbols database is loaded e Initialize with user defined files e Initialize with global symbols e Initialize with local symbols e Restore a previous performance measurement if the emulation system has been exited and reentered Default Initialization Entering the performance_measurement_initialize command with no options specifies an activity measurement If a valid symbolic database has been loaded the addresses of all global procedures and static symbols will be used otherwise a default set of ranges that cover the entire processor address range will be used 272 Chapter 8 Making Software Performance Measurements Activity Performance Measurements Initialization with User Defined Ranges You can specifically give the SPMT address ranges to use by placing the information in a file and entering the file name in the performance_measurement_initialize command Address range files may contain program symbols procedure name or static user defined address ra
415. t value for Supervisor Stack Pointer 13000h Reset value for Program Counter 400h Configuration file name fmoncfg To load the demo program absolute file enter the following command using the command line load ecs x lt RETURN gt 131 Chapter 5 Configuring the Emulator Selecting the Emulation Monitor To modify the TRACE exception vector to point to the TRACE_ENTRY label in the monitor program so that the emulator can single step enter the following commands using the command line modify memory 24h long to 20800h lt RETURN gt Now you are ready to use the emulator 132 Chapter 5 Configuring the Emulator Mapping Memory Mapping Memory Because the emulator can use target system memory or emulation memory or both itis necessary to map ranges of memory so that the emulator knows where to direct its accesses Up to 7 ranges of memory can be mapped and the resolution of mapped ranges is 256 bytes bytes that is the memory ranges must begin on 256 byte boundaries and must be at least 256 bytes in length The emulator contains 4 Kbytes of dual port emulation memory and provides two slots for additional emulation memory modules e HP 64171A 256 Kbyte Memory Modules or HP 64171B 1 Mbyte Memory Modules 0 wait state emulation memory through 16 7 MHz 1 wait state above 16 7 MHz e HP 64172A 256 Kbyte Memory Modules or HP 64172B 1 Mbyte Memory Modules 0 wait state emulation memory through 25 MHz
416. t_by previous_display real repetitively short thru words The function code used to define the address space being referenced See the syntax diagram for FCODE to see a list of the function codes available and for an explanation of those codes Displays memory in a 64 bit real number format or 32 bit long words when preceded by blocked or absolute This causes the memory listing to be formatted in assembly language instruction mnemonics with associated operands When specifying mnemonic format you should include a starting address that corresponds to the first byte of an operand to ensure that the listed mnemonics are correct If set source only is on you will see only the high level language statements and corresponding line numbers This option lets you specify an offset that is subtracted from each of the absolute addresses before the addresses and corresponding memory contents are listed You might select the offset value so that each module appears to start at address OOOOH The memory contents listing will then appear similar to the assembler or compiler listing This option is also useful for displaying symbols and source lines in dynamically relocated programs Returns to display associated with the previous mnemonic memory display command Formats memory values in the listing as real numbers NaN in the display list means Not a Number Updates the memory listing display continuously You should only use thi
417. tal system error because the emulation session was unable to allocate memory Action You may need to reconfigure your UNIX kernel to increase the per process maximum memory limit and available swap space Reboot your UNIX system and try starting a new session again 442 Chapter 12 Error Messages Graphical Softkey Interface Messages Unnumbered Memory block list unreadable Memory range overflow Cause A modify memory command is attempted that would cross physical 0 Action Limit the modify memory command to not overflow physical 0 or break the command into two separate modify commands No address label defined Cause The address trace label was somehow removed in the terminal interface using the tlb command Action End session and start again No more processes may be attached to this session Cause You can operate an emulator in four windows Each time you start the emulator in another window a new process is attached to the current session Action Do not try to use more than four windows Once you have started the emulator in four windows you have reached the maximum number of processes allowed for that emulator Not an absolute file No absolute file lt file gt No absolute file No database lt file gt Cause You tried to load a file into the emulator that is not an executable or absolute file so the host system stopped the load process Action Try your command again and make sure you specify a vali
418. tate you specify the analyzer stores states in trace memory When trace memory is filled the trace is said to be complete The default trigger state specification is any state so when you start a trace measurement after initializing the analyzer the analyzer will trigger on the first state it sees and store the following states in trace memory Once you start a trace measurement you can view the progress of the measurement by displaying the trace status In some situations for example when the trigger state is never found or when the analyzer hasn t filled trace memory the trace measurement does not complete In these situations you can halt the trace measurement Once a trace is displayed you can use the cursor keys and other keys to position the trace list on the display To speed up the display of traces you can reduce the depth of the trace list Also when entering trace commands there is a special command that allows you to recall and modify the last trace command entered This section describes how to e Start trace measurements e Display the trace status e Stop trace measurements e Display the trace e Position the trace display on the screen e Change the trace depth e Modify the last trace command entered 223 Chapter 7 Using the Emulation Analyzer The Basics of Starting Stopping and Displaying Traces Examples To start a trace measurement Choose Trace Everything Using the
419. ter trace about or trace before is the state that will trigger the analyzer and cause states to be stored 237 Chapter 7 Using the Emulation Analyzer Qualifying Trigger and Store Conditions Examples Suppose you want to look at the execution of the demo program after the call of the update_system function main c line 102 occurs To trigger on this address enter trace after address main main c line 102 lt RETURN gt set source on inverse_video on symbols on lt RI Gl TURN gt display trace lt RETURN gt t More data off e Address pcode or Status w Source Lines time count symbols mnemonic w symbols relative HHHHHHHHHHmain c line 101 thru 102 HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH HHH p up update_system 728 ns pr maint 80a814 8088 supr prgm word rd dsl 720 n5 pr maint 6 616 1592 supr prgm word rd dsl 728 ns Hitttittitttmain c line 103 HHHHHHHHHHHHHHH RR 003 pr maint 808818 incomplete instr 52B9 004 sysstact G87F98 8800 supr data long wr ds16 005 sysstact G47F92 F06 supr data word wr ds16 Hhitttttttupdate_sys c line 1 thru 47 HHRHHHHEHHHHH Rh In the preceding trace list line 0 labeled after shows the beginning of the program loop 238 Chapter 7 Using the Emulation Analyzer Qualifying Trigger and Store Conditions To trigger on a number of occurrences of some state e Use the occurs lt TIMES gt after specifying the trigger state
420. ter to the entry buffer notice the flashing I beam cursor and type in main 2 Choose DisplayMemory Mnemonic Or using the command line enter display memory main mnemonic lt RETURN gt File Display Modify Execution Breakpoints Trace Settings Action keys lt Demo gt Run Xfer til Disp Sre amp Asmi Patch Make amp Load Step Asm Step Source Disp Var Disp REG Il Disp Src Prev Il Trace Run Il Again 91 extern void update_system update system variables 32 extern void interrupt_sim simulate an interrupt 93 extern void do_sort sets up ascii array and calls 94 35 maint 36 97 init_system 98 proc_spec_init 39 188 while true 181 142 update_system 183 num_checks 164 interrupt_sim amp num_checks 105 if graph 106 graph_data 107 proc_specific STATUS cws main main c The default display mode settings cause source lines and symbols to appear in displays where appropriate Notice you can use symbols when specifying expressions The global symbol main is used in the command above to specify the starting address of the memory to be displayed 33 Chapter 1 Getting Started Step 3 Run from the transfer address
421. than 100 microseconds approximately Typically this situation occurs when the 68340 emulation processor attempts to access memory that is not present Action Investigate the cause of the AS signal being active too long Register mbar valid bit not set Register cf_mbar valid bit not set Cause The contents of the MBAR or CF_MBAR register must be valid that is bit O of the register must be set to 1 before you can display of modify of the SIM or SIM configuration registers Action Make sure the contents of the MBAR or CF_MBAR register are valid Program counter is odd or uninitialized Program counter is located in guarded memory Cause You attempted to run or step from the current program counter when it contains an odd value or an address that is mapped as guarded memory Action When running from the current program counter make sure it contains an even address that is not in guarded memory 458 Chapter 12 Error Messages Terminal Interface Messages 151 Supervisor stack pointer is odd or uninitialized Supervisor stack is located in emulation ROM Supervisor stack is located in guarded memory Cause You are using a foreground monitor and you have attempted to run or step when the stack pointer contains an odd value or when the stack pointer contains an address that is mapped as emulation ROM or guarded memory Action Make sure the stack pointer contains an even address value that is not mapped as emulation ROM or
422. the state of the Choose Action for All Breakpoints highlighted Enable Disable Software Breakpoints breakpoint Set All Breakpoints Clear delete All Breakpoints STATUS M68340 Stepping complete Emulation trace complete 188 Chapter 6 Using the Emulator Using Software Breakpoints To clear a breakpoint When displaying memory in mnemonic format position the mouse pointer over the program line at which you wish to clear a currently set breakpoint notice the asterisk at the left of the line and click the select mouse button Or press and hold the select mouse button and choose Set Clear Software Breakpoint from the popup menu When displaying breakpoints position the mouse pointer over the line displaying the breakpoint you wish to clear press and hold the select mouse button and choose Clear delete Breakpoint from the popup menu Place an absolute or symbolic address in the entry buffer then choose Breakpoints Clear Using the command line enter the modify software_breakpoints clear lt address gt command When you clear a breakpoint it is removed from the breakpoints list 189 Chapter 6 Using the Emulator Using Software Breakpoints Examples To clear a software breakpoint using the breakpoints display popup menu File Display Modify Erecuton Breakpoints Trace Settings lt Your Key gt SEEEN Make oe Sre ae xfer to a Break aes Step Asm Software breakpoints
423. the 228 halting the 227 listing the 228 listing to file 215 load command 375 loading 265 266 on_halt 243 prestore qualifier 241 recalling trace specifications 230 starting the 224 stopping the 227 storage qualifier 240 storage qualifier with prestore 241 store command 410 storing 265 266 Trace Specification Selection dialog box 230 trigger position 237 trace command 420 423 default 224 loading and storing 264 265 setting up for SPMT measurements 271 trace display 250 263 about line numbers 252 absolute format 255 count absolute relative 261 default 263 depth SPMT measurements 271 dequeued 251 disassemble from line number 253 instruction cycles only 254 mnemonic format 256 offset by 262 positioning left right 229 positioning up down 229 589 Index source line inclusion 257 symbol information inclusion 259 width of columns 260 trace display setting the source symbol modes 206 trace signals emulation analyzer 233 trace status display 224 trace_spec load command 375 store command 410 tracing background operation 151 tram memory characterization 135 transfer address 175 trigger 565 break on 244 condition 237 position 237 position accuracy of 237 specifying a simple 237 TRIGGER CMB signal 299 TRIGGER in trace command 424 425 trom memory characterization 135 tutorials setting up 325 327 undefined software break
424. the absolute file name it is given a X extension Storing memory contents into absolute files is useful when copying ROM contents to RAM so that software breakpoints can be used In other words you store ROM contents to an absolute file re map memory to substitute emulation RAM for the target ROM and load the absolute file To store the contents of memory locations 900H through 9FFH to an absolute file on the host computer named absfile store memory 900h thru 9ffh to absfile lt RETURN gt After the command above a file named absfile X exists in the current directory on the host computer 162 Chapter 6 Using the Emulator Using Symbols Using Symbols If symbol information is present in the absolute file it is loaded along with the absolute file unless you use the nosymbols option Both global symbols and symbols that are local to a program module can be displayed Long symbol names can be truncated in the symbols display however you can increase the width of the symbols display by starting the interface with more columns refer to the Setting X Resources chapter This section describes how to e Load symbols e Display global symbols e Display local symbols e Display a symbol s parent symbol e Copy and paste a full symbol name to the entry buffer To load symbols Choose File gt Load Symbols Only and use the dialog box to select the absolute file Using the command line enter
425. the current working symbol by typing the cws command on the command line and following it with a symbol name The pws command displays the current working symbol on the status line Display memory mnemonic also can modify the current working symbol Note that if no default file was defined by executing the command display local_symbols_in SYMB or with the cws command a source file name lt FILE gt must be specified with each local symbol in a command line 412 entry_exit_range lt FILENAME gt line lt LINE gt lt IDENTIFIER gt SCOPE segment lt SEG_NAME gt text_range lt TYPE gt filename fsegment Chapter 11 Emulator Analyzer Interface Commands SYMB The parameters are as follows The range of addresses beginning with the entry point and ending with the return instruction The entry point is the address used by other files when they call this procedure This is an UNIX path specifying a source file If no file is specified and the identifier referenced is not a global symbol in the executable file that was loaded then the default file is assumed the last absolute file specified by a display local_symbols_in command A default file is only assumed when other parameters such as line in the SYMB specification expect a file This specifies that the following numeric value references a line number in the specified source file Prompts you for the line number of the source file
426. the emulator using test input you can store the BBA information to a file Then you can generate reports based on the stored information This section shows you how to e Store BBA data to a file Refer to the HP Branch Validator BBA User s Guide for complete details on the BBA product and how it works To store BBA data to a file Choose File gt Store BBA Data and use the selection dialog box to specify the file name The default file name bbadump data can be selected from the dialog box 219 220 Using the Emulation Analyzer 221 Using the Emulation Analyzer This chapter describes tasks you perform while using the emulation analyzer These tasks are grouped into the following sections The basics of starting stopping and displaying traces Qualifying trigger and store conditions Using the sequencer Modifying trace displays Saving and restoring traces 222 Chapter 7 Using the Emulation Analyzer The Basics of Starting Stopping and Displaying Traces The Basics of Starting Stopping and Displaying Traces This section describes the basic tasks that relate to starting and stopping trace measurements When you start a trace measurement the analyzer begins looking at the data on the emulation processor s bus and control signals on each analyzer clock signal The information seen on a particular clock is called a state When one of these states matches the trigger s
427. the load symbols lt absolute_file gt command Unless you use the nosymbols option when loading absolute files symbols are loaded automatically However if you did use the nosymbols option when loading the absolute file you can load the symbols without loading the absolute file again This option is particularly useful for loading symbols for files located in target ROM so that you can use symbols with that code 163 Chapter 6 Using the Emulator Using Symbols Examples To load symbols from the demo program load symbols ecs x lt RETURN gt To display global symbols e Choose Display Global Symbols e Using the command line enter the display global_symbols command Listed are address ranges associated with a symbol the segment the symbol is associated with and the offset of that symbol within the segment If there is more than a screen full of information you can use the up arrow down arrow lt NEXT gt or lt PREV gt keys to scroll the information up or down on the display Examples To display global symbols in the demo program display global_symbols lt RETURN gt Global symbols in ecs x Procedure symbols Procedure name Address range __ Segment Offset _ ff lush Bea8448C B88844A5 libe lalala _buf sync ae2eCOC 46882089 libc poga _dbl_to_str G 2EEE 44883393 libc G1E4 _doprnt 48003644 84884371 libe 4836 _exec_funcs a6268A 48826A9 libe aaec _f indbuf ag44A6 84884539
428. the ready state of enabled emulators on the CMB Each emulator on the CMB releases this line when it is ready to run This line goes true when all enabled emulators are ready to run providing for a synchronized start 299 When CMB is enabled each emulator is required to break to background when CMB READY goes false and will wait for CMB READY to go true before returning to the run state When an enabled emulator breaks it will drive the CMB READY false and will hold it false until it is ready to resume running When an emulator is reset it also drives CMB READY false EXECUTE The CMB EXECUTE line is low true Any HP 64700 on the CMB can drive this line It serves as a global interrupt and is processed by both the emulator and the analyzer This signal causes an emulator to run from a specified address when CMB READY returns true BNC Trigger Signal The BNC trigger signal is a positive rising edge TTL level signal The BNC trigger line can be used to either drive or receive an analyzer trigger or receive a break request for the emulator Comparison Between CMB and BNC Triggers The CMB trigger and BNC trigger lines have the same logical purpose to provide a means for connecting the internal trigger signals trig and trig2 to external instruments The CMB and BNC trigger lines are bi directional Either signal may be used directly as a break condition The CMB trigger is level sensitive while the BNC trigger is edge sensitive
429. the step source command When stepping through instructions associated with source lines execution can remain in a loop and the message Stepping source line 1 Next PC lt address gt is displayed on the status line In this situation you can abort the step command by pressing lt CTRL gt c Examples To step through instructions associated with the high level source lines at the current program counter step source lt RETURN gt To step through instructions associated with high level source lines at address Sore B main step source from main lt RETURN gt 177 Chapter 6 Using the Emulator Executing User Programs Examples To step assembly level instructions Choose Execution Step Instruction and select one of the items from the cascade menu Using the command line enter the step command The step command allows you to step through program execution an instruction or a number of instructions at a time Also you can step from the current program counter or from a specific address To step one instruction from the current program counter step lt RETURN gt To step a number of instructions from the current program counter step 8 lt RETURN gt To step a number of instructions from a specified address step 16 from 920h lt RETURN gt To reset the emulation processor Choose Execution Reset Using the command line enter the reset command The reset comm
430. the trace is still running or that the trace has been halted The second line of the trace status display contains information on the arm condition If the analyzer is always armed the message Arm ignored is displayed When the arm condition is ignored the Arm to trigger time is not meaningful and a question mark is displayed The Making Coordinated Measurements chapter explains arm conditions If the analyzer is to be armed by one of the internal signals either the message Arm not received or Arm received is displayed The display indicates if the arm condition happened any time since the most recent trace started even if it happened after the trace was halted or became complete The Arm to trigger line displays the amount of time between the arm condition and the trigger The time displayed will be from 0 04 microseconds to 41 943 milliseconds less than 0 04 microseconds or greater than 41 943 milliseconds If the arm signal is ignored or the trigger is not in memory a question mark 7 is displayed 225 Chapter 7 Using the Emulation Analyzer The Basics of Starting Stopping and Displaying Traces The States line shows the number of states that have been stored out of the number that is possible to store and the line numbers that the stored states occupy The trigger state is always stored on line 0 The Sequence term line of the trace status display shows the number of the term the sequencer was i
431. then use display trace to display the contents of the trace memory If a previous trace list is on screen the current trace automatically updates the display If the trace memory contents exceed the page size of the display the lt NEXT gt lt PREV gt lt Up arrow gt or lt Down arrow gt keys may be used to display all the trace memory contents You also can press lt CTRL gt f and lt CTRL gt g to move the display left and right You can set up trigger and storage qualifications using the specify trace command The analyzers will begin tracing when acmb_execute command executes which causes an EXECUTE signal on the Coordinated Measurement Bus The analyzer will trace any state by default The parameters are as follows again This option repeats the previous trace measurement It also begins a trace measurement with a newly loaded trace specification Using trace without the again parameter will start a trace with the default specification rather than the loaded specification anything This causes the analyzer to capture any type of information arm_trig2 This option allows you to specify the external trigger as a trace qualifier for coordinating measurements between multiple HP 64700s or an HP 64700 and another instrument Before arm_trig2 can appear as an option you must modify the emulation configuration interactive measurement specification When doing this you must specify that either BNC or CMBT drive trig2 and that the
432. ther press a softkey representing the help file or type in the help file name If you are typing in the help file name make sure you use the complete syntax Not all of the softkey labels reflect the complete file name help system_commands lt RETURN gt run lt RETURN gt This is asummary of the commands that appear on the softkey labels when you type help or press system_commands run trace step break display modify load store 372 Chapter 11 Emulator Analyzer Interface Commands copy reset stop_trace end software_breakpoints registers expressions EXPR symbols S YMB specify cmb cmb_execute map set wait pod_command bbaunload coverage performance_measurement_ initialize performance_measurement_run performance_measurement_end help 373 Chapter 11 Emulator Analyzer Interface Commands load configuration load load lt FILE gt lt RETURN gt lt memory_type gt Kal FCODE B noupdate zE configuration lt FILE gt ae noupdate trace_spec lt FILE gt This command transfers absolute files from the host computer into emulation or target system RAM With other parameters the load command can load emulator configuration files trace records trace specifications or symbol files The absolute file contains information about where the
433. time 47 8 Address Access Time 2tcyc tCW tCHAV tDICL 74 ns 25 16 MHz clock Chip Select Access Time 2teyc tcLSA toICL 55 ns 25 16 MHz clock HP 64751 NOTES A IFETCH and IPIPE are not driven to the target system B The emulator does not respond to BKPT from the target system C The emulator does not drive data to the target system during show cycles 484 Chapter 13 Specifications and Characteristics Emulator Specifications and Characteristics AC Electrical Specifications 64751 66506 and lower active probe board numbers Clock Timing MC68340 16 78 MHz HP 64751 Num Characteristic Symbol Min Max Min Max Unit System Frequency See Note fsys dc 16 78 dc 16 78 MHz Crystal Frequency fXTAL 25 50 25 50 kHz On Chip VCO System Frequency fsys 0 13 16 78 0 13 16 78 MHz On Chip VCO Frequency Range fvco 0 1 35 0 1 35 MHz Crystal Oscillator Startup Time tre 100 100 ms 1 CLKOUT Period teyc 59 6 59 6 ns 2 3 CLKOUT Pulse Width tcw 28 28 ns 4 5 CLKOUT Rise and Fall Times tcrf 5 5 ns NOTE All internal registers retain data at 0 Hz 485 Chapter 13 Specifications and Characteristics Emulator Specifications and Characteristics AC Electrical Specifications 64751 6650
434. time range Examples Consider the following duration measurement report generated with the commands shown display trace depth 512 lt RETURN gt trace after interrupt_sim start or interrupt_sim end only interrupt_sim start or interrupt_sim end counting time lt RETURN gt performance_measurement_initialize duration lt RETURN gt performance_measurement_run 10 lt RETURN gt performance_measurement_end lt RETURN gt perf32 more Time Interval Profile From Address 1014 File main module users guest demo debug_env hp64751 main c Symbolic Reference at main interrupt_sim To Address 109E File main module users guest demo debug_env hp64751 main c Symbolic Reference at interrupt_sim 8A Number of intervals 2550 Maximum Time 648396 800 us Minimum Time 65 640 us Avg Time 67133 955 us Statistical summary for 10 traces Stdv 139265 45 95 Confidence 8 05 Error tolerance Graph of relative percents us 10 us 0 00 0 1 us 100 us 15 016 3 WREN RRR 00 1 us 500 us 0 00 500 1 us 1 ms 4 98 001 ms 5 ms 15 02 KKK KKK 5 001 ms 10 ms 14 82 KKK KKK 0 1 ms 20 ms 14 94 kK KKK KK 20 1 ms 40 ms 10 00 40 1 ms 80 ms 4 94 80 1 ms 160 ms 57 KK KKK 60 1 ms 320 ms 86 9 4 320 1 ms 640 ms Deca FA 640 1 ms 1 2 s 0 27 291 Chapter 8 Making Software Performance Measurements Duration Performance Measurements From Address 109E File main module users guest dem
435. tions Step 9 Step assembly level instructions You can step through the program one instruction at a time To step one instruction from the current program counter click on the Step Asm action key Or using the command line enter step lt RETURN gt Registers Next PC G8GFCARsp PC 88 FCA STATUS 2704 lt s z gt USP 88 8888 SSP AAA12F94 O8 D 88888820 Gaeeaees HaaZ Baeae 71C BaBGG146 Baaa2AFS Beee46Fs8 Baaa 7e6 AB AY 8698687156 FFFFFFFF 7728 G a8028 B68877E8 GaGa 156 Baelers4 aaal2ra4 VBR aageeeea SFC A OFC 48 Step_PC QGGFCABsp JSR p proc_spec_init Next PC 881A3E sp PC 1A3E STATUS 2744 lt s z gt USP a 888 SSP a8a12F3a 08 0 88880820 Gageeees Baeese2s Gaaae 71C BaBGG146 Baae2AFS Beee46Fs aaaa 7ab AB AY 8698687156 FFFFFFFF 00007726 G a8028 B68877E8 GAGE 156 Beeler34 aaal2raa VBR pogga SFC A DFC 48 Notice when registers are displayed stepping causes the assembly language instruction just executed to be displayed 40 j Chapter 1 Getting Started Step 10 Trace the program Step 10 Trace the program When the analyzer traces program execution it looks at the data on the emulation processor s bus and control signals at each clock cycle The information seen at a particular clock cycle is called a state When one of these states matches the trigger state you specify the analyzer stores states in trace memory When trace memory is filled the trace is sai
436. to lt TRACE_ENTRY_address gt vector table in TROM Cause In order to step when using a foreground monitor the trace vector must contain the address of the monitor program s TRACE_ENTRY label which equals the monitor base address plus 800H The step command reads the trace vector on each step to make sure it contains the correct address value If the trace vector does not contain the correct value the emulator attempts to write the correct value This error occurs when the vector table is in memory mapped as target ROM Action If the vector table is really in target ROM memory its trace vector must already contain the correct address value Double bus fault occurred Cause This message informs you of a double bus fault in the emulation microprocessor The most common cause of this error message is running or stepping from target memory locations that do not exist 460 Chapter 12 Error Messages Terminal Interface Messages 163 Update HP64740 firmware to version A 02 02 or newer Cause The HP 64751 emulator requires version A 02 02 or newer of the analyzer firmware Action Refer to the Updating Emulator Analyzer Firmware section in the Installation chapter 168 Can t access module regs addr space mask sd bit 6 is set Cause You have attempted to modify the MBAR or CF_MBAR register with a value that masks supervisor data space by setting bit 6 The HP 64751 emulator requires an address space to access 68340 SIM r
437. to the entry buffer 84 Chapter 4 Entering Commands Using Menus the Entry Buffer and Action Keys To use the action keys 1 If the action key uses the contents of the entry buffer place the desired information in the entry buffer 2 Position the mouse pointer over the action key and click the action key Action keys are user definable pushbuttons that perform interface or system functions Action keys can use information from the entry buffer this makes it possible to create action keys that are more general and flexible Several action keys are predefined when you first start the Graphical User Interface You can use the predefined action keys but you 1l really appreciate them when you define and use your own Action keys are defined by setting an X resource Refer to the chapter Setting X Resources for more information about creating action keys To use dialog boxes j Click on an item in the dialog box list to copy the item to the text entry area 2 Edit the item in the text entry area if desired 3 Click on the OK pushbutton to make the selection and close the dialog box click on the Apply pushbutton to make the selection and leave the dialog box open or click on the Cancel pushbutton to cancel the selection and close the dialog box The graphical interface uses a number of dialog boxes for selection and recall Directory Selection Selects the working directory You can change to a previousl
438. tor and analyzer The error log records error messages received during the emulation session You may want to display the error log to view the error messages Sometimes several messages will be displayed for a single error to help you locate a problem quickly To prevent overrun the error log purges the oldest messages to make room for the new ones To display the error log display error_log lt RETURN gt Error messages are grouped into the following categories e Graphical Softkey Interface Messages Unnumbered e Graphical Softkey Interface Messages Numbered e Terminal Interface Messages Note that Terminal Interface messages are passed along to the Graphical User Interface or Softkey Interface and appear with numbers in the error log display 432 Graphical Softkey Interface Messages Unnumbered Address range too small for request request truncated Cause Too small of an address range is specified in a modify memory command Action Specify a larger memory range Cannot create module file Cause Insufficient disk space for the module file Action Check disk space under usr hp64000 Cannot start Ending previous session try again Cause The host system could not start a new emulation session and is ending the previous session Action After the previous session has ended try starting a new emulation session If that fails try emul700 u lt logical name gt to unlock the emulator and cycl
439. trace with high level source lines set source on lt RETURN gt display trace lt RETURN gt 257 Chapter 7 Using the Emulation Analyzer Modifying the Trace Display Address Opcode or Status w Source Lines time count the 6 intima ete HHHHHHHHHHinit_system c line 66 thru BH HHRHRHHRHHRHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH Returns Nothing terete titi ttt terete titi ttt tt ete titi titi tere OK te KK void init_val_arr 8 154E LINK W AB aaaa 720 86861556 4888 supr prgm word rd ds16 680 a812F84 8881 supr data long wr ds16 720 BaBI2ZF86 2F8C supr data word wr ds16 720 a g1552 MOVEA L 00007 156 AB 720 84861554 00 supr prgm word rd ds16 720 86861556 7156 supr prgm word rd ds16 720 HHAHHHHHHHinit_system c line 81 thru O2 HHRHRRHRHHRHHHHRHHHHHHHHHH int cur_el for cur_el cur_el lt NUM_OF_OLD cur_el To set the number of source lines to be displayed at 12 set source on number_of_source_lines 12 lt RETURN gt display trace lt RETURN gt Label Address Opcode or Status w Source Lines time count hex mnemonic re ative HHHHHHHHHHinit_system c line 66 thru BH HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHAHHE Description This code initializes the val_arr data structure Parameters none References None Returns Nothing BOOS OOO OG O ICCC O ISO IGS ACOA AGI ACI a RK KA GK void init_val_arr 466 G GG154E LINK W AB 0000 067 8881558 8888 supr prgm word
440. turing of states when another state occurs In effect windowing allows you capture windows of code execution Windowing is different than storing states in a range the only range option in the trace command syntax because it allows you to capture execution of all states in a window of code whereas storing states in a range won t capture the execution of subroutines that are called in that range or reads and writes to locations outside that range When you use the windowing feature of the analyzer the trigger state must be in the window or else the trigger will never be found 248 Chapter 7 Using the Emulation Analyzer Using the Sequencer If you wish to combine the windowing and sequencing functions of the analyzer there are some restrictions e Up to four sequence terms are available when windowing is in effect e Global restart is not available when windowing is in effect e Occurrence counts are not available Examples In the demo program suppose you are only interested in the execution that occurs within the switch statement of the combsort function You could specify source line number 228 as the window enable state and the source line number of the next statement line number 240 as the window disable state Set up the windowing trace specification with the following command trace enable main main c line 229 disable main main c line 241 lt RETURN gt set source on lt RETURN gt race List O
441. turpw 512 512 clks 57 BERR Negated to HALT Negated Rerun tBNHN 0 0 ns 70 CLKOUT Low to Data Bus Driven Show tscLpp 0 30 ns Cycle 71 Data Setup Time to CLKOUT Low Show tSCLDS 10 las ns Cycle 72 Data Hold from CLKOUT Low Show Cycle tSCLDH 6 er ee ns MC68340 NOTES 1 All AC timing is shown with respect to 0 8 V and 2 0 V levels unless otherwise noted 2 This number can be reduced to 5 ns if strobes have equal loads 3 If multiple chip selects are used the CS width negated 15 applies to the time from the negation of a heavily loaded chip select to the assertion of a lightly loaded chip select 4 These hold times are specified with respect to DS on asychronous reads and with respect to CLKOUT on synchronous reads The user is free to use either hold time 5 If the asychronous setup time 47 requirements are satisfied the DSACKx low to data setup time 31 and DSACKx low to BERR low setup time 48 can be ignored The data must only satisfy the data in to CLKOUT low setup time 27 for the following clock cycle BERR must only satisfy the late BERR low to CLKOUT low setup time 27A for the following clock cycle o 6 To ensure coherency during every operand transfer BG will not be asserted in response to BR until after cycles of the current operand transfer are complete and RMC is negated 7 In the absence of DSACKx BERR is an asychronous input using the asychronous setup
442. ualifiers 241 state qualifiers 235 storage qualifiers 240 trace at EXECUTE 305 trigger condition 237 using the 222 analyzer status occurrence left information 226 sequence term information 226 app defaults directory HP 9000 computers 500 Sun SPARCsystem computers 500 application resource See X resource arm information 225 arm_trig2 in trace command 421 background 123 563 emulation monitor 563 tracing 151 background monitor 124 selecting 123 132 bases number 231 bbaunload command syntax 340 before trigger position specification 237 binary numbers 231 blocks emulation memory size of 133 BNC connector 5 298 trigger signal 300 break command 176 syntax 341 break on analyzer trigger 244 break on guarded memory access 243 breakpoints 34 copying to file 215 breaks on write to ROM 150 568 Index C cables emulator probe length 491 power 533 cascade menu 76 cautions antistatic precautions 511 BNC accepts only TTL voltage levels 303 CMB 9 pin port is NOT for RS 232C 301 do not use probe without pin extender 60 emulator suspension rating of 29 5 kg 491 powering OFF the HP 64700 53 protect emulator against static discharge 52 rear panel do not stand HP 64700 on 515 characteristics emulator 478 492 characterization of memory 135 chip selects access emulation memory with 134 class name X applications 498 client X 314 clock source selection emulator configuration
443. uf thru 25 367 Chapter 11 Emulator Analyzer Interface Commands EXPR is the same as disp_buf thru disp_buf 25 Examples O5fxh Offffh disp_buf 5 symb_tbl offset 2 start mod_name line 15 end See Also The SYMB syntax description 368 Chapter 11 Emulator Analyzer Interface Commands FCODE FCODE fcode none sp sd sca up ud cpu The function code is used to define the address space being referenced Select the appropriate function code from those listed below cpu CPU space d Data space none Causes the emulator to ignore the function code bits p Program space S Supervisor space sd Supervisor data space sp Supervisor program space u User space ud User data space up User program space 369 Chapter 11 Emulator Analyzer Interface Commands FCODE Examples To copy a portion of user data memory to a file copy memory fcode ud 1000H thru 1fffH to mymem lt RETURN gt To modify a location in program memory modify memory fcode p 5000h long to 12345678h lt RETURN gt 370 Chapter 11 Emulator Analyzer Interface Commands forward forward lt COMMAND gt lt RE TURN gt lt UINAME gt This command lets you forward commands to other HP 64700 interfaces that use the emul700dmn daemon process to coordinate actions between the interfaces bms Sends messages to th
444. ulator configuration 217 Chapter 6 Using the Emulator Using Simulated I O Examples Status messages disabled A message tells you whether the display is open or closed You can modify the configuration to enable status messages To use simulated I O keyboard input To begin using simulated I O input choose Settings Simulated IO Keyboard To end simulated I O and return to using the interface use the suspend softkey The command line entry area is used for simulated input with the keyboard Therefore if the command line is turned off choosing this menu item with turn command line display back on If you are planning to use even a modest amount of simulated I O input during an emulation session it might be a good idea to open another Emulator Analyzer window to be used exclusively for simulated I O input and output 218 Chapter 6 Using the Emulator Using Basis Branch Analysis Using Basis Branch Analysis Basis branch analysis BBA is provided by the HP Branch Validator product This product is used to analyze the testing of your programs create more complete test suites and quantify your level of testing The HP Branch Validator records branches executed in a program and generates reports that provide information about program execution during testing It uses a special C preprocessor to add statements that write to a data array when program branches are taken After running the program in
445. umbered 10315 10326 10327 10328 10328 10328 10328 Graphical Softkey Interface Messages Numbered These numbered messages can occur because of various problems with the emulator analyzer Logical emulator name unknown not found in 64700tab file Cause This message may occur while trying to start up the emulator It indicates that the emulator name specified could not be found in the 64700tab net or etc hosts files Action Specify the name in one of these files Emulator locked by another user Cause This message occurs when you try to start an emulation interface but your attempt failed because the emulator is being used by someone else Action The current user must release the emulator Cannot lock emulator failure in obtaining the accessid Cannot lock emulator failure in lt ERRNO MSG gt Cannot unlock emulator emulator not locked Cause You have issued a command to unlock an emulator that is not locked Action The emulator is available now You can start the interface Cannot unlock emulator lock file missing Cannot unlock emulator semaphore missing Cause Lock semaphore missing Action Verify existence and permissions of usr hp64000 directory Cycle emulator power and use emul700 u lt logical name gt Cannot unlock emulator emulator in use by user lt USER NAME gt Cause The emulator is already in use by the named user Action Current user must release the emulator 45
446. unts in absolute or relative format Display the trace with address information offset by a value Return to the default trace display 250 Chapter 7 Using the Emulation Analyzer Modifying the Trace Display To display a dequeued trace e Use the dequeue on option to the display trace command Unused prefetches are removed from the trace display and data transactions are aligned with the instructions that caused them to occur Examples To display a dequeued trace display trace dequeue on lt RETURN gt Opcode or Status time count G 6GFC LINK W AG 000A 00012F94 stck sdata wr 00012FF 004 Ga GGFC4 JSR 0000 14E8 00012F90 stck sdata wr 000 FCA 010 0OB14E6 LINK W AG 0000 012F8C steck sdata wr 00012F94 014 G BG14EC MOVE W 0049 000072D6 00072D6 dest sdata wr 4849 618 GAGG14F4 MOVE W 8820 00007208 80887208 dest sdata wr 8820 023 GBBB14FC MOVE W 8844 88076EE G48676EE dest sdata wr 4844 028 46801584 MOVE W 0029 4a0076F8 000076F A dest sdata wr 4829 033 6 8158C CLR B 000077 00 00007 700 dest sdata wr 84 To turn OFF the dequeued trace display display trace dequeue off lt RETURN gt 251 Chapter 7 Using the Emulation Analyzer Modifying the Trace Display To display the trace about a line number e Use the lt LINE gt option to the display trace command The lt LINE gt trace display option allows you to specify the
447. urce parameter allows display of source program lines in the trace listing enabling you to quickly correlate the trace list with your source program Initial values are the same as specified by the command display trace mnemonic count relative offset_by 0 lt RETURN gt The parameters are as follows absolute Lists trace information in hexadecimal format rather than mnemonic opcodes align_data_ Use this to correct data alignment problems if you see any in a dequeued trace list from_line If you see that the dequeuer has aligned data with the wrong instructions use this token to select the correct data alignment by specifying the line that should begin a data realignment align_data_from_line 36 all_cycles Used to specify that all cycles should be included in the inverse assembled information shown in the trace list count absolute This lists the time count for each event of the trace as the total time measured from the trigger event relative This lists the time count for each event of the trace as the time measured relative to the previous event 361 Chapter 11 Emulator Analyzer Interface Commands display trace depth lt DEPTH gt dequeue disassemble _from_line _ number EXPR high_word instructions_only lt LINE gt low_word mnemonic offset_by This defines the number of states to be uploaded by the interface Note that after you have changed the trace depth execute the command
448. ure 80 channels of emulation processor bus cycle information synchronously with the processor s clock signal This analyzer is called the emulation analyzer With the Emulator You Can Plug into 68340 target systems with Pin Grid Array PGA sockets Download programs into emulation memory or target system RAM Display or modify the contents of processor registers and memory resources Run programs at clock speeds up to 25 MHz with active probe boards 64751 66508 and higher up to 16 78 MHz with boards 64751 66506 and lower set up software breakpoints step through programs and reset the emulation processor With the Analyzer You Can e Trigger the analyzer when a particular bus cycle state is captured You can also trigger the analyzer after a state has occurred a specified number of times States are stored relative to the trigger state Qualify which states get stored in the trace Prestore certain states that occur before each qualified store state Trigger the analyzer after a sequence of up to 8 different events have occurred Cause the emulator to stop program execution when the analyzer finds its trigger condition With the HP 64700 Card Cage You Can Use the RS 422 capability of the serial port and an RS 422 interface card on the host computer HP 98659 for the HP 9000 Series 300 to provide upload download rates of up to 230 4K baud Easily upgrade HP 64700 firmware by downloading to flash memory With
449. urement can be defined to your needs The display command uses the set command specifications to format measurement results for the display window Another option to the set command lt ENV_VAR gt lt VALUE gt allows you to set and export system variables to the UNIX environment The default display format parameters are the same as those set by the commands set update set source off symbols off You can return the display format to this state by entering set default The parameters are as follows This option restores all the set options to their default settings Specifies the name of a UNIX environment variable to be set The equals sign is used to equate the lt ENV_VAR gt parameter to a particular value represented by lt VALUE gt This displays source lines in normal video This highlights the source lines on the screen dark characters on light background to differentiate the source lines from other data on the screen In certain languages you may have symbols with the same names but different types For example in IEEE695 you may have a file named main c and a procedure named main SRU would identify these as main module and main procedure The command display local_symbols_in main would cause an error message to appear Ambiguous symbol main procedure module Users of C tend to think the procedure is important and users of ADA tend to think the module is important By entering Ianginfo and C SRU
450. uring the Emulator Selecting the Emulation Monitor To select the background monitor Access the configuration questions Answer yes to the Modify memory configuration question Answer background to the Monitor type question Answer yes to the Reset map change of monitor type requires map reset question Re map memory see the following section on Mapping Memory When a background monitor is selected the Background Debug Mode BDM of the 68340 processor is used The BKPT line is asserted to enter the monitor During background monitor operation there will be no bus cycle activity except for memory reads and writes that result from memory display or modify commands Changing the monitor configuration resets the memory map so you must re map memory 125 Chapter 5 Configuring the Emulator Selecting the Emulation Monitor j 10 11 12 13 To select the foreground monitor program Access the configuration questions Answer yes to the Modify memory configuration question Answer foreground to the Monitor type question Answer yes to the Reset map change of monitor type requires map reset question Enter 0 through 7 in response to the Interrupt priority level for default foreground monitor question Enter the base address of the monitor in response to the Monitor s base address question Answer the Enable DSACK interlocking on monitor addresses question
451. ust have no function code specified 127 Chapter 5 Configuring the Emulator Selecting the Emulation Monitor The current memory map will be deleted and a new map term is added for the monitor Specifying Target Synchronization If you wish to synchronize monitor cycles to the target system that is interlock the emulation and target system DSACK on accesses to the monitor memory block answer yes to the Enable DSACK interlocking on monitor addresses question otherwise answer no When interlocking is enabled cycle termination of accesses to foreground monitor memory will not occur until the target system provides a DSACK If the monitor is placed in an address range for which the target system does not generate a DSACK the emulator will be unable to break into the monitor and a CPU in wait state status will result When interlocking is disabled accesses to foreground monitor memory will be terminated by a DSACK signal generated by the emulator Any cycle termination signals generated by the target system during monitor memory accesses including BERR will be ignored Modifying this configuration item will reset the processor and controls whether the dsi DSACK Interlock memory attribute is used in the foreground monitor memory map term Re Mapping Memory When you configure the emulator for a foreground monitor program the memory map is reset and a 4 Kbyte block of emulation memory is automatically mapped
452. value of it by entering set lt RETURN gt 209 Chapter 6 Using the Emulator Using System Commands Examples To display the name of the emulation module Using the command line enter the name_of_module command While operating your emulator you can verify the name of the emulation module This is also the logical name of the emulator in the emulator device file To display the name of your emulation module name_of_module lt RETURN gt The name of the emulation module is displayed on the status line To display the event log Choose Display Event Log Position the mouse pointer on the status line press and hold the select mouse button and then choose Display Event Log from the popup menu Using the command line enter the display event_log command The last 100 events that have occurred during the emulation session are displayed The status of the emulator and analyzer are recorded in the event log as well as the conditions that cause the status to change for example software breakpoints and trace commands 210 Chapter 6 Using the Emulator Using System Commands To display the error log e Choose Display Error Log e Position the mouse pointer on the status line press and hold the select mouse button and then choose Display Error Log from the popup menu e Using the command line enter the display error_log command The last 100 error messages that have occurred during t
453. vel program source lines To step a source line from the current program counter click on the Step Source action key Or using the command line enter step source lt RETURN gt Notice that the highlighted bar the current program counter moves to the next high level source line Step into the init_system function by continuing to step source lines either by clicking on the Step Source action key by clicking on the Again action key which repeats the previous command or by entering the step source command on the command line Memory sp tmnemonic file init_system module init_system c data void init_val_arr 29 void 38 init_system gt 31 p FUNCTION init_system 32 Initialize the target values for temperature and humidity 33 target_temp 73 34 target_humid 45 35 36 Intialize the variables indicating the current environment 37 conditions 38 current_temp 68 39 current_humid 41 40 41 Set starting directions for temp and humid 42 temp_dir up 35 Chapter 1 Getting Started Step 5 Display the previous mnemonic display Step 5 Display the previous mnemonic display Click on the Disp Src Prev action key Or using the command line enter display memory mnemonic previous_display lt RETURN gt This command is useful for example when you have stepped into a function that you do not wish to look at you can display the p
454. viously specified entries Emulator Analyzer Modify Registe Placing the mouse pointer in the text Modify Register entry area lets you type in the register Name name and value To define the type of value press Value Type Hex and hold the command select mouse 2 Read Current Register Value button and drag the mouse to select the value type Clicking this checkbox causes the current value of the named register to be placed in the Value text entry area Clicking this button modifies Clicking this button cancels Clicking this button modifies the the register to the value modification and closes the register to the value specified and specified and leaves the dialog dialog box closes the dialog box box open e Using the command line enter the modify register lt register gt to lt value gt command You can modify the emulator configuration registers CF_SIM register class however any changes you make this way are not saved when you save the configuration You must modify the configuration to have emulator configuration register changes saved 197 Chapter 6 Using the Emulator Displaying and Modifying Memory Displaying and Modifying Memory You can display and modify the contents of memory in hexadecimal formats and in real number formats You can also display the contents of memory in assembly language mnemonic format This section shows you how to Display memory Display memory in mnemoni
455. wait measurement_complete before displaying the trace Otherwise the new trace states will not be available This obtains a trace list showing the activity of the emulation processor during the trace Unused prefetches are eliminated from this display and data transactions are aligned with the instructions that caused them to occur Displays the trace at a certain line number and disassembles instruction opcodes An expression is a combination of numeric values symbols operators and parentheses specifying an offset value to be subtracted from the addresses traced by the emulation analyzer See the EXPR syntax diagram Causes inverse assembly to begin with the opcode in the high word of the long word located in the specified trace memory line number This field is isn t applicable for the 68340 because its data bus is 16 bits wide Causes the trace list to contain only those lines that show an instruction opcode This prompts you for the trace list line number to be centered in the display Also you can use lt LINE gt with disassemble_from_line_number lt LINE gt prompts you for the line number from which the inverse assembler attempts to disassemble data in the trace list When used with align_data_from_line this is the line number from which to begin aligning data The line number specified for data alignment must be the same as or higher than the line number specified for the beginning of the trace disassembly Causes inve
456. warding Commands to Other HP 64700 Interfaces 105 To forward commands to the high level debugger 105 To forward commands to the software performance analyzer 106 Configuring the Emulator Using the Configuration Interface 110 To start the configuration interface 111 To modify a configuration section 113 To store aconfiguration 115 To change the configuration directory context 116 To display the configuration context 117 To access help information 117 To exit the configuration interface 118 To load a configuration 118 Modifying the General Configuration Items 119 To select the emulator s clock source 119 To enable disable entry into the monitor after configuration 120 To restrict to real time runs 120 To turn OFF the restriction to real time runs 121 Reconfiguring the Emulator Configuration Registers 122 To define values for the emulator configuration registers 122 Selecting the Emulation Monitor 123 To select the background monitor 125 To select the foreground monitor program 126 To use a custom foreground monitor program 129 Mapping Memory 133 To map memory ranges 135 To characterize unmapped ranges 139 To delete memory map ranges 140 To map memory ranges that use function codes 141 To emulate global chip select operation 143 Contents Configuring the Emulator Pod 148 To set the reset values of the SSP and PC 148 To specify the user memory access size 149 Setting the Debug Trace Options 150 To
457. windows the xterm window program is located in the directory ust openwin demo type setenv KEYMAP xterm 2 9 Reminder If you are using OpenWindows add usr openwin bin to the end of the PATH definition and add the following line to your profile setenv OPENWINHOME usr openwin After you have mapped your function keys you must start the X server and an X window manager if you are not currently running an X server 548 Chapter 15 Installation Verifying the Installation Verifying the Installation This section shows you how to e Determine the logical name of your emulator e Start the emulator analyzer interface for the first time e Exit the emulator analyzer interface Step 1 Determine the logical name of your emulator The logical name of an emulator is a label associated with a set of communications parameters in the HP64000 etc 64700tab net file The 64700tab net file is placed in the directory as part of the installation process j Display the 64700tab net file by entering more usr hp64700 etc 64700tab net at the HP UX prompt 2 Page through the file until you find the emulator you are going to use This step will require some matching of information to an emulator but it should not be difficult to determine which emulator you want to address Examples A typical entry for a 68340 emulator connected to the LAN would appear as follows T es li a a a ena al gt lg aa a ae ae a hE a a GS a
458. wing sub steps assume that you want to install all products on the tape 538 j Chapter 15 Installation Installing HP 9000 Software Become the root user on the system you want to update Make sure the tape s write protect screw points to SAFE Put the product media into the tape drive that will be the source device for the update process Confirm that the tape drive BUSY and PROTECT lights are on If the PROTECT light is not on remove the tape and confirm the position of the write protect screw If the BUSY light is not on check that the tape is installed correctly in the drive and that the drive is operating correctly When the BUSY light goes off and stays off start the update program by entering etc update at the HP UX prompt When the HP UX update utility main screen appears confirm that the source and destination devices are correct for your system Refer to the information on updating HP UX in your HP UX documentation if you need to modify these values Select Load Everything from Source Media when your source and destination directories are correct To begin the update press the softkey lt Select Item gt At the next menu press the softkey lt Select Item gt again Answer the last prompt with y It takes about 20 minutes to read the tape When the installation is complete read tmp update log to see the results of the update 539 Chapter 15 Installation Installing HP 9000 Software j
459. word 081 BG88G81A 4688 supr prgm word tee ete tee eteteegeretest 262 Chapter 7 Using the Emulation Analyzer Modifying the Trace Display To return to the default trace display e Use the set default command The set default command allows you to return to the default display Examples To return to the default trace display set default lt RETURN gt race List Address Opcode or Status time count mnemonic re tive 8G154E LINK W AB aaa8 720 6861556 4888 supr pram word rd ds16 680 a612F84 6881 supr data long wr ds16 720 BABIZF86 8 2F8C supr data word wr ds16 720 agi552 MOVEA L 00007 156 AA 720 84861554 4808 supr prgm word rd ds16 720 6 861556 7156 supr prgm word rd ds16 720 00001558 MOVEQ gaaaGaG 01 720 4 6155A NOP 720 agissc MOVE L 01 08 728 G155E ADD L 04 08 720 156 ADD L 01 08 680 g i562 LSL L 2 DO 720 61564 MOVE W 0041 00 AG DA L 720 G881566 0041 supr prgm word 720 4 81566 4688 supr prgm word 720 263 Chapter 7 Using the Emulation Analyzer Saving and Restoring Traces Examples Saving and Restoring Traces The emulator analyzer interface allow you to save trace commands and trace lists You can restore trace commands in order to set up the same trace specification You can restore traces in order to view trace data captured in the stored trace This section describes how to e Save trace commands e Restore t
460. x diagrams as G The NORMAL Key The softkey labeled NORMAL allows you exit the SYMB definition and access softkeys that are not displayed when defining expressions You can press this key after you have defined an expression to view other available options 338 Chapter 11 Emulator Analyzer Interface Commands Commands Emulator analyzer interface commands are summarized in the table below and described in the following pages UNIX_COMMAND bbaunload break cd change directory cmb_execute lt command file gt copy data copy display copy error_log copy event_log copy global_symbols copy help copy local_symbols_in copy memory copy pod_command copy registers copy software_breakpoints copy status copy trace cws change working symbol display data display error_log 3 display event_log display global_symbols display local_symbols_in display memory display pod_command display registers display simulated_io display software_breakpoints display status display trace end forward help load lt absolute_file gt load configuration load emul_mem load trace load trace_spec load user_memory log_commands modify configuration modify keyboard_to_simio l This option is not available in real time mode gt This is only available when simulated I O is defined These commands are not displayed on softkeys This option is not available in real time mode
461. xample encountering a breakpoint cause the data values screen to be updated 204 Chapter 6 Using the Emulator Displaying Data Values To clear the data values display and add a new item Place an absolute or symbolic address in the entry buffer then choose Display Data Values New and select the data type from the cascade menu Using the command line enter the display data lt address gt command To add items to the data values display Place an absolute or symbolic address in the entry buffer then choose Display Data Values Add Q and select the data type from the cascade menu Using the command line enter the display data lt address gt command 205 Chapter 6 Using the Emulator Changing the Interface Settings Changing the Interface Settings This section shows you how to e Set the source symbol modes e Set the display modes To set the source symbol modes To display assembly language mnemonics with absolute addresses choose Settings Source Symbol Modes Absolute or using the command line enter the set source off symbols off command To display assembly language mnemonics with absolute addresses replaced by global and local symbols where possible choose Settings Source Symbol Modes Symbols or using the command line enter the set source off symbols on command To display assembly language mnemonics intermixed with high level source lines choose Settings Sour
462. y Color 502 Softkey Input 502 Softkey Label 502 Softkey Large 502 Softkey Small 502 wildcard character 498 xrdb 500 xrm command line option 501 X server 314 500 591 Index X Window System 65 XEnv_68k_except symbol and effect on breakpoints 181 592 Certification and Warranty Certification Hewlett Packard Company certifies that this product met its published specifications at the time of shipment from the factory Hewlett Packard further certifies that its calibration measurements are traceable to the United States National Bureau of Standards to the extent allowed by the Bureau s calibration facility and to the calibration facilities of other International Standards Organization members Warranty This Hewlett Packard system product is warranted against defects in materials and workmanship for a period of 90 days from date of installation During the warranty period HP will at its option either repair or replace products which prove to be defective Warranty service of this product will be performed at Buyer s facility at no charge within HP service travel areas Outside HP service travel areas warranty service will be performed at Buyer s facility only upon HP s prior agreement and Buyer shall pay HP s round trip travel expenses In all other cases products must be returned to a service facility designated by HP For products returned to HP for warranty service Buyer shall prepay
463. y accessed directory a predefined directory or specify a new directory 85 Chapter 4 Entering Commands Using Menus the Entry Buffer and Action Keys File Selection From the working directory you can select an existing file name or specify a new file name Entry Buffer Recall You can recall a previously used entry buffer text string a predefined entry buffer text string or a newly entered entry buffer string to the entry buffer text area Command Recall You can recall a previously executed command a predefined command or a newly entered command to the command line The dialog boxes share some common properties e Most dialog boxes can be left on the screen between uses e Dialog boxes can be moved around the screen and do not have to be positioned over the graphical interface window e Ifyou iconify the interface window all dialog boxes are iconified along with the main window Except for the File Selection dialog box predefined entries for each dialog box and the maximum number of entries are set via X resources refer to the Setting X Resources chapter 86 Chapter 4 Entering Commands Using Menus the Entry Buffer and Action Keys Examples To use the File Selection dialog box The file filter selects specific files Emulator Analyzer File Selection A list of File Filter filter matching fil se AE eae fusers qguest demo debug_env hp64751 EA from the current directory Files A list of files
464. y the command display memory 0 blocked bytes offset_by 0 Defaults are to values specified in the previous display memory command noappend This causes any copied information to overwrite an existing file with the same name specified by lt FILE gt If this option is not selected the default operation is to append the copied information to the end of an existing file with the same name that you specify 345 Chapter 11 Emulator Analyzer Interface Commands copy noheader pod_command printer registers lt REGISTER gt software _ breakpoints status SYMB thru_line_number to trace This copies the information into a file without headings This allows you to copy the most recent commands sent to the HP 64700 Series emulator analyzer This option specifies your system printer as the destination device for the copy command Before you can specify the printer as the destination device you must define PRINTER as a shell variable For example you could enter the text shown below after the symbol PRINTER lp export PRINTER If you don t want the print message to overwrite the command line execute set PRINTER lp s This allows you to copy a list of the contents of the emulation processor registers to the selected destination The copy register command is not allowed when the emulator is configured for real time runs and is running the user program With no options specified th
465. yes to the Modify emulator pod configuration question To access the questions in the Debug Trace Options section answer yes to the Modify debug trace options question 113 Chapter 5 Configuring the Emulator Using the Configuration Interface Each configuration section presents a window similar to the following The menu bar File Display Help select imternal or external emulation clock When the internal clock has been selected the emulator will operate using an internal 32 768 Khz crystal The target system MUST drive MODCLK high or allow a pullup resistor in the emulator to pull it high during reset to enable the 68340 VCO Configuration help text display area WR g the external clock has been selected the emulator will Wge the crystal or TTL oscillator in the target system MODCLK Should be driven appropriately Emulator status and error message line STATUS Configuring M68340 Micro processor clock source internal internal external l RECALL Command line text entry area Pushbutton softkeys Command control and cursor control pushbuttons To answer a configuration question click the softkey pushbutton that has your answer Or click on the Return command pushbutton to accept the answer that is shown When you answer a configuration question you are normally presented with the next question in the section however there are som
466. you power up the emulator or when you initialize it the background monitor is selected You can also configure the emulator to use a foreground monitor Before the background and foreground monitors are described you should understand the foreground and background emulator modes as well as the function of the emulation monitor Background Background is the emulator mode in which emulation processor execution is suspended Foreground Foreground is the mode in which the emulator executes as if it were a real microprocessor The emulator is in foreground when it is running user programs or running in a foreground monitor Function of the Monitor The monitor is the interface between the emulation system controller which accepts and executes emulation commands and the target system The monitor uses the emulation microprocessor because that s the only way to access registers single port emulation memory and target system memory When the emulation system controller recognizes that a command requires the monitor it writes a command code to a communications area and breaks emulator execution into the monitor The monitor reads this command and any associated parameters makes the appropriate accesses places the values in the communication area and returns emulator execution to its previous state 123 Chapter 5 Configuring the Emulator Selecting the Emulation Monitor Background Monitor When a background monitor is
467. zer trace signals The emulation analyzer trace signals are described in the table that follows 233 Chapter 7 Using the Emulation Analyzer Qualifying Trigger and Store Conditions Emulation Analyzer Trace Signals Trace Signal Signal Signals Name Description 0 31 A0 A31 Address Lines 0 31 32 47 DO D15 Data Lines 0 15 64 BKG_L Background Debug Mode BDM active This signal is used to qualify the analyzer clock for tracing only foreground or only background cycles 65 FCO Function Codes 0 2 These lines to the analyzer are derived from the 66 FCI 68340 processor s function code lines The function code meanings are 67 FC2 001 User Data Space 010 User Program Space 101 Supervisor Data Space 110 Supervisor Program Space 111 CPU Space 68 R W Read write signal 69 SIZO Number of bytes remaining to be transferred 70 SIZ1 71 CS_BYTE_L Chip select byte word signal 72 DSO_L Data size acknowledge Note that the 68340 SIM can be programmed to 73 DS1_L internally generate the DSACKx signals for external accesses in this case the DSACKx values do not show up on these trace signals 74 BERR_L Bus error active 75 HALT_L Halt active 76 CODE_L Instruction execution active 77 FLUSH_L Instruction pipeline flush active 78 FC3 Function code 3 This can be set by the 68340 DMA controller for DMA transfers however 79 CSO_L Chip select 0 active 234

68340 Emulator/Analyzer Graphical User Interface

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents